JP6798171B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

In the gaming machine of the pachinko machine or the like, comprising a base member, a first means for displacement between a predetermined position and a first position relative to the base member, second means for displacing with respect to the first means, the A gaming machine is known (Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-23874

However, in the above-described gaming machine, displacement of area of the second means has a problem of being reduced.

The present invention has been made to solve the above illustrated problem, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of enlarging the displacement of area of the second means.

Gaming machine of claim 1, wherein in order to achieve the object, a base member, a first means for displacement between a predetermined position and a first position relative to the base member, the displacement with respect to the first means to a second unit, which comprises, with at least disposed possible regulating member to a displacement region of the said first means is have you in a state of being arranged at a predetermined position the second means, said regulating member, If the event said first means is displaced to the first position from the predetermined position occurs, is displaced in a direction away from the displacement region of said second means, said first means includes a first position from the predetermined position Ru is a displaceable second position in the opposite direction.

Gaming machine of claim 2, in the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein, Ru with a substrate box.

According to claim 1 the gaming machine according, it is possible to enlarge the displacement of area of the second displacement member.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of the operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the vertical displacement unit. It is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit. It is a front perspective view of the vertical displacement unit. It is a rear perspective view of the vertical displacement unit. It is a front perspective view of the vertical displacement unit. It is a rear perspective view of the vertical displacement unit. (A) is a front view of the vertical displacement unit, and (b) is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit. (A) is a front view of the vertical displacement unit, and (b) is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit. (A) is a front view of the vertical displacement unit, and (b) is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a regulation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a roller member. (A) is a side view of the regulation unit, (b) is a rear view of the regulation unit, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the regulation unit on the XXc-XXc line of FIG. 20 (b). It is a front view of the vertical displacement unit in the 1st position. (A) is an enlarged view of the vertical displacement unit in the XXII part of FIG. 21, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit in the line XXIIb-XXIIb of FIG. 22 (a). (A) to (c) are partially enlarged front views of the vertical displacement unit. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit on the line XXIVa-XXIVa of FIG. 23 (a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit on the line XXIVb-XXIVb of FIG. 23 (b). (C) is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit in the line XXIVc-XXIVc of FIG. 23 (c). It is an exploded front perspective view of a decorative member. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a decorative member. It is an exploded front perspective view of a rotating unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a rotating unit. (A) is a top view of the rotating unit, (b) is a front view of the rotating unit in the XXIXb direction view of FIG. 29 (a), and (c) is a front view of XXIXc-XXIXc of FIG. 29 (a). It is sectional drawing of the rotating unit in a line. (A) is a top view of the intermediate member, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate member in the line XXXb-XXXb of FIG. 30 (a). (A) is a front view of the front cover, and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the front cover in line XXXIb-XXXIb of FIG. 31 (a). (A) is a top view of the reflector, and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the reflector in line XXXIIb-XXXIIb of FIG. 32 (a). (A) is a top view of the rotating unit, and FIG. 33 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the rotating unit in line XXXIIIb-XXXIIIb of (a). (A) and (b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the rotating unit in the XXXIV section of FIG. 33 (b). (A) and (b) are front views of the rotating unit. (A) and (b) are top views of the rotating unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a center frame. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a center frame. (A) is a front view of the center frame, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the center frame in the line XXXIXb-XXXIXb of FIG. 39 (a). (A) is a cross-sectional view of the center frame on the XLa-XLa line of FIG. 39 (a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the center frame on the XLb-XLb line of FIG. 39 (a). (A) and (b) are sectional views of a rotating unit and a center frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of a sorting device. It is a partially enlarged front view of a sorting device. It is sectional drawing of the sorting apparatus in the XLIV-XLIV line of FIG. 43. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device on the XLVa-XLVa line of FIG. 43, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device on the XLVb-XLVb line of FIG. 45 (a), and FIG. 43 is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device on the XLVc-XLVc line of No. 43, and FIG. 45D is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device on the XLVd-XLVd line of FIG. 45. (A) is a cross-sectional view of a sorting device, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of a sorting device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a light emitting decoration unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the regulation unit in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a side view of the regulation unit, (b) is a rear view of the regulation unit, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the regulation unit in the XLIXc-XLIXc line of FIG. 49 (b). (A) to (c) are sectional views of the vertical displacement unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the sorting apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a partially enlarged front view of a sorting device. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device on the line LIIIa-LIIIa of FIG. 52, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device on the line LIIIb-LIIIb of FIG. 52 (b). (A) and (b) are sectional views of a sorting apparatus. (A) is a front view of the sorting device according to the fourth embodiment, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device on the LVb-LVb line of FIG. 55 (a), and FIG. 55 (c) is a sectional view of the sorting device. It is sectional drawing of the sorting apparatus in the LVc-LVc line of b). It is sectional drawing of the center frame 600 as a modification. (A) and (b) are front views of the vertical displacement unit in the fifth embodiment. It is an exploded perspective front view of the vertical displacement unit. (A) is a front view of the vertical displacement unit when the decorative member is arranged at the third position, and (b) is a front view of the vertical displacement unit when the decorative member is arranged at the second position. (C) is a front view of the vertical displacement unit in a state where the decorative member is arranged at the first position. It is a front view of the vertical displacement unit in a state where a decorative member is arranged in a 2nd position. It is a front view of the vertical displacement unit. (A) and (b) are front views of the vertical displacement unit. (A) is a front view of the vertical displacement unit in the sixth embodiment, and (b) is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit. (A) is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit in a state where the decorative member is arranged at the second position, and (b) is a rear view of the gear. (A) and (b) are perspective front views of the vertical displacement unit in the seventh embodiment. (A) and (b) are top views of the vertical displacement unit. (A) is a front view of the vertical displacement unit in a state where the decorative member is arranged at the second position, and (b) is a top view of the vertical displacement unit in the direction of arrow LXVIIb of FIG. 67 (a). .. (A) is a top view of the vertical displacement unit in a state where the displacement of the displacement unit is regulated, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit in line LXVIIIb-LXVIIIb of FIG. 68 (a). (A) is a front view of the vertical displacement unit in the eighth embodiment, and (b) is a perspective front view of the vertical displacement unit. (A) is a front view of the base unit, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the base unit in the line LXXb-LXXb of FIG. 70 (a). It is an exploded perspective front view of a base unit. (A) is a front view of the vertical displacement unit, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit in the line LXXIIb-LXXIIb of FIG. 72 (a). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the vertical displacement unit. (A) is a front view of the vertical displacement unit, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit in the line LXXIVb-LXXIVb of FIG. 74 (a). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the vertical displacement unit. (A) is a front view of the vertical displacement unit in the ninth embodiment, and (b) is a perspective front view of the vertical displacement unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of the vertical displacement unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of a slide unit. It is a side view of the vertical displacement unit. It is a side view of the vertical displacement unit. It is a side view of the vertical displacement unit. (A) is a front view of the vertical displacement unit in the tenth embodiment, and (b) is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit. (A), (c), and (e) are rear views of the vertical displacement unit, and (b), (d), and (f) are front views of the vertical displacement unit. It is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit in eleventh embodiment. (A) to (c) are rear views of the vertical displacement unit. (A) to (c) are rear views of the vertical displacement unit. It is a front view of the vertical displacement unit in the twelfth embodiment. (A) and (b) are front views of the vertical displacement unit in the thirteenth embodiment. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit in the line LXXXIXa-LXXXXA of FIG. 88 (b), and FIG. 8 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit in the line LXXXXb-LXXXXb of FIG. (A) and (b) are sectional views of the vertical displacement unit. (A) is a front view of the vertical displacement unit as a modification, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit in the XCIb-XCIb line of FIG. 80 (a). (A) and (b) are front views of the vertical displacement unit as a modification.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 47, as a first embodiment, an embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 1 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 1 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 1, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 1 has an outer frame 2 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 2 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 2. It is provided with an inner frame 4 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 2 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 4, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 4 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 4 from the back surface side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front surface of the game board 13 to perform a ball game. The inner frame 4 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 4, a front door 5 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front door 5 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front door. The lower plate unit 15 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 4 and the lock of the front door 5 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front door 5 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 5c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses 8 is arranged on the back surface side of the front door 5, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 through the glass unit 16.

On the front door 5, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project forward, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect content of the super reach. To.

The front door 5 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front door 5 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window 5c. In the pachinko machine 1, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach production. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front door 5 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front door 5 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 1. Further, in the pachinko machine 1, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to a region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

Below the window portion 5c, a ball lending operation portion 40 is arranged. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted in the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 1, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which balance information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the balance is displayed as numerical value as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged.

Inside the operation handle 51, there is a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation period, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by the change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to (launch intensity), whereby the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a "thousand-car box") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill, rails 76, 77, and a general prize. The opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the first through gates 66, 67, the variable display device unit 80, etc. are assembled to form an inner frame 4 (FIG. 1). It is attached to the back side of (see). The base plate 60 is made of wood to which thin plate materials are laminated, and is formed so that the player cannot see various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are arranged in the through hole of the game board 13. It is fixed from the front side with tapping screws or the like.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 4 through the window portion 5c (see FIG. 1) of the front door 5. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 77 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 77 in the same manner as the outer rail 77. The arc-shaped inner rail 76 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back, so that the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is divided by two rails 76 and 77 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired). This is the area where the rails flow down.

The two rails 76 and 77 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 76 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 77 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center.

In the lower left side of the front view (lower left side of FIG. 2) of the game area, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 1 is in the probabilistic change, the time reduction, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 1 is changing or not by the lighting state. , Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot, or an off symbol is indicated by the lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the round during the jackpot is indicated by the 7-segment display device. Display the number and error. It should be noted that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors can suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 1 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

In the pachinko machine 1, a lottery is performed when either the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 receives a prize. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 1 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and if it is determined to be a big hit, it also determines the type of the big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, but if it is a big hit, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is shown. ..

Here, the "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot of 15 rounds, and the "4R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. Further, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and then the probability shifts to a low probability state, and the time is shortened during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). is there.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability increases as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, during so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game in which it is easy to shift to a special gaming state. It is the state of. The high-probability state (during probabilistic change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640. The "low probability state" refers to a state in which the probability change is not in progress, and a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than in the probability change. In addition, in the "low probability state", the time saving state (time saving medium) is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains the same and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased to increase the second winning opening 640. It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 1 is in the normal state, it is a state of the game in which neither the probability change nor the time reduction is performed (the jackpot probability and the hit probability of the second symbol are not increased).

During the probability change and the time reduction, not only the hit probability of the second symbol increases, but also the time when the first electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed, which is longer than the normal time. The time is set. When the first electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the second winning opening 640 is compared with the case where the first electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). The ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, the ball can easily win the second winning opening 640, and the number of times the big hit lottery is performed can be increased.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the opening time of the first electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, one hit. The change may be made so that the number of times the first electric accessory 640a is opened is increased from the normal time. In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the time when the first electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened and the first electric accessory per hit. At least one of the number of times the 640a is opened may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time when the first electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened, and the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82 are opened at one time. It may be changed so that only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased as compared with the normal time, without the number of times of doing.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by the winning (starting winning) of either the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640, and is synchronized with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and is the third. The third symbol display device 81, which is composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") that displays variable symbols, and the second through gate 66, 67 are triggered by the passage of spheres to display the second symbol in a variable manner. A second symbol display device (not shown) composed of LEDs is provided.

Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 600 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized from the opening opened in the center of the center frame 600.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch size liquid crystal display, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, the upper, middle, and lower 3 Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state displayed by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, whereas the first of the third symbol display devices 81 is A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

The second symbol display device displays a symbol "○" and a symbol "x" as display symbols (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time each time the sphere passes through the first through gates 66 and 67. It is a variable display that lights up alternately. In the pachinko machine 1, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the first through gates 66 and 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol of "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 1, when the variation display in the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (the symbol “○” in the present embodiment), the first electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 It is configured to be in operation (open) for a predetermined time.

The time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or the time reduction than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and the time reduction, the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than during the normal time. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player many opportunities to open the first electric accessory 640a of the second winning opening 640. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and the time saving.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the second winning opening may be made during the probability change or the time reduction by other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening the first electric accessory 640a per hit. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize in the 640 and the third winning opening, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or one hit. The opening time and the number of times of opening of the first electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The first through gates 66 and 67 are assembled to the game board in the regions on both sides of the variable display device unit 80. The first through gates 66 and 67 are configured so that a part of the balls launched on the game board can pass through the balls flowing down the game board. When the ball passes through the first through gates 66 and 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery result is a winning symbol, a symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the winning lottery result is incorrect. For example, a symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of times the balls have passed through the first through gates 66 and 67 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the second symbol holding lamp (FIG. Even in (not shown), it is lit and displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are symmetrically arranged below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third. It may be performed by using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the balls of the first through gates 66 and 67 is not limited to 4, but is set to 3 times or less or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Is also good. Further, the number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Further, the assembly position of the through gate is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol holding lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning opening 64 in which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by the turning on of the first winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made in (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, below the front view of the first winning opening 64, a second winning opening 640 in which the ball can win is arranged. When the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 (not shown) is turned on due to the turning on of the second winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

In addition, the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 are also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 are configured to be the same. , The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 are different numbers, for example, balls to the first winning opening 64. The number of prize balls paid out when a prize is won may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball is won in the second winning opening 640 may be configured as five.

A first electric accessory 640a is attached to the second winning opening 640. The first electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the first electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to win a prize in the second winning opening 640. There is. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the first through gates 66 and 67, the first electric accessory The 640a is in the open state (expanded state), and the ball is in a state in which it is easy to win the second winning opening 640.

As described above, during the probability change and the time reduction, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during the normal time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. Therefore, in the variation display of the second symbol, "○" The symbol "" is easily displayed, and the number of times that the first electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time for opening the first electric accessory 640a is also longer than during the normal operation. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to win the second winning opening 640 as compared with the normal time.

Here, the probability of winning a jackpot is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640. However, the probability of becoming a 15R probability variation jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the case of a jackpot is higher when the ball wins the second winning opening 640 than when the ball wins the first winning opening 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have the first electric accessory 640a as in the second winning opening 640, and the ball is in a state where it can always win a prize.

Therefore, in normal times, the electric accessory attached to the second winning opening 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Therefore, toward the first winning opening 64 without the electric accessory. Then, it is better to shoot the ball so that the ball passes to the left side of the variable display device unit 80, and to get many chances of a big hit lottery by winning the first winning opening 64, aiming to be a big hit. It is advantageous for the player.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the first through gates 66 and 67, the first electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is likely to be opened, and the second winning opening 640 Since it is easy to win a prize, the ball is launched toward the second winning opening 640 so that the ball passes to the right of the variable display device unit 80, and passes through the first through gates 66 and 67 to pass the first through gate 66 and 67. It is advantageous for the player to aim at the 15R probability variation jackpot by opening the electric accessory 640a and winning the second winning opening 640.

As described above, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment fires a ball at the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 (whether it is in the probabilistic change, in the time saving, or in the normal state). You can change the way you do it. Therefore, it is possible to change the way the ball is hit by the player, so that the game can be enjoyed.

A variable winning device 65 is arranged below the first winning opening 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 1, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of either the first winning slot 64 or the second winning slot 640 becomes a jackpot, the jackpot is stopped after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so as to be a symbol, and the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a lapse of a predetermined time, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous for the player, and the player is given a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a game value (game value). Is done.

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And have. The specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate downward to the front, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball can easily win a prize in the specific winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normal closing state are formed. It operates so as to alternate between the state and the state.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. Further, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the right side of the first winning opening 64, for example. It may be on the left side of the variable display device unit 80.

At the right corner on the lower side of the game board 13, a sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided, and the certificate stamp or the like stuck on the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front door 5. It can be visually recognized through 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. A ball that flows down the game area and does not win any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640, 82, is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out opening 71. To. The first out opening 71 is arranged below the first winning opening 64.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc., is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if you try to forcibly open the board boxes 100 and 102, the box base side and the box cover Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls is appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 1 to the initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 1.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 is used for major processing of the pachinko machine 1, such as a jackpot lottery, display settings in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and a lottery of display results in the second symbol display device. To execute.

In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, flags, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 1 is restored to the state before the power is cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (not shown) at the time of turning on the power. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

The input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol hold lamp, and the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown), a slide position detection sensor S, a sensor group including a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. .. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, other devices 228, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. The other device 228 includes drive motors 441 and 457.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. (Display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.) notifies the display control device 114. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed or the super reach can be changed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content of the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the voice output device 226, and also outputs the voice corresponding to the display content. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

In the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 are connected, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol variation effect of the third symbol display device 81 and the like are performed. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output from the voice output device 226 are matched. be able to.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 1, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, a schematic configuration of the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 8. FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operating unit 200, and FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating unit 200. 7 and 8 are front views of the operating unit 200.

In FIG. 7, the displacement members 430 arranged at the left and right ends of the vertical displacement unit 400 are displaced to the retracted positions, respectively. In FIG. 8, the displacements arranged at the left and right ends of the vertical displacement unit 400 are displaced. The states in which the members 430 are displaced to the overhanging positions are shown in the drawings.

As shown in FIGS. 5 to 8, the operation unit 200 includes a back case 300 formed in a box shape, and in the internal space of the back case 300, a vertical displacement unit 400 is vertically displaced above the rear case 300, and a light emitting decoration is provided below. Each unit 800 is arranged.

The back case 300 includes a bottom wall portion 301 having a substantially rectangular front view, and an outer wall portion 302 erected from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 301 toward the front, and the wall portions 301 and 302 respectively. It is formed in a box shape with one side (front side) open. A front-view rectangular opening 301a is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 301, and a third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) arranged on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 301 can be visually recognized through the opening 301a. It is possible.

The vertical displacement unit 400 includes a rear base 420 formed in a substantially rectangular shape in front view arranged on the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300, and a displacement member 430 and a decorative member displaceable on the rear base 420. The displacement member 430 and the decorative member 450 are retracted above the back case 300, and the rear case opening 301a (that is, the third symbol display device 81) overhangs to the front side. It can be displaced from position (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

In this case, the decorative member 450 is provided with the rotating unit 500, and by rotating the rotating unit 500 and causing the LED of the irradiation unit 530 arranged in the rotating unit 500 to emit light, a pattern is produced by an afterimage of light. And symbols can be displayed. Details of such a structure will be described later.

The light emitting decoration unit 800 mainly includes a base body 810 and a light emitting device 820 arranged on the front side of the base body 810, and emits light from a plurality of LEDs 821 arranged inside the light emitting device 820. By changing the mode (for example, the number of LEDs 821 to be irradiated), the effect of light emission is performed. The details will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 9 to 47, detailed configurations of the vertical displacement unit 400, the rotating unit 500, the center frame 600, the sorting device 700, and the light emitting decoration unit 800 will be described. First, the vertical displacement unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 to 24.

First, the overall configuration of the vertical displacement unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 to 14. FIG. 9 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 400, and FIG. 10 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 400. 11 and 13 are front perspective views of the vertical displacement unit 400, and FIGS. 12 and 14 are rear perspective views of the vertical displacement unit 400.

As shown in FIGS. 9 to 14, the vertical displacement unit 400 includes a front base 410 having a substantially L-shaped front view, a back base 420 superposed on the back side of the front base 410, and a front side of the front base 410. The drive motor 441 arranged in the above, the displacement member 430 rotated by the driving force of the drive motor 441, and the displacement member 430 connected to one end side of the displacement member 430 in the vertical direction (up and down in FIG. 9) as the displacement member 430 is displaced. Decorative member 450 displaced in the direction), front cover 460 arranged in front of one end side of the front base 410, and decorative member arranged in the gap between the front cover 460 and the front base 410 facing each other. A guide rod P1 for guiding the sliding of the decorative member 450, a side wall member 470 arranged at the left-right end of the decorative member 450 to regulate the displacement of the decorative member 450, and a rotation restriction arranged on the front side of the front base 410. It is formed mainly including a member 480.

In the vertical displacement unit 400, all the members except the decorative member 450 are symmetrically arranged in a pair, and the decorative member 450 is interposed between the pair of opposing members. Further, the detailed description of the members arranged in a pair describes only the members arranged on the left side of the front view (left side of FIG. 9), and the members arranged on the right side of the front view (right side of FIG. 9) , The same reference numerals as those on the left side of the front view will be attached, and the description thereof will be omitted.

The front base 410 is formed of a plate-like body having a substantially L-shape in front view, and has a first piece 410X forming a long side of a substantially L-shape and a first piece 410X forming a short side of a substantially L-shape. It is mainly provided with two pieces 410Y.

The first piece 410X is arranged so that its extending direction is parallel to the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 9). Further, the first piece 410X has an upright portion 412 standing on the front side of the outer end portion (left end portion) in the left-right direction, an upper concave groove 413 recessed in an arc shape in the upper portion, and a cross section in the lower portion. It is mainly provided with a lower concave groove 414 formed in an arc shape.

The upright portion 412 is a wall that comes into contact with the sliding portion 451 of the decorative member 450, which will be described later, to regulate the rearward displacement of the decorative member 450, and extends from the upper part to the lower part of the left edge portion of the first piece 410X. It is formed.

The upper concave groove 413 and the lower concave groove 414 are grooves in which the guide rod P1 described later is internally fitted, and are recessed in a semicircular shape having an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the guide rod P1. Further, the upper concave groove 413 and the lower concave groove 414 are formed so that the axes formed in a semicircular arc shape are located on the same straight line, and the lower concave groove 414 is formed from the upper end portion of the upper concave groove 413. The distance between the facing ends of the guide rod P1 is set to be larger than the axial dimension of the guide rod P1. As a result, both ends of the guide rod P1 can be internally fitted into the upper concave groove 413 and the lower concave groove 414.

The second piece 410Y is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has an opening 411 penetrating in the front-rear direction in the center thereof, an engaging portion 415 protruding to the back side, and a shaft support portion 416 protruding in a cylindrical shape on the back side. Formed mainly in preparation.

The opening 411 is an opening for inserting the shaft portion of the drive motor 441 attached to the front side of the front base 410 to the back side of the front base 410, and is a transmission gear fitted to the shaft portion of the drive motor 441. The inner diameter is formed larger than the outer diameter of 442. As a result, when the drive motor 441 fails due to deterioration or the like, the drive motor 441 can be removed from the front base 410, and the transmission gear 442 can be removed from the vertical displacement unit 400 through the opening 411. As a result, after the transmission gear 442 is attached to the shaft portion of the new drive motor 441, the transmission gear 442 can be arranged by inserting the opening 411. Therefore, the shaft portion of the drive motor 441 can be arranged with the front base 410 and the rear base 420. Compared to the case where the drive motor 441 is arranged on the front base 410 while being inserted into the shaft hole of the transmission gear 443 arranged between the two, it can be performed more easily and the man-hours for parts replacement are reduced. be able to. Further, in this case, since the shaft hole of the transmission gear 443 can be securely fitted to the shaft portion of the drive motor 441, the reliability when the parts are replaced can be improved.

The engaging portion 415 is a protrusion for locking one end of the torsion spring SP1 described later, and protrudes from the back surface side of the second piece 410Y, and the protruding tip bends toward the center side in the left-right direction of the vertical displacement unit 400. It is formed in a substantially L-shaped cross section. As a result, the rotation of the torsion spring SP1 around the axis can be regulated by the protruding portion toward the back surface side, and the displacement of the torsion spring SP1 toward the back surface side can be regulated by the bending portion at the tip end.

The shaft support portion 416 is a cylindrical rod member made of a metal material, and one end side thereof is fitted to the back surface side of the front base 410.

The drive motor 441 is a motor that applies a driving force to the vertical displacement unit 400, and is a transmission gear 442 that is disposed on the front base 410 as described above and is disposed between the front base 410 and the rear base 420. , 443 can transmit the driving force.

As described above, the transmission gear 442 is a gear whose shaft hole is fitted onto the shaft portion of the drive motor 441 and is connected to the drive motor 441, and is arranged in mesh with the transmission gear 443.

The transmission gear 443 is a gear whose shaft hole is rotatably arranged between the front base 410 and the rear base 420 with the protrusion 417 of the front base 410 fitted therein, and is transmitted as described above. It is arranged in a state of being in mesh with the gear 442. Therefore, the driving force of the drive motor 441 can be transmitted to the transmission gear 443 via the transmission gear 442.

Further, the transmission gear 443 includes a protrusion 443a protruding from the side surface on the back surface side. The protrusion 443a is a rod member made of a metal material and formed in a cylindrical shape, and is arranged on the outer peripheral edge of the transmission gear 443. Therefore, when a driving force is applied to the drive motor 441 and the transmission gear 443 is rotated as described above, the protrusion 443a is displaced in an arc shape centered on the axis of the transmission gear 443.

The back base 420 is a plate member formed in an outer shape substantially the same as the front view shape of the second piece 410Y of the front base 410, and includes an upright portion 421 standing on the front side at the outer edge portion.

The erection portion 421 is a wall for forming a gap between the front base 410 and the back base 420 facing each other, and the erection distance is larger than the dimension in the front-rear direction in which the displacement member 430 and the transmission gear 443 are combined. It is set to a large size and is arranged in a state where the front end face is in contact with the back side of the front base 410. As a result, a gap for arranging the transmission gears 442 and 443 and the displacement member 430 described later can be formed between the front base 410 and the back base 420 facing each other.

The displacement member 430 is formed in a substantially L-shape in front view, and its outer edge portion is formed in a substantially box shape protruding toward the back surface side. Further, the displacement member 430 has a through hole 433 formed through the bent portion in a circular shape in the front-rear direction, a decorative side sliding hole 432 formed through the bent portion in the front-rear direction, and a short-side side. It mainly includes a drive-side sliding hole 431 formed through the other side in the front-rear direction, and a displacement-side engaging portion 434 protruding from the protrusion of the outer edge portion on one side on the long side.

The through hole 433 is a hole into which the shaft support portion 416 of the front base 410 is inserted, and is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft support portion 416. Therefore, after inserting the through hole 433 into the shaft support portion 416 of the front base 410, the front base 410 and the back base 420 are combined so that the displacement member 430 can be displaced with respect to the front base 410. Can be arranged in.

The drive-side sliding hole 431 is a long hole through which the protrusion 443a of the transmission gear 443 is inserted, and the width dimension in the lateral direction is set to be larger than the outer diameter of the protrusion 443a. Further, the drive side sliding hole 431 is formed in the longitudinal direction in the same direction as the extension direction (longitudinal direction) on the short side side of the displacement member 430, and as described above, the transmission gear 443 is the driving force of the drive motor 441. When rotated by, the protrusion 443a of the transmission gear 443 slides inside the drive-side sliding hole 431 in accordance with the displacement, thereby rotating the displacement member 430 around the through hole 433. That is, by driving the drive motor 441, the displacement member 430 can be displaced around the through hole 433.

The decorative side sliding hole 432 is an elongated hole that is arranged in the decorative member 450 described later and through which the support portion 452a formed in a columnar shape is inserted, and the width dimension in the lateral direction is the outer diameter of the support portion 452a. Is formed larger than. Further, the decorative side sliding hole 432 is formed in the longitudinal direction in the same direction as the extending direction (longitudinal direction) on the long side of the displacement member 430. As described above, the decorative side sliding hole 432 has an arcuate displacement locus centered on the through hole 433 when the displacement member 430 is rotated around the through hole 433.

The displacement side engaging portion 434 is a protrusion that engages the other end side of the torsion spring SP1 described later, and is formed so as to project from the inner peripheral surface of the outer edge portion projecting from the back surface side of the displacement member 430. Further, the displacement side engaging portion 434 is formed on the side surface inside the bending of the displacement member 430 that is bent in a substantially L shape in the front view. As a result, the displacement side engaging portion 434 can engage the other end side of the torsion spring SP1 with the inside of the displacement member 430 with the back surface side.

The torsion spring SP1 has its twisted portion arranged around the through hole 433 of the displacement member 430 (shaft support 416 of the front base 410) and rotates counterclockwise (vertical displacement unit) around the rotation axis of the displacement member 430. The displacement member 430 constituting the right side of the front view of 400 is subjected to an urging force (rotation to the right in front view) around its rotation axis, and one end side is the engaging portion 415 of the front base 410 and the other end side is the displacement member. It is engaged with the displacement side engaging portion 434 of 430, respectively. As a result, the displacement member 430 rotates counterclockwise with respect to the front base 410 around the axis of the through hole 433 (the shaft support portion 416 of the front base 410) (the displacement member 430 constituting the right side of the vertical displacement unit 400 in the front view rotates clockwise). ) Is always urged in the direction of.

As described above, the decorative member 450 is a member interposed between the pair of vertical displacement units 400 formed in pairs on the left and right, and the front base is arranged symmetrically in the left-right direction. It is set to be the same as the distance dimension between the outer ends of the 410 in the left-right direction.

The decorative member 450 is formed in a front view U-shape with the lower side open, and has a front base 452 forming a central portion thereof, sliding portions 451 connected to both ends in the left-right direction of the front base 452, and a front base. A back base 453 that covers the back surface of the 452 and a rotating unit 500 that is rotatably arranged on the front side of the front base 452 are mainly provided.

The front base 452 is formed from a horizontally long rectangular plate-like body when viewed from the front, and is formed in a U-shaped cross section in which the upper and lower end faces are bent toward the back side. The front base 452 includes a support portion 452a projecting from the back surface side, an engaging portion 452b projecting from both left and right end portions to the front side, and a contact surface 452h smoothly formed on the front side of both left and right end portions. It is mainly provided with an inclined surface 452g formed at the lower end of the contact surface 452h.

As described above, the support portion 452a is a rod member inserted into the decorative side sliding hole 432 of the displacement member 430, and is formed in a cylindrical rod-shaped body. As a result, the displacement member 430 is displaced by the driving force of the motor 441, and when the decorative side sliding hole 432 of the displacement member 430 is rotationally displaced about the through hole 433, it is inserted into the decorative side sliding hole 432. The support portion 452a is displaced with the displacement of the decorative side sliding hole 432. As a result, the decorative member 450 can be displaced by displacement of the support portion 452a.

The engaging portion 452b is a protrusion to which the other end of the urging spring SP2, which will be described later, is engaged, and is projected in a hook shape from the front side of both end portions of the front base 452.

The contact surface 452h is a smooth surface that comes into contact with the roller 492a of the regulation unit 490 described later, and is formed on a smooth surface on which the roller 492a can roll. The inclined surface 452g is a surface that inclines downward from the front side to the back side toward the lower end portion of the contact surface 452h. As a result, the regulation unit 490 described later and the decorative member 450 can be easily brought into contact with each other. A detailed description of the contact between the regulation unit 490 and the decorative member 450 will be described later.

The sliding portion 451 is a rod-shaped body having a rectangular cross section extending in the vertical direction, and is arranged so as to be connected to both left and right ends of the front base 452. Further, the sliding portion 451 includes a through hole 451a opened in the vertical direction. The through hole 451a is an opening through which the guide rod P1 is inserted, and is formed in a circular shape having an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the guide rod P1.

As a result, the displacement member 430 is displaced by the driving force of the drive motor 441, and when the decorative member 450 is displaced as described above, the direction of the displacement is changed by the sliding portions 451 arranged at both ends of the front base 452. Be regulated. As a result, the decorative member 450 is displaced along the axial direction (vertical direction) of the guide rod P1. That is, the decorative member 450 can be slidably displaced in the vertical direction by applying a driving force from the drive motor 441.

The back base 453 is a plate member that is covered on the back side of the front base 452 at a substantially central position in the left-right direction, and the size of the outer shape in the front view is formed to be substantially the same as the central portion of the front base 452. Thereby, the gears 454 to 456 can be rotatably arranged in the internal space of the front base 452 and the back base 453. Further, on the back surface of the back surface base 453, a drive motor 457 that outputs a rotation driving force and a control signal is attached to the rotation unit 500. A detailed description of the gears 454 to 456 and the drive motor 457 will be described later.

The front cover 460 is a member that is arranged to face the front side of the first piece 410X of the front base 410 and covers the front of the first piece 410X, and is abbreviated as the outer shape of the first piece 410X in front view. It is formed in the same shape. The front cover 460 includes an erection wall 461 that stands on the back side from the outer edge thereof, and is formed in a box-like body that opens on the back side.

The erection wall 461 includes an upper groove forming member 462 projecting upward from the side surface forming the upper side, and a lower groove forming member 463 projecting downward from the side surface forming the lower side.

The upper groove forming member 462 is formed at a position facing the upper concave groove 413 of the front base 410, and a concave groove 462a recessed in a semicircular shape is formed on the back surface side. On the other hand, the lower groove forming member 463 is formed at a position facing the lower concave groove 414 of the front base 410, and a concave groove 463a recessed in a semicircular shape is formed on the back surface side.

The concave grooves 462a and 463a are grooves in which the guide rod P1 is internally fitted, and are recessed in a semicircular shape having an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the guide rod P1. Further, in the concave grooves 462a and 463a, the shafts recessed in a semicircular arc shape are formed on the same straight line, and the distance between the upper end portion of the concave groove 462a and the lower end portion of the concave groove 463a is increased. It is set larger than the axial dimension of the guide rod P1. As a result, both ends of the guide rod P1 can be internally fitted into the recessed grooves 462a and 463a.

Therefore, when the front cover 460 is arranged in front of the front base 410, the guide rod P can be sandwiched between the upper concave groove 413 and the concave groove 462a and the lower concave groove 414 and the concave groove 463a. Therefore, the guide rod P1 can be arranged on the front base 410 in a non-removable state. As a result, the sliding portion 451 of the decorative member 450 through which the guide rod P1 is inserted can be held so as not to fall off from the front base 410.

Further, the distance dimension between the vertical wall 461 of the front cover 460 formed on the lateral side of the vertical displacement unit 400 and the vertical facing portion 412 formed on the first piece 410X of the front base 410 in the front-rear direction. Is set to be substantially the same as or slightly larger than the thickness dimension of the sliding portion 451 of the decorative member 450 in the front-rear direction, and the outer end portion of the sliding portion 451 in the left-right direction is arranged between the two. As a result, as described above, when the decorative member 450 is displaced in the vertical direction, it is possible to prevent the decorative member 450 from rattling in the front-rear direction.

The side wall members 470 are members arranged at both ends on the central side in the left-right direction of the vertical displacement unit 400, and are formed of a substantially L-shaped plate-like body bent to the back side in a side view. Further, a wall surface that bends outward in the left-right direction is formed on the front end surface of the side wall member 470, and a regulation unit 490 described later is attached to the wall surface.

Further, the side wall member 470 is patterned on the side surface on the center side in the left-right direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 9) with respect to the vertical displacement unit 400 by unevenness, color, or the like, so that the player can use the center frame 86 of the game board 13 ( The pattern of the side wall member 470 is visibly arranged through the central opening (see FIG. 2). As a result, the vertical displacement unit 400 (for example, the front cover 460) arranged outside the side wall member 470 in the left-right direction can be made invisible to the player.

The rotation restricting member 480 is formed of a horizontally long rectangular plate-like body when viewed from the front, and a ring-shaped roller 481 having an axis in the front-rear direction on the back surface side is rotatably attached. Further, the rotation restricting member 480 is formed so that its outer shape is substantially half of the outer shape of the second piece 410Y of the front base 410 in the front view, and is arranged in front of the front base 410 with a predetermined gap.

The rotation regulating member 480 is a member that returns the rotation unit 500, which will be described later, to the initial position, and the initial position of the rotation unit 500 can be defined by the contact between the roller 481 and the upper surface base 510.

The urging spring SP2 is a coil spring that connects the front base 410 and the decorative member 450 to urge the decorative member 450 upward, and one end thereof is engaged with the engaging portion 418 of the front base 410. The end is engaged with the engaging portion 412b of the decorative member 450. As a result, the decorative member 450 is always urged upward with respect to the front base 410. Therefore, when the decorative member 450 is displaced from the second position to the first position due to the displacement described later, the decorative member 450 can be easily displaced to the second position. Further, the urging spring SP2 is bent at the central portion along the outer peripheral surface of the roller 419. As a result, the length of the urging spring SP2 can be secured, and it is possible to prevent the urging force from increasing too much.

Next, the operation of the vertical displacement unit 400 configured as described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 to 17.

15 to 17 (a) are front views of the vertical displacement unit 400, FIG. 15 (a) is in a state of being arranged in the ascending position, and FIG. 16 (a) is between the ascending position and the descending position. FIG. 17A corresponds to the state of being arranged in the descending position, respectively.

15 (b) corresponds to FIG. 15 (a), FIG. 16 (b) corresponds to FIG. 16 (a), and FIG. 17 (b) corresponds to the rear view of the vertical displacement unit 400 in FIG. 17 (a). .. In addition, in FIG. 15 (b), FIG. 16 (b) and FIG. 17 (b), a state in which the back base 420 is removed is shown for easy understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 15A and 15B, in the state where the vertical displacement unit 400 is arranged in the ascending position (hereinafter, this state is referred to as the “second position”), the displacement member 430 is one of them. The side (the long side on which the decorative side sliding hole 432 is formed) is swung upward, and the decorative member 450 is positioned at the uppermost position. The support portion 452a of the decorative member 450 is located inside the decorative side sliding hole 432 of the displacement member 430, and is located close to the radial outer end portion from the axis of the through hole 433.

Further, in this state, the rotation direction of one side of the displacement member 430 (the short side on which the drive side sliding hole 431 is formed) is substantially the direction of the straight line connecting the rotation shaft of the transmission gear 443 and the protrusion 443a. Match. That is, a state in which the extending direction of the drive side sliding hole 431 of the displacement member 430 and the direction of the straight line connecting the rotation axis of the transmission gear 443 and the protrusion 443a are orthogonal to each other (the displacement member 430 and the transmission gear 443 are dead points). The state of forming). Therefore, the displacement member 430 cannot rotate around the through hole 433, and the weight of the decorative member 450 connected to the displacement member 430 can prevent the displacement member 430 from being rotationally displaced.

From the states shown in FIGS. 15A and 15B, when the pair of drive motors 441 are rotationally driven and each transmission gear 443 is rotated, the protrusion 443a of the transmission gear 443 is displaced from the displacement member 430. The drive-side sliding hole 431 is slid to push down the left and right displacement members 430, respectively.

As a result, the left and right displacement members 430 are rotated around the axis of the through hole 433, and the decorative member 450 is displaced downward as shown in FIGS. 16A and 16B. From this state, when each transmission gear 443 is further rotated by the rotational drive of the pair of drive motors 441, the left and right displacement members 430 are further pushed downward, and FIGS. 17 (a) and 17 (b) show. As shown, the decorative member 450 is arranged in a descending position (hereinafter, this state is referred to as a "first position").

As shown in FIGS. 17A and 17B, when the vertical displacement unit 400 is arranged at the first position, the left and right displacement members 430 are formed on one side (driving side sliding hole 431). The decorative member 450 is located at the lowermost position and is projected to the front side of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) by swinging down the short side). ..

Further, in this case (when the vertical displacement unit 400 is arranged in the descending position), the decorative side sliding hole 432 of the displacement member 430 is inclined downward toward the central portion in the left-right direction of the vertical displacement unit 400, and the through hole 433. The side surface of the support portion 452a of the decorative member 450 is brought into contact with the end side on the outer side in the radial direction. As a result, the weight of the decorative member 450 can exert a force that displaces in the direction of gravity and a force in the direction from the left-right direction to the center portion of the vertical displacement unit 400 on the support portion 452a. As a result, it is possible to prevent the decorative member 450 from rattling in the vertical and horizontal directions due to the displacement operation of the rotating unit 500 of the decorative member 450, which will be described later.

Further, the rotation direction of the other side of the displacement member 430 (the short side on which the drive side sliding hole 431 is formed) substantially coincides with the direction of the straight line connecting the rotation axis of the transmission gear 443 and the protrusion 443a. That is, a state in which the extending direction of the drive side sliding hole 431 of the displacement member 430 and the direction of the straight line connecting the rotation axis of the transmission gear 443 and the protrusion 443a are orthogonal to each other (the displacement member 430 and the transmission gear 443 are dead points). The state of forming). Therefore, the displacement member 430 cannot rotate about the through hole 433, and when the decorative member 450 rattles in the vertical direction due to the displacement operation of the rotation unit 500 described later, the displacement member 450 is displaced due to the rattling. It is possible to prevent the member 430 from being displaced. As a result, it is possible to suppress the lpttp of the decorative member 450 rattling.

Further, the regulation unit 490 is arranged in front of both ends of the decorative member 450. Thereby, the displacement of the decorative member 450 in the front-rear direction can be regulated. A detailed description of the regulation unit 490 will be described later.

Next, the regulation unit 490 will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 to 24.

First, the overall configuration of the regulation unit 490 will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 to 20. FIG. 18 is an exploded front perspective view of the regulation unit 490, and FIG. 19 is an exploded front perspective view of the roller member 492. 20 (a) is a side view of the regulation unit 490, FIG. 20 (b) is a rear view of the regulation unit 490, and FIG. 20 (c) is the line XXc-XXc of FIG. 20 (b). It is sectional drawing of the regulation unit 490.

As shown in FIGS. 18 to 20, the regulation unit 490 is a case member 491 formed in a box shape having an opening on the back surface side, a roller member 492 arranged inside the case member 491, and a case member 491. It is mainly provided with an outer edge member 493 disposed on an open (opening side) outer edge.

The case member 491 has a projecting portion 491a projecting from the side surface on the front side, a notch portion 491b notched on both side surfaces in the left-right direction in a semicircular shape, and bulging from the inner side surface facing the opening to the back surface side. It is formed mainly provided with a bulging portion 491c.

The projecting portion 491a is a protrusion for fastening the case member 491 to the side wall member 470 described above, and a fastening hole is formed on the front side, and a screw is fastened to the fastening hole from the front side via the side wall member 470. By doing so, the regulation unit 490 can be arranged on the side wall member 470.

The notch portions 491b are formed by being cut out in a semicircular shape by arranging two in the vertical direction on both side surfaces of the case member 491 in the left-right direction. The notch portion 491b is a notch for inserting the collar 492c of the roller member 492 inside, and the inner diameter thereof is set to be larger than the outer diameter of the collar 492c of the roller member 492.

The bulging portion 491c is formed so as to bulge from the lower side than the center in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 20C) of the side surface (back surface of the front wall) facing the open side of the case member 491. Further, the bulging portion 491c is provided with a predetermined gap between the roller member 492 and the roller 492a.

The roller member 492 is pivotally supported by a roller 492a formed from an elastic member in a ring shape in a vertical cross-sectional view, a shaft portion 492b inserted inside the roller 492a, and both sides of the roller 492a. A pair of collars 492c arranged in the above and a pair of retaining rings E1 fitted on a shaft portion 492b outside the collar 492c are provided.

The shaft portion 492b is a member inserted through the inner circumference of the roller 492a, is formed in a cylindrical shape substantially the same as the inner diameter of the inner circumference of the roller 492a, and has an axial dimension between the side surfaces of the case member 491 in the left-right direction. Is set larger than the width dimension of. Further, recesses 492b1 recessed in the axial direction are formed at both ends of the shaft portion 492b in the axial direction. The recess 492b1 is formed over the entire circumference of the shaft portion 492b, and the outer diameter in the axial direction is formed to be smaller than the inner diameter of the retaining ring E1 described later.

The collar 492c is formed in a ring shape in front view and a substantially stepped cross section, and is formed of a small diameter tubular portion 492c1 and a large diameter tubular portion 492c2 having an outer diameter larger than that of the small diameter tubular portion 492c1. Further, the inner diameter of the collar 492c (the inner diameter of the small diameter cylinder portion 492c1 and the large diameter cylinder portion 492c2) is formed to be smaller than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 492b, and the shaft portion 492b can be inserted therein.

The small diameter tubular portion 492c1 is a portion that is internally fitted into the notch portion 491b of the case member 491, and as described above, the outer diameter of the small diameter tubular portion 492c1 is formed to be larger than the inner diameter of the notch portion 491b of the case member 491. Will be done.

The large diameter tubular portion 492c2 is a member for regulating the displacement in the left-right direction when the roller member 492 is arranged on the case member 491, and the outer diameter of the large diameter tubular portion 492c2 is a notch of the case member 491. It is set larger than the inner diameter of the portion 491b. Further, the distance dimension between the axially outer side surfaces of the pair of large-diameter tubular portions 492c2 arranged at both ends in the axial direction of the roller 492a is larger than the distance dimension between the left and right side surfaces facing each other inside the opening of the case member 491. Is also formed small.

The retaining ring E1 is an E ring (E-shaped retaining ring), and the opening portion is widened in the recess 492b1 of the shaft portion 492b and fitted around the recess 492b1. That is, the inner diameter of the inner circumference of the retaining ring E1 is set to be substantially the same as the outer diameter of the recess 492b1.

The roller member 492 configured as described above is assembled as follows. First, after the retaining ring E1 is externally fitted into the recess 492b1 on one end side of the shaft portion 492b, the small diameter tubular portion 492c1 is fitted on one side (the side on which the retaining ring E1 is externally fitted) from the other end to the collar 492c of 1. ), The shaft portion 492b is inserted. Next, after the roller 492a is inserted through the shaft portion 492b from the other end, the shaft portion is in a state where the collar 492c of 1 is directed to the large diameter cylinder portion 492c2 to one side (the side where the retaining ring E1 is fitted). It is inserted through 492b. After that, the retaining ring E1 of 1 is externally fitted into the recess 492b1 on the other side of the shaft portion 492b.

As a result, the roller 492a and the pair of collars 492c, which are pivotally supported by the shaft portion 492b between the pair of retaining rings E1 facing each other, are restricted from being displaced in the left-right direction by the retaining rings E1. As a result, the roller 492a and the pair of collars 492c can be prevented from coming off from the shaft portion 492b.

The outer edge member 493 is a member formed in a vertically long rectangular frame-shaped body in front view and arranged on the back surface side (open side) of the case member 491. The outer edge member 493 is formed so that the shape of the inner circumference in the front view is substantially the same as the shape of the inner circumference of the opening in the rear view of the case member 491. Further, on the side surface of the outer edge member 493 on the front side (case member 491 side), an upright portion 493a standing on the front side is formed around the inner edge portion.

The upright portion 493a is formed with a recessed portion 493a1 recessed on the back surface side. The recessed portion 493a1 is formed at a position facing the notch portion 491b of the case member 491. Therefore, the roller member 492 can be arranged in the case member 491 by sandwiching the collar 492c of the roller member 492 between the notch portion 491b of the case member 491 and the recessed portion 493a1.

The roller member 492 configured as described above is assembled as follows. First, two collars 492c arranged at both ends in the axial direction of the roller member 492 are vertically and vertically arranged in the cutout portion 491b of the case member 491 so as to axially support them. Next, the outer edge member 493 is fastened and fixed to the case member 491 from the back side of the case member 491 with the standing portion 493a side facing the front side (facing the case member 491 side). As a result, the roller member 492 can be rotatably arranged with respect to the case member 491 and can be prevented from falling from the case member 491.

Next, the operation of the regulation unit 490 will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 to 24.

FIG. 21 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 400 at the first position. 22 (a) is an enlarged view of the vertical displacement unit 400 in the XXII section of FIG. 21, and FIG. 22 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 400 in the line XXIIb-XXIIb of FIG. 22 (a). .. In FIG. 22A, the outer shapes of the roller 492a and the decorative member 450 are shown by broken lines.

23 (a) to 23 (c) are partially enlarged front views of the vertical displacement unit 400, and FIG. 24 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 400 in the line XXIVa-XXIVa of FIG. 23 (a). 24 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 400 in line XXIVb-XXIVb of FIG. 23 (b), and FIG. 24 (c) is a vertical view of the vertical displacement unit 400 in line XXIVc-XXIVc of FIG. 23 (c). It is sectional drawing of the displacement unit 400. It should be noted that FIGS. 23 (a) to 23 (c) show the transition state of the vertical displacement unit 400, and the outer shapes of the roller 492a and the decorative member 450 are shown by broken lines.

As shown in FIGS. 21 and 22, when the vertical displacement unit 400 is located at the first position, the decorative member 450 is positioned below. In this case, as described above, both ends of the decorative member 450 are located on the back side of the regulation unit 490.

In this case, when the decorative member 450 is arranged at the first position and the rotating unit 500 described later is rotated, the decorative member 450 may rattle with respect to the front base 410 due to the rotational displacement thereof. Therefore, there is a method in which an engaging means for engaging the decorative member 450 and the front base 410 is provided to suppress rattling. The engaging means includes an engaging member arranged on one of the decorative member 450 or the front base 410 and urged by the urging means, and the decorative member 450 or the front base while being formed to be engageable with the engaging member. It is provided with an engaged member disposed on the other side of the 410, and the engaging member resists the urging force of the urging means by utilizing the displacement (displacement toward the first position) of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410. When the decorative member 450 is arranged in the first position, the engaging member is advanced by the urging force of the urging means to engage with the engaged member. As a result, the relative displacement of the main body member with respect to the front base 410 is regulated by the engagement of the engaging means, and the rattling of the main body member with respect to the base member due to the displacement of the displacement member is suppressed.

However, in such a conventional engaging means, in order to put the engaging means in the engaged state (the main body member is arranged at the first position), the engaging member is placed against the urging force of the urging means. Not only does it need to be retracted, but it also resists the urging force of the urging means when disengaging the engaging means (displaces the decorative member 450 from the first position to the second position). Therefore, it is necessary to retract the engaging member, and there is a problem that the driving force required for displacementing the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 increases.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 of the decorative member 450 is in contact with the roller 492a of the regulation unit 490, so that the relative displacement of the front base 410 is restricted. Therefore, rattling of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 due to the rotational displacement of the rotating unit 500 can be suppressed.

In this case, since the displacement direction when the decorative member 450 is arranged in the first position and the rotation direction of the roller member 492 of the regulation unit 490 are set substantially parallel, the decorative member 450 is displaced to the first position. At the time of displacement, the roller member 492 of the regulation unit 490 can be rotated according to the displacement, so that the decorative member 450 can be displaced with respect to the front base 410 and the driving force required for the position can be suppressed.

Further, since the roller 492a is formed of an elastic body that can be elastically deformed as described above, when the roller 492a of the regulation unit 490 comes into contact with the contact surface 452h of the front base 452, the outer circumference of the roller 492a is formed. The surface side can be elastically deformed to facilitate holding the roller 492a on the front base 452. As a result, the roller 492a can be made difficult to rotate, and rattling of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 can be suppressed.

The elastic body is preferably a viscoelastic body exemplified by rubber, urethane, or the like. In this case, due to the vibration damping effect, it is possible to perform a vibration damping function or a vibration insulation function that damps and insulates the vibration input from the decorative member 450 to the front base 410 due to the displacement of the rotating unit 500, and the front base. This is because it is possible to suppress wear and failure of various devices arranged on the 410 side and loosening of the fastening portion. In particular, when the rotating unit 500 is periodically displaced (for example, when it is rotated at a relatively high speed to function as a versa writer), relatively small amplitude and high frequency vibrations are generated from the decorative member 450. Since it is input to the front base 410, it is particularly effective to adopt a viscoelastic body.

Further, when the decorative member 450 and the regulation unit 490 (roller 492a) come into contact with each other, the roller 492a is elastically deformed, so that the product accuracy and the assembly error of the vertical displacement unit 400 can be absorbed. Therefore, it is not necessary to increase the accuracy when molding the part, and the manufacturing cost of the part can be reduced. As a result, the manufacturing cost of the product can be reduced.

Further, since the collision sound when the decorative member 450 and the regulation unit 490 (roller 492a) come into contact with each other can be absorbed by the elastic deformation of the roller 492a, it is possible to prevent the player from hearing the sound when the decorative member 450 is displaced. It is possible to prevent the player from losing the interest of the player. Further, since the rotation axis direction of the roller 492a is a direction orthogonal to the displacement direction of the decorative member 450, the roller 492a can be rotated with the displacement of the decorative member 450, and the decorative member 450 and the roller 492a are in contact with each other. It is possible to suppress the sound of rubbing against each other when they are in contact with each other and displaced. That is, if the protrusions are brought into contact with the displacement members to assist the displacement members in stopping or to suppress rattling, the members rub against each other when the displacement members are displaced with the protrusions in contact with each other. Sound is generated.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, after the roller 492a and the decorative member 450 are brought into contact with each other, the roller 492a can be rotated along the displacement direction of the decorative member 450, so that the roller 492a and the decorative member 450 can be rotated. It is possible to suppress the rubbing of the decorative member 450 and the roller 492a from generating a rubbing sound.

Further, since the regulation of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 is possible by the regulation unit 490 of the side wall member 470 which is fastened and fixed to the front base 410, the regulation unit 490 which is relatively heavy is arranged in the decoration member 450. Since it is not necessary, the weight of the decorative member 450 can be reduced to suppress the driving force required for the displacement of the decorative member 450, and when the decorative member 450 is suppressed from rattling with respect to the front base 410 due to the displacement of the rotating unit 500. Since the decorative member 450, which is a vibration source, can be reduced in weight, rattling can be easily suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 23 and 24, a contact mode between the decorative member 450 and the regulation unit 490 when the decorative member 450 is displaced from the second position to the first position will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 23 (a) and 24 (a), when the decorative member 450 is located above the regulation unit 490, the outer peripheral surface of the roller 492a is in contact with the decorative member 450 and the case member 491. Arranged without contact.

From the state shown in FIGS. 23 (a) and 24 (a), the decorative member 450 is displaced downward, and as shown in FIGS. 23 (b) and 24 (b), the lower end surface of the decorative member 450 is a case. When the member 491 is displaced to a position in the vertical direction substantially the same as the intermediate position in the vertical direction, the outer peripheral surface of the roller 492a arranged above the regulation unit 490 and the front surface of the decorative member 450 come into contact with each other. It is said that it is in a state of being. As a result, it is possible to prevent the decorative member 450 from rattling back and forth and left and right.

That is, the roller 492a arranged on the upper side is pushed out by the decorative member 450, rotated while being displaced in the radial direction, and abuts on the decorative member 450 in the front-rear direction (left-right direction in FIG. 24B). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the decorative member 450 from rattling in the front-rear direction. Further, since the roller 492a can rotate in one direction around the axis of the shaft portion 492b and cannot rotate in the direction in which the decorative member 450 moves left and right, it suppresses the decorative member 450 from rattling in the left and right direction. be able to.

On the other hand, since the roller 492a is rotatable around the axis of the shaft portion 492b, the decorative member 450 is displaced in the vertical direction at the first position even when the roller 492a and the rotating unit 500 are in contact with each other. Can be made to.

Further, as described above, since the inclined surface 452 g is formed at the lower end of the contact surface 452 h of the front base 452, the inclined surface 452 g is used when the decorative member 450 is arranged at the first position. The roller 492a can be guided to the front side of the contact surface 452h. As a result, the driving force required when arranging the decorative member 450 at the first position can be suppressed.

From the state shown in FIGS. 23 (b) and 24 (b), when the decorative member 450 is further displaced downward and positioned at the first position, the outer peripheral surfaces of the two rollers 492 a arranged in the regulation unit 490. And the front surface of the decorative member 450 can be brought into contact with each other.

Here, if the rattling of the decorative member 450 that is displaced up and down is suppressed by the rotating body (roller 492a) that rotates along the displacement direction of the decorative member 450, the rotating body (roller 492a) suppresses the rattling. It is difficult to regulate along the displacement direction of the decorative member 450 so that the decorative member 450 is not displaced with respect to rattling in the vertical direction.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the rotation direction of the other side of the displacement member 430 (the short side on which the drive side sliding hole 431 is formed) is the rotation shaft of the transmission gear 443 and the protrusion 443a. Since it substantially coincides with the direction of the straight line connecting the two, it is possible to prevent the decorative member 450 from rattling in the vertical direction at the first position. That is, in the present embodiment, the regulation unit 490 can allow only the vertical displacement that displaces the decorative member 450 to the first position, and in the second position, the transmission gear 443 and the displacement member 430 By forming a dead center, it is possible to prevent the decorative member 450 from rattling in the vertical direction. As a result, since the relative displacement of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 can be regulated, rattling of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 due to the displacement of the rotating unit 500 can be suppressed.

Further, the rollers 492a arranged below the rollers 492a arranged side by side in the vertical direction are in contact with not only the decorative member 450 but also the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491.

That is, when the roller 492a arranged on the lower side comes into contact with the decorative member 450, the rubber component of the roller 492a is pushed out (elastically deformed) to the front side (right side in FIG. 24C). As a result, the outer peripheral surface on the front side is brought into contact with the side surface of the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491, and the roller 492a is sandwiched between the contact surface 452h of the decorative member 450 and the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491. be able to. As a result, the resistance when the roller 492a rotates around the shaft portion 492b can be increased, making it difficult for the roller 492a to rotate. Therefore, the resistance when the decorative member 450 is displaced in the vertical direction can be increased. As a result, since the relative displacement of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 can be regulated, rattling of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 due to the displacement of the rotating unit 500 can be suppressed.

Here, as a mode in which the roller 492a is sandwiched between the contact surface 452h of the decorative member 450 and the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491, the shaft portion 492b of the roller 492a is placed in the front-rear direction (left-right direction in FIG. 24C). It is also conceivable to displace the roller 492a between the contact surface 452h of the decorative member and the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491. In this case, the shaft portion 492b of the roller 492a has a diameter. A structure that allows displacement in the direction is required.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the roller 492a is formed from an elastic body, and the elastic deformation of the roller 492a is used to move the roller 492a between the contact surface 452h of the decorative member 450 and the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491. Since it is possible to sandwich the roller 492a, it is not necessary to form the shaft portion 492b of the roller 492a so as to be displaceable in the radial direction, and the shaft portion 492b can be formed as a shaft fixed to the front base 410. As a result, the structure can be simplified, the durability can be improved, and the product cost can be reduced.

Further, since the roller 492a is elastically displaced and sandwiched between the contact surface 452h of the decorative member 450 and the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491, the roller 492a is sandwiched between the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491 with respect to the front base 410 of the decorative member 450 due to the displacement of the rotating unit 500. When the roller 492a is sandwiched between the decorative member 450 and the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491 due to rattling, the elastic recovery force of the roller 492a is used to form the decorative member 450 and the case member 491. The roller 492a can be easily held by the bulging portion 491c more firmly. As a result, the roller 492a can be made difficult to rotate, and the relative rattling of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 can be suppressed. Therefore, the rattling of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 due to the rotational displacement of the rotating unit 500 can be suppressed. Can be suppressed.

Further, as the decorative member 450 is displaced from the upper end to the lower end position, the displacement resistance can be increased. Therefore, when the decorative member 450 is stopped at the first position, the stopping operation damages other parts. Can be suppressed.

That is, in the present embodiment, since the rotating unit is provided in the central portion of the decorative member 450, when the decorative member 450 is displaced in the direction of gravity and stopped, in addition to the weight of the decorative member 450, the kinetic energy at the time of displacement is applied to each component. As it works, parts are easily damaged.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the vehicle is displaced to the first position, the stop operation can be assisted, so that the stop operation in a direction more easily damaged can be assisted. As a result, damage to the parts can be effectively suppressed, and the reliability of the product can be improved.

Further, since two rollers 492a are arranged side by side in the vertical direction along the displacement direction of the decorative member 450, the contact surfaces 452h of the decorative member 450 are brought into contact with each other at two locations with a predetermined interval. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decorative member 450 from tilting, and it is possible to suppress the rattling of the rotating unit 500 with respect to the upper surface base 510. As a result, rattling of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 due to the rotational displacement of the rotating unit 500 can be effectively suppressed.

Further, the rotation plane of the rotation unit 500, which will be described later, is set to be substantially the same as the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 (that is, the surface to which the roller 492a is in contact). That is, the rotation plane of the rotation unit 500 is arranged in parallel with the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 and the rotation axis of the roller 492a. As a result, the front base of the decorative member 450 due to the rotational displacement of the rotating unit 500 is suppressed while suppressing the driving force required when the decorative member 450 is arranged in the first position and when the decorative member 450 is displaced from the first position to the second position. The rattling of 410 can be effectively suppressed.

More specifically, since the displacement form of the rotating unit 500 is rotation, the decorative member 450 rotates due to the precession movement of the rotating unit 500 (the movement in which the rotation axis of the rotating unit 500 swings like a circle). It is vibrated in a mode in which the rotation plane of the unit 500 is tilted. Therefore, the rotation plane of the rotation unit 500 is substantially parallel to the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 and the rotation axis of the rotation unit 500, so that the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 (that is, the roller 492a) can be formed. The surface to be abutted) can be pressed against the outer peripheral surface of the roller 492a from a direction orthogonal to the rotation axis of the roller 492a. As a result, when the decorative member 450 is arranged at the first position and when the decorative member 450 is displaced from the first position to the second position, the roller 492a is rotated to suppress the driving force required for the displacement of the decorative member 450. At the same time, the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 with the outer peripheral surface of the roller 492a can effectively suppress the rattling of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 due to the displacement (rotation) of the rotating unit 500. ..

Next, the rotating unit 500 arranged on the decorative member 450 will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 to 36.

First, the overall configuration of the decorative member 450 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26. FIG. 25 is an exploded front perspective view of the decorative member 450, and FIG. 26 is an exploded rear perspective view of the decorative member 450.

As shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the decorative member 450 includes gears 454 to 456 arranged between the front base 452 and the back base 453 facing each other, and a drive motor attached to the back side of the back base 453. It is mainly provided with a 457 and a signal transmission mechanism 458 attached to the back side of the front base 452.

The front base 452 is formed with a recess 452c recessed on the back side in the center thereof. The recess 452c is recessed in an annular shape in the front view, and an insertion hole 452f formed through the shaft portion in the front-rear direction and openings 452d and 452e opened in the left-right direction are formed on the side surfaces of both ends in the left-right direction. To.

The rear base 453 is formed of a horizontally long rectangular plate-shaped body in the front view, which is smaller than the front view shape of the front base 452, and has an opening 453b that opens in the front-rear direction at the center and a circular shape in the front-rear direction on the right side in the front view. It is mainly provided with an insertion hole 453a to be opened and shaft support portions 453c and 453d projecting in a cylindrical shape on the front side.

The insertion hole 453a is an opening through which the shaft portion of the drive motor 457, which will be described later, is inserted, is opened at a position facing the shaft portion of the drive motor 457, and has an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion of the drive motor 457. It is opened in a circular shape. The opening 453b is an opening through which the signal transmission mechanism 458 described later is inserted, and is formed in an internal hole shape larger than the front view shape of the signal transmission mechanism 458.

The shaft support portions 453c and 453d are shaft portions that are inserted into the shaft portions of gears 455 and 456, which will be described later, and are set in a cylindrical shape having an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of each gear 455 and 456.

The drive motor 457 is a motor in which an encoder for position detection is incorporated, and can detect the rotation angle and the rotation speed of the motor. The drive motor 457 is attached to the back surface of the rear base 453 as described above, the shaft portion of the drive motor 457 is inserted into the insertion hole 453a of the rear base 453, and screws, bolts, etc. are inserted from the front side of the rear base 453. It is fastened and fixed with.

The gear 454 is meshed with the gear 455 and is fixedly arranged to the shaft portion of the drive motor 457 through which the insertion hole 453a of the back base 453 is inserted. Further, the gear 454 is formed to have a smaller thickness in the front-rear direction than between the rear base 453 and the front base 452 facing each other, and when the rear base 453 is arranged on the front base 452, the front base 452 and the rear base 453 Can rotate without contacting the sides of the. When the driving force for rotation is applied from the drive motor 457, the gear 454 is rotated, and the driving force for rotation can be transmitted to the gear 455 meshed with the gear 454.

The gear 455 is meshed with the rear base 571 (see FIG. 26) of the rotation unit 500, which will be described later, and the shaft hole is inserted through the shaft support portion 453c whose shaft hole protrudes forward of the rear base 453 and rotates about the shaft support portion 453c. Arranged as possible. Further, the gear 455 is formed to have a smaller thickness in the front-rear direction than between the rear base 453 and the front base 452 facing each other, and when the rear base 453 is arranged on the front base 452, the front base 452 and the rear base 453 Can rotate without contacting the sides of the. When the driving force for rotation is applied from the drive motor 457, the driving force for rotation is transmitted from the gear 454 to the gear 455, and the rear base 571 is rotated. As a result, the rotation unit 500 is rotated.

A part of the gear 455 is inserted through the first opening 452d of the front base 452 and is arranged, and is meshed with the back base 571 of the rotating unit 500 arranged in front of the front base 452.

A gear 456 is meshed with the back base 571 of the rotating unit 500. The gear 456 is a member in which a protrusion for detecting an initial position (reference position) is projected from its side surface (axial end surface), and its shaft hole is fitted onto the shaft support portion 453d of the rear base 453 to the rear surface. It is arranged on the base 453. A part of the gear 456 is inserted into the second opening 452e and meshed with the back base 571. Further, the gear 456 is formed to have a smaller thickness in the front-rear direction than between the rear base 453 and the front base 452 facing each other, and when the rear base 453 is arranged on the front base 452, the front base 452 and the rear base 453 Can rotate without contacting the sides of the. When the driving force for rotation is applied from the drive motor 457 and the gear 454, the gear 455 and the rotation unit 500 (rear base 571) are rotated, the driving force for rotation is transmitted from the rear base 571 to rotate the gear 456. .. As a result, the initial position of the rotating unit 500 can be detected.

In this case, the number of gear teeth engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the gear 456 and the number of gear teeth of the gear 571a1 engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the back base 571 of the rotating unit 500 are set to be the same. Therefore, the gear 456 can be rotated once for each rotation of the rotating unit 500. As a result, the initial position detection (reference position) can be easily performed.

The signal transmission mechanism 458 is a slip ring that transmits electric power and a signal to the irradiation unit 530 of the rotating rotating unit 500, and is configured so that the shaft portion 458a protruding from the front can rotate. Further, the shaft portion 458a is formed in a substantially D-shaped cross section, and a passage is opened inside the shaft portion 458a, and electrical wiring is inserted through the passage.

When the signal transmission mechanism 458 is attached to the back side of the front base 452 by inserting the opening 453b of the rear base 453, the shaft portion 458a of the signal transmission mechanism 458 is inserted into the shaft portion 458a. At the same time, the front base 452 is projected from the front.

Next, the overall configuration of the rotating unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 to 29. 27 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotating unit 500, and FIG. 28 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotating unit 500. 29 (a) is a top view of the rotating unit 500, FIG. 29 (b) is a front view of the rotating unit 500 in the XXIXb direction view of FIG. 29 (a), and FIG. 29 (c) is a view. It is sectional drawing of the rotating unit 500 in line XXIXc-XXIXc of 29 (a). The rotation unit 500 will be described in a state at the initial position (reference position).

As shown in FIGS. 27 to 29, the rotating unit 500 includes an upper surface base 510 forming an upper side surface, a lower surface base 520 forming a lower side surface, and an irradiation unit 530 arranged below the upper surface base 510. An intermediate member 540 arranged below the irradiation unit 530, a reflector 560 arranged below the intermediate member 540, a front cover 550 arranged in front of the reflector 560, and an upper surface thereof. It is mainly provided with a rotation transmission unit 570 arranged on the back surface side of the base 510 and the lower surface base 520.

The rotation transmission unit 570 is a unit for transmitting the rotation of the drive motor 457 to the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520, and is a rear base 571 arranged on the back side and a front base 572 arranged on the front side. , A bearing BR sandwiched between the front base 572 and the back base 571 facing each other, and a fastening member 573 disposed inside the bearing BR are mainly provided.

The back surface base 571 is formed in a front view ring shape, and a bulging portion 571a that bulges in a back view ring shape is formed from the inner peripheral edge portion to the back side. A gear 571a1 is engraved on the outer side surface of the bulging portion 571a. The gear 571a1 is meshed with the gear 455 as described above. As a result, by applying a driving force to the drive motor 457, the driving force for rotation is transmitted to the rear base 571 (gears 571a1) via the gears 454 and 455, and the rotation unit 500 is rotated.

The front base 572 is formed in a ring shape in front view, and has an outer standing portion 572a erected from the outer peripheral edge portion and an inner standing portion 572b erected from the inner peripheral circular portion in a U shape in front view. And.

The outer standing portion 572a is a wall portion for forming a gap between the front surface of the back surface base 571 and the back surface of the front base 572 and sandwiching the bearing BR and the fastening member 573 between the facing portions thereof. It is set to an upright height that is substantially the same as the width dimension in the axial direction of the BR, and is set to an inner shape that is substantially the same as the outer diameter of the bearing BR.

Further, the side surface of the outer standing portion 572a on the standing tip side is brought into contact with the front surface of the back base 571, and the screws inserted from the back side of the back base 571 are fastened and fixed. As a result, the back base 571 and the front base 572 are fastened and fixed.

The inner standing portion 572b is a member that suppresses twisting of the wiring connecting the inside of the rotating unit 500 and the shaft portion 458a of the signal transmission mechanism 458 when the shaft portion 458a of the signal transmission mechanism 458 described above is rotated. It is erected in a substantially U-shaped rear view, and its inner shape is formed to be substantially the same as or slightly larger than the outer shape of the front view shape of the shaft portion 458a of the signal transmission mechanism 458.

Therefore, when the rotating unit 500 is arranged on the front base 452, the inner standing portion 572b can be fitted onto the shaft portion 458a of the signal transmission mechanism 458. Therefore, when the rotation unit 500 is rotated, the flat portions of the inner standing portion 572b and the shaft portion 458a of the signal transmission mechanism 458 engage with each other, and the shaft portion 458a of the signal transmission mechanism 458 can be rotated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the wiring connecting the rotating unit 500 and the signal transmission mechanism 458 from being twisted.

The bearing BR is a member that suppresses transmission of the rotation to the front base 452 when the rotation unit 500 is rotated with respect to the front base 452, and is a ring-shaped metal member having a different inner and outer diameters. Are combined, and a spherical or cylindrical metal body is fitted between the two members.

The outer diameter of the bearing BR is set to be substantially the same as the inner diameter of the outer standing portion 572a of the front base 572. As a result, the bearing BR can be fixedly arranged on the outer standing portion 572a of the front base 572. In this case, the inner diameter of the back base 571 is set smaller than the outer diameter of the bearing BR. Therefore, when the bearing BR is sandwiched between the front base 572 and the back base 571, the bearing BR is prevented from coming off from the rotation transmission unit 570.

The fastening member 573 is a member that fastens the rotating unit 500 to the front base 452. The fastening member 573 is formed in a ring shape when viewed from the front, and includes a protruding wall portion 573a protruding from the outer peripheral surface on the front side.

The outer diameter of the fastening member 573 is formed to be substantially the same as the inner diameter of the bearing BR. On the other hand, the inner diameter of the fastening member 573 is formed to be larger than the outer diameter of the inner standing portion 572b of the front base 572. As a result, the fastening member 573 is arranged in the rotation transmission unit 570 in such a manner that the outer edge portion thereof is fitted inside the inner edge portion of the bearing BR and the inner standing portion 572b of the front base is inserted through the inner edge portion. ..

The protruding wall portion 573a is a protruding portion for suppressing the fastening member 573 from being removed from the assembled rotation transmission unit 570, and is formed so as to project over the entire circumference from the outer peripheral surface of the fastening member 573 with a constant protruding dimension. The outer diameter dimension is set to be larger than the inner diameter of the bearing BR. Therefore, by fitting the fastening member 573 into the bearing BR from the front side of the bearing BR, it is possible to prevent the fastening member 573 from being removed from the assembled rotation transmission unit 570.

More specifically, by fitting the fastening member 573 inwardly into the bearing BR from the front of the bearing BR, it is possible to regulate the movement of the fastening member 573 to the rear with respect to the bearing BR. On the other hand, in the movement of the fastening member 573 to the front side, the bearing BR is arranged between the front base 57 2 and the back base 571, so that the front side surface of the fastening member 573 and the back side of the front base 572 are arranged. It is regulated by being in contact with the side surface of the. As a result, it is possible to prevent the fastening member 573 from coming off from the assembled rotation transmission unit 570.

Further, since the fastening member 573 on which the bearing BR is externally fitted is fastened to the front base 452, it is possible to suppress the transmission of the rotational motion when the rotating unit 500 is rotated to the front base 452.

That is, when the rotation unit 500 is rotated, only the ring-shaped metal body arranged on the outside of the bearing BR is rotated, and the rotation is applied to the ring-shaped metal body arranged on the inside. By making it non-transmission, it is possible to suppress the rotation of the fastening member 573. As a result, the rotating unit 500 can be rotated with respect to the decorative member 450.

The upper surface base 510 is formed in an arc shape that is curved toward the back side (upper side in FIG. 29 (a)) when viewed from above, and its front edge portion is curved downward (back side on the paper surface in FIG. 29 (a)). It is formed in a curved shape. Further, the upper surface base 510 includes a decorative portion 511 that bulges in a semicircular shape in the front view in the central portion in the left-right direction (FIG. 29 (b) left-right direction), and a ventilation hole 512 that penetrates in the vertical direction (plate pressure direction). , A pressing portion 513 protruding in a cylindrical shape is mainly provided on the lower side.

The decorative portion 511 is a portion to be fastened to the upper side of the front base 572 of the rotation transmission unit 570 described above, and has a fastening hole to be fastened to the front base 572 on the back side, and when viewed from the front. The radius of the semicircular shape is formed larger than the radius of the outer diameter of the front base 572. As a result, the rotation transmission unit 570 is fastened to the front base 572, and the upper side of the front base 572 can be made invisible when viewed from the front.

The blower hole 512 is a through hole penetrating in the vertical direction (FIG. 29 (c) vertical direction), and is formed in an elongated hole shape that is longly opened in the front-rear direction (FIG. 29 (a) vertical direction). Further, a plurality of blower holes 512 are formed in the left-right direction along the arc shape of the upper surface base 510.

When the upper surface base 510 is combined with the lower surface base 520, the pressing portion 513 forms a gap between the irradiation unit 530 sandwiched between the upper surface base 510 and the upper surface base 510, and restricts the movement of the irradiation unit 530. The protrusion height is set to the height to the side surface on the upper surface side of the irradiation unit 530 (see FIG. 29 (c)). Further, a plurality of pressing portions 513 are formed so as to protrude from the edge portion on the back surface side of the upper surface base 510.

The lower surface base 520 is formed in substantially the same shape as the upper surface base 510, and is arranged symmetrically with the upper surface base 510 about the axis of the rotation transmission unit 570. Since the decorative portion 521 and the blower hole 522 formed on the lower surface base have the same shape as the decorative portion 511 and the blower hole 512 formed on the upper surface base 510, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The decorative portion 521 of the lower surface base 520 is a portion to be fastened to the lower side of the front base 572 of the rotation transmission unit 570, and is fastened to the front base 572 of the rotation transmission unit 570 to be fastened to the front base when viewed from the front. The lower side of the 572 can be made invisible. Therefore, by combining the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520, the player can visually observe the mechanism for rotating the rotating unit 500, and it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being impaired.

The irradiation unit 530 is mainly provided with a base member 531 and an LED 532 arranged on the lower surface side of the base member 531.

The base member 531 is formed of a plate-like body having an outer shape whose outer shape is slightly smaller than that of the upper surface base 510. As a result, when the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 are arranged in combination in the vertical direction, the base member 531 can be made invisible from the vertical direction.

Further, the base member 531 is formed with a through hole 531a penetrating in the vertical direction at the edge portion on the front side. The through hole 531a is a member that suppresses the arrangement of the base member 531 from being displaced, and a detailed description thereof will be described later. The wiring of the shaft portion 458b of the signal transmission mechanism 458 described above is connected to the base member 531. As a result, light can be emitted from the LED 532, which will be described later, via the IC and the capacitor incorporated in the base member 531.

The LED 532 is formed as a surface mount type LED, and the outer shape (outer shape of the cavity molded from resin ceramic) in front view is formed into a rectangular shape, and the irradiation surface (epoxy or silicon enclosed in the cavity) to irradiate light is formed. The surface of the encapsulating resin such as) is formed in a circular shape in the front view. Further, the LED 532 is arranged on the lower surface side of the base member 531 and a plurality of LEDs are arranged side by side in the left-right direction along the shape of the arc on the upper surface of the base member 531. As a result, the LED 532 can irradiate the reflector 560, which will be described later, with light.

The intermediate member 540 is formed of a plate-like body whose outer shape in top view is substantially the same as the top view shape of the top base 510. As a result, when the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 are arranged in combination in the vertical direction, the intermediate member 540 can be arranged between the opposite surfaces.

The front cover 550 is formed of a transparent light-transmitting material and is formed in an arc shape in a top view. Further, the front cover 550 is arranged on the intermediate member 540 side.

The outer surface of the reflector 560 is decorated with silver (plating), and the outer surface of the reflector 560 is formed of a plate-like body having a top view shape substantially the same as the top view shape of the top base 510. Further, the reflector 560 includes a recessed portion 564 whose front side surface is cut out rearward.

The recessed portion 564 is arranged so that the front surface of the front cover 550 is substantially the same as the front surface of the upper surface base 510, the lower surface base 520, and the intermediate member 540 by inserting the above-mentioned front cover 550 into the notched portion. Can be set. That is, the width dimension of the front cover 550 in the front-rear direction is set to the distance dimension from the front surface of the recessed portion 564 of the reflector 560 to the front surface of the upper surface base 510, the lower surface base 520, and the intermediate member 540. As a result, it is possible to prevent the front cover 550 from being arranged so as to protrude from the rotating unit 500. As a result, the rotating unit 500 can be assembled as an integrated unit with less unevenness, and when the rotating unit 500 is visually recognized, the outer shape of each part is difficult to understand, and it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being impaired. ..

Next, with reference to FIG. 30, a detailed description of the intermediate member 540 will be given. FIG. 30 (a) is a top view of the intermediate member 540, and FIG. 30 (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the intermediate member 540 in the line XXXb-XXXb of FIG. 30 (a).

As shown in FIGS. 30A and 30B, the intermediate member 540 has a first outer edge portion that stands upward from the outer edge portion (direction in which the upper surface base 510 is arranged) when viewed from above. The 541 and the second outer edge portion 542, the irradiation hole 543 formed through the irradiation hole 543 in the vertical direction, the irradiation control portion 544 projecting from the periphery of the irradiation hole 543, and the projecting projecting from the front edge portion. A portion 545 and a groove portion 546 recessed in the outer peripheral edge portion of the irradiation control portion 544 are mainly provided.

The first outer edge portion 541 is formed on the outer edge portion on the front side of the intermediate member 540. The inner diameter dimension of the curved shape on the front side (lower side in FIG. 30A) of the first outer edge portion 541 is abbreviated as the outer diameter dimension of the curved shape on the front side in the top view of the base member 531 of the irradiation unit 530. Set to the same. Further, the vertical dimension of the first outer edge portion 541 is set to be larger than the thickness dimension (vertical direction dimension) of the base member 531. Therefore, when the rotating unit 500 is assembled, the irradiation unit 530 can be shielded by the first outer edge portion 541 to make it invisible from the front side.

The second outer edge portion 542 is formed on the outer edge portion on the back surface side of the intermediate member 540. The shape of the second outer edge portion 542 on the back surface side (upper side of FIG. 30A) in the top view is substantially the same as the shape of the base member 531 of the irradiation unit 530 in the top view. Further, the vertical dimension of the second outer edge portion 542 is set lower than that of the first outer edge portion 541. Therefore, when the rotating unit 500 is assembled, the lower side surface of the irradiation unit 530 is arranged so as to be in contact with the erected tip surface of the second outer edge portion 542. Therefore, the introduced outside air can be smoothly discharged to the back surface.

The irradiation hole 543 is a hole for individually dividing the light emitted from the plurality of LEDs 532 arranged in the irradiation unit 530, and is opened at a position facing the LED 532 arranged in the irradiation unit 530. .. As a result, it is possible to prevent the light of the adjacent LEDs 532 from irradiating another range. Further, the inner diameter of the irradiation hole 543 on the irradiation unit 530 side is set to be substantially the same as the outer diameter of the irradiation surface of the LED 532, and their axes are arranged coaxially. As a result, the light emitted from the LED 532 can be efficiently incident on the reflecting portion 563 of the reflector 560, which will be described later, via the irradiation hole 543.

Further, the irradiation hole 543 is formed to have a larger inner diameter from the upper surface side (LED532 side) toward the lower surface side. As a result, the light emitted from the LED 532 can be efficiently incident on the reflection portion 563 of the reflector 560 through the irradiation hole 543.

The irradiation control unit 544 is provided so as to project around the irradiation hole 543 described above. As a result, the gap between the LED 532 and the upper surface of the intermediate member 540 facing each other can be reduced, so that the light of the LED 532 can be easily incident on the irradiation hole 543 and can be suppressed from leaking to the outside of the irradiation hole 543. As a result, the light intensity of the afterimage display due to the afterimage effect can be increased.

Further, the protruding dimension of the irradiation regulating portion 544 is set to be substantially the same as the vertical dimension of the second outer edge portion 542, and when the rotating unit 500 is assembled, the protruding tip surface of the irradiation regulating portion 544 and the irradiation unit 530 The LED 532 is brought into contact with the LED 532. As a result, it is possible to prevent the light of the adjacent LED from being incident on the irradiation hole 543, so that the outer diameter of the afterimage display due to the afterimage effect can be clarified. Further, since the inner diameter of the irradiation hole 543 on the irradiation unit 530 side is set to be substantially the same as the outer diameter of the irradiation surface of the LED 532, the area of the irradiation control portion 544 in contact with the LED 532 can be secured, so that the light of each LED 532 can be emitted. It is possible to suppress leakage to the outside of the irradiation hole 543. As a result, the light intensity of the afterimage display due to the afterimage effect can be increased.

Further, since the irradiation regulation unit 544 is connected to the adjacent irradiation regulation unit 544 and the outer peripheral surfaces of each other, the rigidity of the intermediate member 540 can be increased. In this case, the outer peripheral surface of the irradiation regulating portion 544 is formed in a circular shape, and the adjacent irradiation regulating portions 544 and the outer peripheral surfaces of each other are connected to each other. That is, since the group in which a plurality of irradiation control portions 544 are connected to each other has an uneven outer shape (a shape in which a plurality of outwardly convex arcs are continuous), a space (surface area) is secured and the heat dissipation effect is enhanced. On the other hand, the rigidity of the intermediate member 540 can be increased by utilizing the unevenness of the outer shape.

The projecting portion 545 is a protrusion that regulates the movement of the irradiation unit 530 back and forth and left and right, and is formed at a position where the irradiation unit 530 is inserted into the through hole 531a of the base member 531 when the rotating unit 500 is assembled. Further, the projecting portion 545 is formed in a shape in which cylinders having different outer diameter shapes are vertically combined, and has a large diameter portion 545a on the base side and a small diameter portion 545b on the tip side having a diameter smaller than that of the large diameter portion 545a. Formed from.

The large diameter portion 545a is a protrusion for forming a predetermined gap between the intermediate member 540 and the base member 531 when the irradiation unit 530 is arranged on the intermediate member 540, and penetrates the base member 531. The outer diameter is set to be larger than the inner diameter of the hole 531a, and the protruding dimension thereof is set to be substantially the same as the vertical dimension of the second outer edge portion 542.

As a result, when the irradiation unit 530 is arranged on the intermediate member 540, the facing distance between the intermediate member 540 on the front side and the base member 531 of the irradiation unit 530 is defined. On the other hand, the facing distance between the intermediate member 540 on the back surface side and the base member 531 of the irradiation unit 530 is defined by the second outer edge portion 542. Further, since the protruding distance of the large diameter portion 545a and the standing distance of the second outer edge portion 542 are set to be substantially the same, the vertical side surface of the base member 531 of the irradiation unit 530 is set to the vertical side surface of the intermediate member 540. On the other hand, it can be arranged in parallel.

The small diameter portion 545b is a protrusion for positioning the irradiation unit 530 with respect to the intermediate member 540 when the irradiation unit 530 is arranged on the intermediate member 540, and is substantially the inner diameter of the through hole 531a of the base member 531. The outer diameter is set to the same or slightly smaller. Therefore, when arranging the irradiation unit 530 on the intermediate member 540, the through hole 531a of the base member 531 is externally fitted in the small diameter portion 545b of the intermediate member 540, so that the irradiation unit 530 with respect to the intermediate member 540 is moved in the front-back and left-right directions. Can regulate the movement of.

The groove portion 546 is a groove that extends along the base portion of the irradiation regulation portion 544 and is recessed in a U-shaped cross section. Since the area where the side surface of the intermediate member 540 and the outside air come into contact with each other increases due to the recessed portion of the groove portion 546, the heat dissipation of the intermediate member 540 is improved. Further, the heat dissipation effect can be enhanced while ensuring the rigidity of the intermediate member 540. That is, by forming the groove-shaped groove portion 546 extending along the base portion of the irradiation control portion 544, the region recessed in the intermediate member 540 is minimized, and the rigidity of the intermediate member 540 is ensured. By the operation of the LED 532, the space can be expanded with respect to the portion where the generated heat is particularly concentrated, and the heat dissipation effect can be enhanced.

The groove width of the groove portion 546 is set to be smaller than the distance dimension from the outer peripheral edge portion of the irradiation regulation portion 544 to the irradiation hole 543, and the recessed depth of the groove portion 546 is larger than half the plate thickness of the intermediate member 540. Set small.

Next, with reference to FIG. 31, a detailed description of the front cover 550 will be given. 31 (a) is a front view of the front cover 550, and FIG. 31 (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the front cover 550 in line XXXIb-XXXIb of FIG. 31 (a). In FIG. 31B, the diffusion portion 551 is schematically shown.

As shown in FIGS. 31 (a) and 31 (b), the front cover 550 has a diffusion portion 551 on the inner edge side (upper side of FIG. 31 (b)) of the lower side (left side of FIG. 31 (b)). Formed in preparation.

The diffusing portion 551 is a portion that has been roughened, and the light irradiated to the diffusing portion 551 can be diffusely reflected by the rough surface and diffused. The rough surface processing is a processing mode in which irregularities are formed on the surface.

Next, the reflector 560 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 32. 32 (a) is a top view of the reflector 560, and FIG. 32 (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the reflector 560 in line XXXIIb-XXXIIb of FIG. 32 (a). In FIG. 32 (b), the reflection portion 563 is schematically shown.

As shown in FIGS. 32 (a) and 32 (b), the reflector 560 is surrounded by a partition wall 561 erected on the upper surface side (front side of the paper surface in FIG. 32 (a)) and the partition wall 561. It is mainly provided with a reflection portion 563 formed on the upper surface of the region and an erection wall 562 erected along the edge portion on the back surface side.

The partition walls 561 are erected in a U shape in which the front side (lower side in FIG. 32A) is open in the top view, and a plurality of partition walls 561 are erected in the left-right direction along the front edge of the reflector 560. Individuals are formed side by side. Further, the adjacent standing walls 562 are combined (also used) with the wall portions extending in the front direction to form one wall portion. As a result, the space for arranging the partition walls 561 in parallel can be reduced. As a result, the number of partition walls 561 formed can be maximized.

The reflection portion 563 is formed by roughening the upper surface of the region surrounded between the front edge portion of the reflector 560 and the partition wall 561 by laser processing or the like in the top view. Further, in the reflecting portion 563, the thickness of the reflecting plate 560 increases as the horizontal portion 563a formed from the upper surface and the side surface parallel to the lower surface of the reflecting plate 560 is connected to the horizontal portion 563a and separated from the horizontal portion 563a. It is mainly provided with an inclined surface 563b that is inclined in a direction.

The horizontal portion 563a is formed on a side surface parallel to the upper surface and the lower surface of the reflector 560, other than the front edge portion. That is, the horizontal portion 563a (reflection portion 563) is not formed on the edge portion on the front side, and the rough surface is not processed. As a result, the reflecting portion 563 can be formed by holding the front edge portion of the reflecting plate 560. As a result, it is not necessary to separately form a holding portion on the reflector 560 when roughening the surface, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

The inclined surface 563b is a portion that mainly reflects the light emitted from the LED 532 of the irradiation unit 530 arranged on the upper surface side to the front side, and is inclined 45 degrees to the front side with respect to the irradiation surface of the LED 532. Formed on the surface.

Further, the connecting position of the horizontal portion 563a and the inclined surface 563b is set to a position where the connecting straight line passes through the axis of the irradiation surface of the LED 532. As a result, the light emitted toward the back side of the light emitted from the LED 532 can be effectively reflected to the front side by the inclined surface 563b. On the other hand, among the light emitted from the LED 532, the light emitted to the front side can be reflected to the front side by the horizontal portion 563a.

As described above, the erection wall 562 is erected along the back edge of the reflector 560, and the erection height thereof is set to be the same as the erection height of the partition wall 561. .. Thereby, when the rotating unit 500 is assembled (the intermediate member 540 is arranged on the upper part of the reflector 560), a space can be formed between the standing wall 562 and the partition wall 561. That is, an air layer can be formed between the reflector 560 and the intermediate member 540. As a result, it is possible to suppress the accumulation of heat inside the reflector 560 and the intermediate member 540, the rotating unit 500 stores heat, and the base member 531 of the irradiation unit 530 arranged in the rotating unit 500 It can be suppressed from being damaged.

As described above, the rotating unit 500 to be configured is assembled as follows. First, the fastening member 573 is internally fitted to the inner circular portion of the bearing BR from the front side, and the inner circular portion of the fastening member 573 is externally fitted to the inner standing portion 572b of the front base 572. After integrating the front base 572, the bearing BR, and the fastening member 573, the back base 571 is arranged on the back side thereof, and the front base 572 and the back base 571 are fastened to assemble the rotation transmission unit 570 as a unit.

In the front portion of the rotation unit 500 (the portion excluding the rotation transmission unit 570), the lower surface base 520 is arranged under the reflector 560, and the lower surface base 520 and the reflector 560 are fastened to each other. After the lower surface base 520 and the reflector 560 are fastened and fixed, the intermediate member 540 is overlapped on the upper surface side of the reflector 560 with the front cover 550 sandwiched on the front side. The irradiation unit 530 is arranged on the upper surface of the intermediate member 540 in a state where the through hole 531a is fitted onto the small diameter portion 545b of the projecting portion 545 of the intermediate member 540. In this state, by arranging the upper surface base 510 from above and fastening it to the intermediate member 540, the front portion of the rotation unit 500 (the portion excluding the rotation transmission unit 570) is assembled as a unit.

Next, the rotation transmission unit 570 is arranged behind the front portion of the rotation unit 500, and the rotation unit 500 is assembled as one unit by fastening the rotation unit 500 and the rotation transmission unit 570.

Next, the light emitted from the LED 532 of the irradiation unit 530 will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 and 34. 33 (a) is a top view of the rotating unit 500, and FIG. 33 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the rotating unit 500 in the line XXXIIIb-XXXIIIb of FIG. 33 (a). (A) and (b) of FIG. 34 are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the rotating unit 500 in the XXXIV section of FIG. 33 (b).

Note that FIG. 33A shows a state in which the upper surface base 510 and the irradiation unit 530 are removed from the rotating unit 500. Further, in FIGS. 34 (a) and 34 (b), the light emitted from the LED 532 is illustrated by a two-dot chain line.

As shown in FIGS. 33 (a) and 33 (b), below the irradiation hole 543 of the intermediate member 540, a reflection portion 563 surrounded by the partition wall 561 and partitioned as one region is arranged. .. As described above, since each LED 532 is arranged on the upper side of each irradiation hole 543, the light emitted from each LED 532 can be irradiated to the reflecting portion 563 at a different position. That is, since the light emitted from each LED 532 can be emitted in a state of being partitioned by each reflection unit 563, the division of light of each LED 532 can be clarified. As a result, the light emitted from each LED 532 can be emitted only from the corresponding reflecting unit 563, and the outer shape of the afterimage display due to the afterimage effect can be clarified.

Further, since a structure for incident the light of the LED 532 on the reflecting portion 563 of the corresponding reflecting plate 560 through the irradiation hole 543 of the intermediate member 540 is formed from the two members of the reflecting plate 560 and the intermediate member 540, such a structure. The structure can be simplified as compared with the case where the body is composed of one member. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 34 (a), the light emitted from the LED 532 of the irradiation unit 530 to the inclined surface 563b of the reflector 560 is diffusely reflected by the rough surface of the inclined surface 563b, and is diffusely reflected by the rough surface of the inclined surface 563b, and the front side (lower side of FIG. 34 (a)). It is reflected on the side), passes through the front cover 550, and is emitted to the front side of the game machine. That is, the light emitted from the LED 532 can be emitted to the front side (front side) of the rotating unit 500. Therefore, even when the posture of the base member 531 is such that the surface on which the LED 532 is mounted is substantially parallel to the rotation axis of the rotation unit 500, the light (blinking) of the LED 532 is visually recognized by the player, and an afterimage is displayed by the afterimage effect. be able to.

Further, the inclined surface 563b of the reflector 560 makes it possible to efficiently emit the light emitted from the LED 532 to the player side. Therefore, stronger light can be emitted to the front side of the rotating unit 500. Therefore, it is possible to increase the light intensity of the afterimage display due to the afterimage effect.

Among the light emitted from the LED 532 to the inclined surface 563b of the reflecting portion 563, there is light that is diffusely reflected by the rough surface of the inclined surface 563b and reflected on the opposite surfaces of the intermediate member 540 and the reflector 560. .. The light reflected on the opposing surfaces of the intermediate member 540 and the reflector 560 is reflected again by the surfaces (opposing surfaces of the intermediate member 540 and the reflector 560) to irradiate the front cover 550.

In this case, as described above, since the intermediate member 540 is formed in white, which has a light absorption rate lower than that of black, the light reflected by the intermediate member 540 can be easily reflected again. On the other hand, as described above, the reflector 560 has a silver decoration on the outer surface, so that the light reflected by the reflector 560 can be easily reflected again.

Therefore, the light emitted from the LED 532 to the reflecting unit 563 can be diffusely reflected by the rough surface and emitted to the front side (to the player side) of the rotating unit 500 in a state of being evenly dispersed. That is, it is possible to prevent the light emitted from the opening of the reflecting portion 563 from being visually recognized in a state of being biased toward a part of the opening.

As shown in FIG. 34 (b), the light emitted from the LED 532 of the irradiation unit 530 to the horizontal portion 563a of the reflector 560 is diffusely reflected by the rough surface of the horizontal portion 563a, and is diffusely reflected by the rough surface of the horizontal portion 563a to the front side (lower side of FIG. 34 (b)). Reflected on the side). Therefore, the light emitted from the LED 532 can be emitted to the front side by passing through the front cover 550.

Since the rough surface of the horizontal portion 563a is not formed on the front end portion of the reflector 560, it is possible to easily emit light toward the front side (player side) of the rotating unit 500. , It is possible to increase the light intensity of the afterimage display by the afterimage effect. That is, when the end portion of the inner surface of the reflector 560 on the front side of the rotating unit 500 is roughened, light is diffusely reflected on the rough surface and the front side of the rotating unit 500 (player side). ) Is reduced, the front end of the reflector 560 is not formed, and at least it is a smooth surface that is flatter than the rough surface processed by the reflector 563. Can be suppressed to increase the light toward the front side (player side) of the rotating unit 500.

Further, the partition wall 561 has a front side (recessed portion 564) formed at an end portion on the front side of the horizontal portion 563a (a portion where the rough surface processing of the reflecting portion 563 is not formed (smooth surface)). Since the shape is tapered toward the end of the horizontal portion (side), the cross-sectional area of the inner surface of the non-formed portion of the horizontal portion 563a becomes larger toward the front end of the rotating unit 500. It is enlarged (increased in diameter). Therefore, the light emitted toward the front side of the rotating unit 500 can be spread. That is, the area visually recognized as the light emitting region can be expanded beyond the area of the light emitting surface of the LED 532. Therefore, the LED 532 can be miniaturized.

Further, since the front side of the reflector 560 (rotating unit 500) is formed so as to be curved toward the back side toward the end centering on the central portion (rotating axis) in the left-right direction, the front side (concave) of the reflector 560 is formed. The end portion on the side on which the notch 564 is formed is formed on the front side (recessed portion 564) in each region partitioned by the partition wall 561 so as to be separated in the radial direction from the rotation axis of the rotation unit 500. The length dimension of the end (side) is increased. As a result, the visible brightness (brightness of light) of each of the plurality of reflecting portions 563 can be made uniform.

That is, in the rotating unit 500, the displacement speed (peripheral speed) becomes faster as it goes outward in the radial direction from the rotating shaft (rotation center). Therefore, when the LEDs 532 arranged in a row emit light with the same brightness, the rotating shaft The light of the LED 532 closer to is seen to be brighter (brighter) than the light of the LED 532 farther from the rotation axis (outward in the radial direction).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the front side (notch) in each region partitioned by the partition wall 561 so that the end portion on the front side of the reflector 560 is separated in the radial direction from the rotation axis of the rotation unit 500. Since the length dimension of the end portion (the side on which the portion 564 is formed) is increased, the reflection portion 563 (LED532) that is radially outwardly separated from the rotation axis of the rotation unit 500 is more diffusely reflected by the rough surface. (That is, the proportion of light directly visible to the player from the LED 532 is reduced) so that the light can be visually recognized as high-brightness light. As a result, the difference in brightness seen by the eyes at the arrangement position in the radial direction can be suppressed, and the brightness (brightness of light) can be made uniform.

Further, since the length dimension of the horizontal portion 563a of the reflector 560 in the direction parallel to the axial direction of the rotating unit 500 is increased as it is separated in the radial direction from the rotating shaft of the rotating unit 500, the number of reflecting portions 563 The visible brightness (brightness of light) of each can be made uniform.

The light emitted to the front cover 550 can be diffused in the traveling direction by the diffusing portion 551 formed on the inner peripheral surface of the front cover 550. That is, the rough surface of the diffusing portion 551 of the front cover 550 makes it possible to bend the traveling direction of the light applied to the diffusing portion 551 in a plurality of different directions. As a result, the light emitted toward the front side of the rotating unit 500 can be spread. That is, the area visually recognized as the light emitting region can be expanded beyond the area of the light emitting surface of the LED 532. Therefore, the LED 532 can be miniaturized.

Further, if the light of the LED 532 is directly visually recognized by the player (without transmitting the member of the light transmitting material), the light of the LED 532 has a high directivity to the front, so that the player is dazzled. I was afraid to feel it.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the surface that diffusely reflects the light emitted from the LED 532 is formed at two locations, the reflector 560 and the front cover 550, the directivity of the light emitted from the LED 532 can be weakened. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from visually recognizing the irradiated light and feeling dazzling.

Here, there is known a device having a plurality of light emitting means (LED 532) and blinking the light emitting means according to a rotation position to display by an afterimage effect. However, in the conventional light emitting means, the posture of the base (base member 531) is such that the surface on which the light emitting means is mounted is orthogonal to the rotation axis (that is, the irradiation direction of the light emitting means is directed to the front side (player side). Since the posture is parallel to the rotation plane), the outer shape in the front view (rotation axis direction view) becomes large. Therefore, there is a problem that the visibility of the back side of the rotation unit 500 is impaired when the rotation of the rotation display device (rotation unit 500) is stopped.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rotation unit 500 has a top surface base in which the base member 531 in which a plurality of LED 532s are arranged in a row has a surface on which the LEDs 532 are mounted substantially parallel to the rotation axis of the rotation unit 500. Since it is arranged between the 510 and the lower surface base 520, the outer shapes of the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 in the front view (rotational axis direction view) can be suppressed. As a result, the visibility of the back surface side of the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 can be improved when the rotation of the rotation unit 500 is stopped.

Next, the rotation of the rotation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 and 36.

35 (a) and 35 (b) are front views of the rotating unit 500. 36 (a) and 36 (b) are top views of the rotating unit 500.

In addition, in FIGS. 35 (a) to 36 (b), the flow of air generated by the rotating unit 500 is illustrated by a two-dot chain line, and the sign of the air flow K is given. Further, the ventilation holes 512 and 522 of the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 are shown by broken lines.

Further, in the present embodiment, only the explanation when the rotating unit 500 is rotated counterclockwise in the front view is described, and when the rotating unit 500 is rotated clockwise in the front view, the flow of the airflow K is only reversed around the rotation axis of the rotating unit 500. Since there is, the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 35 (a) and 35 (b), when the rotating unit 500 is rotated by the driving force of the drive motor 457 described above, the rotation causes external air to enter through the air blow holes 512 and 522. Airflow K is generated inside the rotating unit 500.

In this case, since the blower holes 512 and 522 are opened in the tangential direction with respect to the rotation direction of the rotation unit 500, when the rotation unit 500 rotates, the rotation unit 500 is opened through the blower holes 512 and 522. It is possible to easily allow external air to enter the inside of the rotating unit 500.

More specifically, when the rotating unit 500 is rotated to the left in the front view, the air holes 512 of the upper surface base 510 formed on the right side of the front view and the air holes of the lower surface base 520 formed on the left side of the front view at the initial position. The 522 is displaced in the direction of taking in (inserting) air into the ventilation holes 512 and 522. As a result, when the rotating unit 500 rotates, the air outside the rotating unit 500 can easily enter the inside of the rotating unit 500. Therefore, it is possible to cool the heat generated when the LED 532 operates.

Since the air holes 512 of the upper surface base 510 and the air holes 522 of the lower surface base 520 are formed point-symmetrically with respect to the rotation axis, when the rotation unit 500 rotates to the right in the front view, it rotates at the initial position. The blower holes 512 of the upper surface base 510 formed on the left side of the front view of the unit 500 and the blower holes 522 of the lower surface base 520 formed on the right side of the front view make it easier to take in external air into the rotating unit 500. That is, even when the rotating unit 500 is rotated to the right, the same effect as in the case described above (when the rotating unit 500 is rotated to the left in the front view) is obtained.

Here, if a base (base member 531) on which an LED (LED 532) is mounted is arranged inside a rotating body (rotating unit 500) and the rotating body is rotationally driven to emit an LED, the LED is emitted. If the heat generated when the IC / capacitor operates cannot be sufficiently cooled, the LED soldered to the board and the solder of the IC / capacitor that controls the LED may melt, resulting in poor contact.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the ventilation holes 512 and 522 are opened in the tangential direction with respect to the rotation direction of the rotation unit 500, so that the outside air is taken into the inside of the rotation unit 500 by the rotation of the rotation unit 500. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to cool the heat generated when the LED operates.

The air taken into the inside of the rotating unit 500 from the blower holes 512 and 522 mainly collides with the irradiation unit 530 or the reflector 560 and is dispersed. The airflow K dispersed on the back side of the rotating unit 500 (the back side of the paper surface in FIG. 35A) is outside the rotating unit 500 from the opening (gap between facing each other) on the back side of the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520. It is blown and released into the atmosphere.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 36 (a), the airflow K dispersed on the front side of the rotating unit 500 (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 35 (a)) is radially from the rotation axis due to the centrifugal force of the rotation of the rotating unit 500. It is blown to the outside, blown to the outside of the rotating unit 500, and released into the atmosphere (see FIG. 35 (a)).

That is, since the shape of the rotating unit 500 in which the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 are combined is formed into a container-like shape in which the back surface side is open, the outside air taken in from the blower holes 512 and 522 is efficiently taken from the back surface side. Therefore, the heat generation can be cooled when the LED 532 operates. Further, by exhausting from the back side of the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 in this way, it is possible to prevent such exhaust from affecting the ball flowing down the game area (or rolling the stage).

Further, in the present embodiment, the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 have a long front view (that is, a rotation axis direction view) rectangular shape along the diameter direction in the rotation plane of the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520. Since it is formed, the centrifugal force accompanying the rotation of the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 is used to move the air inside the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 to the longitudinal end side (diameter outward during rotation). It can be made to flow and exhausted from the back side. Therefore, with the flow of such air, outside air can be taken into the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 from the back surface side in the vicinity of the rotation transmission unit 570.

That is, in the vicinity of the rotation transmission unit 570, since the rotation speed is low, the efficiency of taking in outside air from the ventilation holes 512 and 522 on the side wall is poor (or cannot be taken in), but air circulation using centrifugal force (rotation transmission unit 570). The outside air is taken in from the back side in the vicinity, and the taken-in outside air is flowed to the end side in the longitudinal direction (radial outer side during rotation) by centrifugal force, and the flow of air exhausted from the back side on the radial outer side). Can be formed. As a result, the heat generated when the LED 532 operates can be cooled. In particular, cooling of the LED 532 disposed in the vicinity of the rotation transmission unit 570 can be achieved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 36B, when the air inside the rotating unit 500 is pushed outward in the radial direction by the rotation of the rotating unit 500, the internal pressure on the central side of the rotating unit 500 decreases, so that the rotating unit External air is taken in from the gap on the back surface side between the rotation transmission unit 570 of 500 and the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520. As a result, cooling of the LED 532 arranged in the vicinity of the rotation transmission unit 570 can be more reliably achieved.

In this case, the front wall forming the front side of the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 (the front edge portion of the upper surface base 510 is downward (the back side of the paper surface in FIG. 29 (a)) (the front edge portion of the lower surface base 520 is upward)). The curved portion) has a shape parallel to the rotation plane of the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 (that is, the shape in the direction orthogonal to the rotation axis of the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 is a rectangular parallelepiped shape). , Since the angle of the part where the air flowed to the end in the longitudinal direction (outward in the radial direction during rotation) due to centrifugal force changes direction toward the back side is approximately a right angle, a vortex is likely to be formed in such a part. .. Therefore, the flow of air is obstructed, and smooth exhaust from the back side becomes difficult.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the front side of the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 (the front edge portion of the upper surface base 510 is downward (the back side of the paper surface in FIG. 29 (a)) (the front edge portion of the lower surface base 520 is upward)). Since the shape of the curved part) is formed from the central part in the left-right direction to the outside, the air that is gradually flowed to the end side in the longitudinal direction (outward in the radial direction during rotation) due to centrifugal force is gradually applied. In addition to being able to flow to the back side, the angle of the part where the air flowed to the longitudinal end (diameter outward) changes direction toward the back side can be made larger than a substantially right angle, so at such a part The formation of vortices can be suppressed and the air flow can be smoothed. Therefore, exhaust from the back side can be performed more smoothly. As a result, cooling of the LED 532 arranged in the vicinity of the rotation transmission unit 570 can be more reliably achieved.

Further, the distance dimension between the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 facing each other on the back surface side (the dimension in the vertical direction in FIG. 35A) is such that the distance dimension on the back surface side in the vicinity of the rotation transmission unit 570 is the end side in the longitudinal direction. Since it is made larger than the distance dimension on the back side, the air inside the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 flows to the end side in the longitudinal direction (radial outward during rotation) by utilizing the centrifugal force accompanying the rotation. By making it exhaust from the back side on the outer side in the radial direction, it is possible to efficiently take in the outside air when taking in the outside air from the back side in the vicinity of the rotation transmission unit 570.

Further, since the open portion on the back surface side (the inner circumference of the decorative portion 511 of the upper surface base 510 and the decorative portion 521 of the lower surface base 520) near the rotation transmission unit 570 is formed in a circular shape concentric with the rotation axis, the upper surface base 510 And, with the rotation of the lower surface base 520, it is possible to suppress the disturbance of the outside air on the back surface side near the rotation transmission unit 570 (flow in the rotation direction is formed). As a result, the outside air can be efficiently taken in from the back surface side in the vicinity of the rotation transmission unit 570.

Further, since the outer peripheral surface of the outer standing portion 572a of the front base 572 is formed in a shape that narrows from the back side to the front side, the rotating unit 500 is formed in the decorative portion 511 of the upper surface base 510 and the decorative portion of the lower surface base 520. It is possible to suppress the generation of a vortex in the airflow K when air is taken in from the gap between the 521 and the rotation transmission unit 570. Therefore, the flow of the airflow K flowing through the central portion in the left-right direction of the rotation unit 500 can be smoothed, and when the outside air is taken in from the back side in the vicinity of the rotation transmission unit 570, the intake can be efficiently performed. ..

Next, the center frame 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 to 41.

First, the overall configuration of the center frame 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38. FIG. 37 is an exploded front perspective view of the center frame 600, and FIG. 38 is an exploded rear perspective view of the center frame 600.

As shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, the center frame 600 includes a frame body 610 formed in a ring shape in front view, and a center cover 620 arranged so as to cover the inner peripheral portion of the frame body 610. It is mainly provided with a sensor 630 attached to the frame body 610.

The frame body 610 includes a stage 611 projecting from the lower portion of the inner peripheral edge portion in front view toward the center cover 620 side (rear side), a wall portion 612 projecting radially outward from the outer peripheral side surface, and a rear surface side. A fastening hole 613 that is recessed in a circular shape toward the front side at the edge of the sensor 630 and an opening 614 that opens in front of the irradiation surface 631 of the sensor 630 arranged on the back side. To.

Further, the frame body 610 is a member that is arranged in the central portion of the game board 13 so as to surround the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) and is visible to the player through the glass 8. Patterns and pictures are drawn on the front side.

The stage 611 is formed by bending from the inner edge portion on the lower side of the frame body 610 to the back surface side, and the first recessed portion 611a is formed on the upper surface thereof at the end portion on the front side and the second concave portion is formed on the end portion on the back surface side. Each of the setting portions 611b is recessed.

The stage 611 rolls the ball on its upper surface, and drops the ball from the upper surface of the stage 611 by utilizing the inclination of either the first recessed portion 611a or the second recessed portion 612b, so that the first It is possible to form a state in which the ball can easily win a prize in the winning opening 64. Therefore, since it is possible to form a plurality of flow paths of the ball flowing down the game area, it is possible to give the player an interest.

The first recessed portion 611a is a groove for dropping a ball rolling on the upper part of the stage 611 onto the front side (front side of the base plate 60) of the game board 13, and is a recessed depth toward the front side. Is deeply formed. The second recessed portion 611b is a groove for throwing a ball into an opening formed in the back surface portion at the center in the left-right direction of the stage 611, and the recessed depth is formed deeper toward the back surface side.

The wall portion 612 is a portion that is positioned in the front-rear direction with respect to the base plate 60 when the assembled center frame 600 is arranged on the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2), and is front and rear in the central portion of the base plate 60. The outer shape is larger than the inner shape of the opening that is formed through in the direction. As a result, when the center frame 600 is inserted into the opening of the base plate 60 from the front side, the side surface on the back side of the wall portion 612 comes into contact with the side surface on the front side of the base plate 60 with respect to the base plate 60. The center frame 600 can be positioned.

A plurality of fastening holes 613 are recessed on the back surface side of the frame body 610, and are formed at positions facing through holes 623a of the center cover 620, which will be described later. The opening 614 is an opening for irradiating the front side with the sensor light emitted from the sensor 630 described later, and is formed at a position facing the irradiation surface 631 to which the sensor light of the sensor 630 is irradiated.

The center cover 620 is formed of a resin material that is a light-transmitting material, is formed in a substantially circular shape in front view, and is arranged on the inner peripheral side of the frame body 610, and the left and right edges of the cover member 621. It is mainly provided with a side wall portion 622 erected on the front side from the side, an erection tip surface of the side wall portion 622, and a mounting portion 623 projecting outward from the lower edge portion of the cover member 621. To.

The cover member 621 is formed into a plate-like body having a constant thickness that curves toward the back side (the front side becomes a convex curved surface) from the upper center in the left-right direction toward the outside in the front view. The upper peripheral edge of the central portion in the left-right direction (hereinafter, referred to as "first portion 621a") is formed so as to be located in front of the peripheral edges of both left and right ends and the lower end (hereinafter, referred to as "second portion").

Since the cover member 621 is formed of a plate-like body having a constant thickness, it is possible to suppress the action as a convex lens and ensure the visibility of the third symbol display device 81 arranged on the back surface side.

Further, since the cover member 621 is formed of a plate-like body having a constant thickness, the cover member 621 faces the third symbol display device 81 by the amount that the central portion in the left-right direction curves toward the front side in the front view. A space can be formed between them. As a result, it is possible to secure a space in which the decorative member 450 of the vertical displacement unit 400 described above is displaced and produced.

The side wall portion 622 is a wall portion so that the center cover 620 can be attached to the frame body 610, and since the cover member 621 is curved to the back surface side as described above, the back surface of the frame body 610 and the center cover are correspondingly formed. Where the distance between the front surface of the 620 and the opposite side increases, the side wall portion 622 can reduce (eliminate) the distance between the back surface of the frame body 610 and the front surface of the center cover 620.

That is, the vertical dimension of the side wall portion 622 on the front side is set to the distance dimension between the back surface of the frame body 610 and the front surface of the center cover 620 when the center cover 620 is arranged on the frame body 610. As a result, when the frame body 610 and the center cover 620 are combined, it is possible to prevent the first portion 621a of the cover member 621 from protruding too much toward the front side of the frame body 610.

The mounting portion 623 is a protruding portion for mounting the center cover 620 on the frame body 610, and a plurality of through holes 623a formed through in the front-rear direction are formed. As described above, a fastening hole 613 is formed in the back surface of the frame body 610 at a position facing the through hole 623a, and a screw or the like (not shown) is inserted through the through hole 623a and fastened to the fastening hole 613. As a result, the frame body 610 and the center cover 620 are fastened and fixed.

The sensor 630 is a motion sensor for detecting the movement of the player, and is a light emitting unit that irradiates light such as infrared rays and a light receiving unit that receives the reflected light reflected by the object from the light emitted from the light emitting unit. The irradiation surface 631 having the above is provided.

The sensor 630 is arranged at a height of about 2/3 from the bottom when the frame body 610 is divided into three equal parts in the vertical direction, and is arranged on the right side of the frame body 610. Further, the sensor 630 is arranged in a state where its irradiation surface 631 is tilted toward the center front side of the center frame 600. As a result, the light emitted from the irradiation surface 631 of the sensor 630 is emitted from the central portion on the front side of the game board 13 to the player side via the glass 8.

Next, the sensor light emitted from the sensor 630 will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40.

39 (a) is a front view of the center frame 600, and FIG. 39 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the center frame 600 in the line XXXIXb-XXXIXb of FIG. 39 (a). 40 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the center frame 600 on the XLa-XLa line of FIG. 39 (a), and FIG. 40 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the center frame 600 on the XLb-XLb line of FIG. 39 (a). It is a figure.

In FIGS. 39 (a) and 40 (b), the irradiation region of the light of the sensor 630 irradiated in front of the center frame 600 is shown by a two-dot chain line, and is shown as the irradiation regions R1 and R2. Further, in FIG. 39B, the sensor 630 is shown by a broken line. Further, in FIGS. 40 (b) and 40 (b), the light emitted from the sensor 630 and the sensor 630 is shown by a two-dot chain line and arranged in front of the center frame 600 (in front of the game board 13). The glass 8 to be formed is illustrated by a chain double-dashed line.

As shown in FIGS. 39 and 40, the sensor 630 is arranged in front of the second portion 621b of the cover member 621. As a result, the light emitted from the sensor 630 is not emitted to the front side of the game machine via the cover member 621 (transmitted), and the light emitted from the sensor 630 is blocked by the cover member 621. Can be suppressed. Further, the sensor 630 is arranged with a decorative portion of the frame body 610 on the front side. As a result, the sensor 630 can be made difficult to see from the player side (front side).

The light emitted from the sensor 630 irradiates the glass 8 directly from the irradiation surface 631 of the sensor 630 and irradiates the region of the irradiation region R1 emitted from the front side of the glass 8 and the front surface of the cover member 621 of the center cover 620. The light is reflected and emitted to the region of the irradiation region R2 that is emitted from the front side of the glass 8.

Here, in the game machine in which the motion sensor (sensor 630) is arranged in the game machine and the movement of the player on the front side of the liquid crystal device (third symbol display device 81) is detected, the motion sensor is exposed. There was a problem that it spoiled the interest.

Therefore, the sensor 630 is arranged on the back side of the decorative member (frame body 610). In this case, if the sensor 630 is retracted from the inner edge side (opening 614 of the frame body 610) of the decorative member to the back side (outside), it can be made more difficult to see, but the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion (irradiation surface 631) are in front. It becomes difficult to point toward, and the detection range becomes narrow. On the other hand, if the sensor 630 is positioned close to the inner edge side of the decorative member (opening of the frame body 610), the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion can be easily directed to the front, so that the detection range can be widened in the front-rear direction. It becomes easier to see. That is, there is a problem that it is difficult to secure a range in which an object can be detected while making it difficult for the player to visually recognize the sensor 630.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a part of the light emitted from the irradiation surface 631 of the sensor 630 is applied to the cover member 621 of the center cover 620, so that the curved shape of the cover member 621 causes the front side ( It is reflected on the player side). As a result, the sensor 630 can be retracted to the back of the opening 614 of the frame body 610, and the range in which the object can be detected can be secured while making it difficult for the player to see. Since the cover member 621 is made of a light-transmitting material, the visibility of the design displayed on the liquid crystal display device can be ensured.

Further, since the front side of the cover member 621 is a convex curved surface, when the light emitted from the sensor 630 is reflected by the front of the cover member 621, the reflection angle (reflection angle) is located near the sensor 630. On the other hand, at a position far from Sen 630, the angle of reflection (reflection angle) can be made an obtuse angle, and the range in which an object can be detected can be easily expanded accordingly.

Further, the light emitted to the irradiation region R2 (light reflected by the cover member 621) is reflected on the cover member 621 side when the object is irradiated and reflected. In this case, the traveling direction of the reflected light differs depending on the surface shape of the reflecting object, but the traveling of the light reflected in different directions by reflecting the light reflected in a plurality of directions in front of the cover member 621. The direction can be the traveling direction toward the sensor 630 side. That is, by increasing the amount of light reflected on the sensor 630 side, it is possible to reliably perform the light reception detection operation of the sensor 630.

The first portion 621a of the cover member 621 is located on the front side of the wall portion 612 of the frame body 610, and the second portion 621b is located on the back side of the wall portion 612 of the frame body 610 (FIG. 39 (FIG. 39). b) See). That is, the first portion 621a is arranged at a position substantially identical to the back surface of the base plate 60 or at a position on the front side of the back surface of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2), and the second portion 621b is the back surface of the base plate 60. It is arranged at a position closer to the back side.

As a result, it is possible to secure the distance dimension between the cover member 621 of the center cover 620 and the third symbol display device 81 facing each other in the upper part of the center frame 600. As a result, the dimensions in the front-rear direction when the decorative member 450 of the vertical displacement unit 400 described above is displaced in the vertical direction can be secured, and the decorative member 450 can be displaced. Further, the curvature of the cover member 621 can be increased in the limited space between the space behind the displacement of the decorative member 450 and the space in the front where the glass 8 is arranged.

Further, since the first portion 621a is arranged at a position substantially the same as the back surface of the base plate 60 or on the front side of the back surface of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2), the decorative member 450 of the vertical displacement unit 400 (see FIG. 2). The rotation unit 500) can be more reliably suppressed from interfering with the first portion 621a, and the displacement member can be increased in size accordingly.

Further, since the second portion 621b is arranged at a position on the back side of the base plate 60, the curvature of the cover member 621 can be increased, and the front side of the cover member 621 is used as a light reflecting surface. It can be done easily. That is, the sensor 630 can be arranged on the back side to make it difficult for the player to see, and it is possible to secure a range in which the object can be detected.

Further, since the first portion 621a is located above the cover member 621, in the store where the game machine 10 is installed, the illumination of the fluorescent lamp of the store is reflected by the cover member 621 and the front side (player side). Can be suppressed from being irradiated to.

That is, if the upper portion of the cover member 621 is curved toward the back side, the light of the fluorescent lamp of the store irradiated from diagonally above is easily reflected to the front side, and the front surface of the cover member 621 is formed. Since the normal direction is formed as a curved surface that points downward at least in the horizontal direction, the light incident on the front surface of the cover member 621 can be reflected downward. That is, when light from a fluorescent lamp or another game machine installed on the ceiling in the store is incident on the front of the cover member 621, it is possible to suppress the light from being reflected toward the player. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling dazzling and the visibility of the third symbol display device 81 from being deteriorated.

Next, the relationship between the center frame 600 and the rotating unit 500 of the vertical displacement unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 41.

41 (a) and 41 (b) are cross-sectional views of the rotating unit 500 and the center frame 600. Note that, in FIG. 41 (a), the initial position (reference position) (position in which the extension direction is oriented horizontally) of the rotating unit 500 is shown, and in FIG. 41 (b), the rotating unit 500 is centered on its rotation axis. The mode rotated by 90 degrees is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 41 (a) and 41 (b), the decorative member 450 of the vertical displacement unit 400 is displaced to the front side of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) and the back side of the center frame 600. When located in, a predetermined gap is formed between the rotating unit 500 of the decorative member 450 and the cover member 621 of the center frame 600 facing each other. As a result, the rotating unit 500 can rotate without colliding with the cover member 621.

In this case, if the rotating member (rotating unit 500) is a rotating object in front of the third symbol display device 81, a wind flow is generated by the rotation of the rotating member, and the ball flowing down due to the influence of the wind is generated. There was a problem that it would move.

In particular, in the present embodiment, since the rotating unit 500 is located above the stage 611 on which the ball rolls, the ball rolling on the upper part of the stage 611 is easily affected by the wind due to the rotation of the rotating unit 500.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the mounting portion 623 connected from the second portion 621b of the cover member 621 is fastened to the fastening hole 613 recessed under the stage 611 of the frame body 610 (that is,). Since the lower end portion of the center cover 620 is connected to the lower end portion of the frame body 610), the flow-down region of the sphere and the displacement region of the rotating unit 500 can be separated. Therefore, the wind generated by the rotation of the rotating unit 500 can be blocked by the cover member 621 (second portion 621b). As a result, it is possible to prevent the flow of the sphere from being affected by the action of the wind. Further, even if wind is generated by the rotation of the rotating unit 500 and dust or dust is blown off by the wind, it can be blocked by the second portion 621b (cover member 621), so that the blown dust or dust is a sensor. It is possible to prevent the detection accuracy from being lowered due to the soaring on the light emitting / receiving route.

Here, it has been conventionally known that a back wall is erected on the stage 611 of the center frame 600 so that a ball rolling on the stage 611 does not fall to the back side. However, in such a conventional product, the wind generated by the rotation of the rotating unit 500 wraps around from the standing tip on the back side erected from the stage 611 to the front side, or the glass 8 on the front side of the game board 13. It is folded back at and affects the ball rolling on the stage 611. On the other hand, in order to prevent the influence of the wind on the sphere rolling on the stage 611, the back wall is curved to the front side so as to cover the circumference of the sphere of the stage (that is, a closed passage is formed). ), Since it becomes difficult for the player to see the ball rolling on the upper part of the stage 611, the player's interest is impaired.

On the other hand, since the second portion 621b of the cover member 621 is connected to the range including the stage 611 of the frame body 610, the wind generated by the rotation of the rotating unit 500 is blown by the second portion 621b (cover member 621). Can be blocked by. As a result, since it is not necessary to cover the periphery of the stage 611, the ball rolling on the upper part of the stage 611 can be easily seen by the player, and the flow of the ball can be suppressed from being affected by the action of the wind.

Here, if the displacement region in which the displacement member (vertical displacement unit 400) is displaced and the flow-down region in which the ball flows down are partitioned by a partition plate (center cover 620), the back surface is arranged on the back surface side of the game board 13. Since many members that generate heat such as the third symbol display device 81 and the drive motor 441 that drives the vertical displacement unit 400 are arranged in the case 300, the heat is inside the displacement region (the back side of the game board 13). ), There is a problem that the substrate for controlling the game machine 1 and the third symbol display device 81 are damaged.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the first portion 621a of the cover member 621 is not connected to the frame body 610, but is arranged at a predetermined distance from the inner peripheral edge of the frame body 610. The back side and the front side of the game board 13 and the cover member 621 can be communicated with each other through a predetermined interval. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the heat generated from the vertical displacement unit 400 from being trapped on the back surface side of the game board 13 and the cover member 621. As a result, cold air on the front side (than the rear side) of the game board 13 can be sent to the back side of the game board 13, so that the base for controlling the game machine 1 and the third symbol display device 81 are damaged. Can be suppressed.

Further, since a predetermined distance between the first portion 621a and the inner peripheral edge of the frame body 610 is formed in the upper part of the center frame 600, warmed air is passed through the predetermined distance to the front side of the game board 13. Can be easily flushed. That is, since the warmed air on the back side of the game board 13 is raised by the heat, it moves from a predetermined distance between the first portion 621a formed above and the inner peripheral edge of the frame 610 to the front side. It can be easily washed away. As a result, it is possible to prevent heat from being trapped on the back side of the game board 13 and the cover member 621.

In this case, when the rotating unit 500 is rotated to generate wind, the wind comes out from a predetermined distance between the first portion 621a and the inner peripheral edge of the frame 610 and flows down in front of the game board 13. May affect the ball.

On the other hand, the wind generated by the rotation of the rotating unit 500 can be flowed toward the upper region of the game region (the region above the opening of the game board 13), and the action of the wind causes the sphere. It is possible to prevent the flow of water from being affected. That is, the ball flowing down the upper region of the game region is an initial ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a and flowed into the game region, and its speed is relatively high. Therefore, for example, the stage of the center frame 600. Compared to a sphere that rolls over 611, it is less susceptible to wind. In other words, the wind can flow toward an area where the sphere is less susceptible to the effects of the wind. Therefore, the rotation speed of the rotating member can be increased by that amount, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

Next, the sorting device 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 to 46.

First, the overall configuration of the sorting device 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 to 45. FIG. 42 is an exploded front perspective view of the sorting device 700, and FIG. 43 is a partially enlarged front view of the sorting device 700. FIG. 44 is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device 700 on the XLIV-XLIV line of FIG. 43. 45 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device 700 on the XLVa-XLVa line of FIG. 43, and FIG. 45 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device 700 on the XLVb-XLVb line of FIG. 45 (a). 45 (c) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device 700 on the XLVc-XLVc line of FIG. 43, and FIG. 45 (d) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device 700 on the XLVd-XLVd line of FIG. 45.

In FIG. 43, the inner peripheral surface of the distribution member 760, the seesaw member 762, the communication hole 751 and the recovery hole 752 are shown by broken lines. In FIG. 45 (d), the path of the sphere discharged from the opening 744 is illustrated by a two-dot chain line.

As shown in FIGS. 42 to 45, the sorting device 700 is arranged on the lower side of the center frame 600 of the game board 13, and is arranged on the front side (front side of the paper in FIG. 43) with respect to the base plate 60. A side forming portion 710 and a back side forming portion 720 arranged on the back side (back side of the paper surface of FIG. 43) with respect to the base plate 60 are mainly provided.

The front side forming portion 710 is mainly provided with a winning member 730 attached to the front side of the base plate 60 and a bending member 740 arranged on the front side of the winning member 730.

The back surface side forming portion 720 is formed mainly including an intermediate member 750 attached to the back surface side of the base plate 60 and a distribution member 760 arranged on the back surface side of the intermediate member 750. ..

The winning member 730 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in the front view, and has the above-mentioned first winning opening 64 located at the upper center in the left-right direction and the first electric accessory 640a located below the first winning opening 64. , A through hole 731 located on both sides of the first electric accessory 640a in the left-right direction and formed through the through hole 731, and a lower insertion hole 732 located below the through hole 731 and formed through the first electric accessory 640a in the front-rear direction. , Is mainly provided.

The through hole 731 is a member through which the upper protruding portion 741 of the bending member 740 described later is inserted, and is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in front view that opens slightly larger than the outer shape in the rear view of the upper protruding portion 741. .. Further, on the lower surface of the through hole 731, a protruding wall 731a is formed so as to project upward from the back surface to the front surface.

The projecting wall 731a is symmetrically arranged with two center lines in the left-right direction of the through hole 731 in the front view, and the projecting distance is set to be smaller from the back side to the front side. Therefore, the sphere that passes (rolls) through the inside of the through hole 731 by the intermediate member 750 and the distribution member 760, which will be described later, is guided to the center position in the left-right direction of the two projecting walls 731a, and is guided from the back side to the front. Rolled toward the side.

The lower insertion hole 732 is a hole that communicates with the recovery hole 752 of the intervention member 750 arranged on the back surface side, and is formed at a position facing the recovery hole 752 of the intervention member 750. Further, the lower insertion hole 732 is opened in a substantially D-shaped front view in which the lower surface side is curved, and the first protruding portion 732a protruding downward from the upper surface at the center position in the left-right direction in the front view, and protruding upward from the lower surface. A second protruding portion 732b is provided.

The protrusion distance of the first protruding portion 732a is increased from the front side (right side in FIG. 45 (a)) to the back side (left side in FIG. 45 (a)). The second protruding portion 732b is formed so that the protruding distance becomes smaller from the front side to the back side. Further, the distance dimension between the first protruding portion 732a and the second protruding portion 732b facing each other is formed to be slightly larger than the diameter dimension of the sphere. Therefore, when the ball passes through the inside of the lower insertion hole 732, the ball can be rolled to the back side by inclining the second protruding portion 732b from the front side to the back side. On the other hand, when the ball bounces in the vertical direction when the lower insertion hole 732 is inserted, the first protrusion 732a can suppress the upward displacement.

A sensor SE that detects the passage of a sphere is arranged on the back surface of the lower insertion hole 732. The sensor SE is a member that is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in front view and has a through hole having a diameter slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere on the side surface thereof, and the sphere passes through the inside of the through hole to form a sphere. Can detect the passage of. The sensor SE is arranged so that the shaft of the through hole is positioned coaxially with the arc axis on the lower surface side of the lower insertion hole 732. As a result, the opening direction of the through hole can be slightly inclined downward toward the back surface side, so that it is possible to prevent the ball passing through the inside of the through hole of the sensor SE from staying inside the through hole.

The bending member 740 is a member arranged on the front side of the through hole 731 and the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 730 described above, and is a substantially center position in the left-right direction of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2) in the front view. Are arranged symmetrically, and the outer shape thereof is formed symmetrically.

Further, the bending member 740 is arranged at a position where a gap having a size through which the ball can pass is formed between the bending member 740 and the inner rail 61 (see FIG. 2) forming the game area in the front view. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball flowing down the game area below the bending member 740 from being sandwiched between the bending member 740 and the inner rail 61 and staying in the game area.

The bending member 740 is formed of a plate-like body having a substantially rectangular shape in front view, and has an upper protruding portion 741 protruding from the back surface thereof, a lower protruding portion 743 protruding from below the upper protruding portion 741, and an upper protruding portion 741. And an opening 744 formed between the lower protrusions 743 facing each other.

The upper protruding portion 741 is formed in a substantially U shape in which the lower side is open in rear view, and its outer shape is set to be slightly smaller than the inner shape of the through hole 731 of the winning member 730. As a result, when the bending member 740 is arranged in the winning member 730, the upper protruding portion 741 can be inserted into the through hole 731 and arranged. Therefore, when the bending member 740 is arranged on the winning member 730, the upper protruding portion 741 can be inserted and positioned, so that the assembling step can be simplified.

Further, since the upper protruding portion 741 is formed in a substantially U shape in which the lower side is open in the rear view, when the ball is passed through the through hole 731 of the winning member 730 and rolled to the bending member 740 side, the ball The connecting portion between the winning member 730 and the bending member 740 is not formed on the rolling surface (lower surface) on which the winning member 730 rolls. Therefore, since the rolling of the sphere can be made constant, it is possible to prevent the sphere from stopping inside the through hole 731. That is, when a connecting portion between the winning member 730 and the bending member 740 is formed on the rolling surface of the sphere, resistance increases when the sphere rolls on the connecting portion, and the sphere bounces in steps, but the sphere By eliminating the connecting portion on the rolling surface of the ball, the rolling of the ball can be stabilized and the clogging of the ball can be suppressed.

Further, in this case, even if the upper protruding portion 741 is formed in a circular ring shape in the rear view and the sphere is passed through the inside of the ring, the winning member 730 and the bending member are similarly formed on the rolling surface on which the sphere rolls. Although the connecting portion with the 740 is not formed, the manufacturing cost increases because the component shape of the bending member 740 becomes complicated because the upper protruding portion 741 is formed in a ring shape. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the upper protruding portion 741 has a substantially U-shape in the rear view, the shape of the component can be simplified and the increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

The lower protrusion 743 is formed on the lower side of the upper protrusion 741 and is formed in a substantially U-shape in rear view in which the upper side is open. That is, when viewed from the rear, the open portions of the upper protruding portion 741 and the lower protruding portion 743 are formed so as to face each other in the vertical direction.

The lower protrusion 743 is a path for throwing a ball thrown from the through hole 731 of the winning member 730 to the bending member 740 side into the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 730 (hereinafter, "second throwing path KR2"). It is a member for forming (referred to as), and is formed at a position facing the lower insertion hole 732 in the front-rear direction.

The protrusion distance of the lower protrusion 743 to the back surface is set to a dimension larger than the diameter of the sphere. Further, the bending member 740 is arranged on the winning member 730 in a state where the protruding tip surface of the lower protruding portion 743 is in contact with the winning member 730. Therefore, the distance between the bending member 740 and the winning member 730 is made larger than the diameter of the sphere, and the ball is thrown in the vertical direction between the bending member 740 and the winning member 730. A "first throwing path KR1") is formed.

The bending member 740 is formed with a guide portion 742 that protrudes from the upper inner surface of the upper protruding portion 741 to the lower inner surface of the lower protruding portion 743. The guide portion 742 is projected in a substantially U-shape with the back side open in the side view.

The guide portion 742 is a protrusion wall that throws a ball thrown from the through hole 731 of the winning member 730 to the bending member 740 (first throwing path KR1) in the vertical direction and then throws the ball into the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 730. The vertical height of the lower inner edge portion is formed to be slightly smaller than the height of the lower inner edge portion of the lower insertion hole 732 arranged on the back surface.

The guide portion 742 is formed symmetrically with two center lines in the left-right direction in the front view of the through hole 731 arranged on the back surface side. As a result, the two guide portions 742 are brought into contact with each other and guided (folded back to the back side), so that it is possible to prevent the ball from shifting in the left-right direction.

The protruding tip surfaces of the guide portions 742 that are arranged side by side are formed so as to be inclined toward the base portion side as they approach the surfaces facing each other (see FIG. 45B). As a result, it is possible to effectively prevent the ball that comes into contact with the two guide portions 742 and is guided (folded back to the back side) from being displaced in the left-right direction.

The upper projecting portion 741 is formed with side walls 741a projecting inward on the left and right side surfaces in rear view. A plurality of side walls 741a (three in this embodiment) are arranged side by side at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. As a result, when the ball thrown inside the upper protrusion 741 rolls in the left-right direction in the normal state, the ball can be brought into contact with the tip surface of the side wall 741a to stabilize the thrown ball. On the other hand, when two spheres flow continuously inside the upper protrusion 741 and the sphere flowing behind collides with the sphere flowing ahead, the front sphere enters between each side wall 741a to the left and right. It is possible to secure a distance to escape in the direction and prevent the ball from being clogged inside the upper protrusion 741. That is, the side wall 741a can stabilize the ball thrown inside the upper protrusion 741.

The opening 744 is a predetermined gap formed between the upper protruding portion 741 and the lower protruding portion 743 facing each other, and is formed on both sides in the left-right direction in the rear view. Further, the opening 744 is formed in a substantially U shape in which the back side is open when viewed from the side.

The upper end of the opening 744 is set to substantially the same vertical height as the lower surface of the through hole 731 of the winning member 730, and the height of the lower end is substantially intermediate in the vertical direction of the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 730. Is set to the height of. As a result, when the spheres are continuously thrown into the bending member 740, it is possible to prevent the spheres from being released to the opening 744 and being clogged inside the bending member 740. That is, the opening 744 is formed by opening on the left-right side surface of the connecting portion between the first throwing path KR1 and the second throwing path KR2.

The distribution member 760 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a box-like body having an open front side. Further, the distribution member 760 is bent at a substantially central position in the left-right direction in the front view, and is formed so as to be inclined downward from a substantially central position in the left-right direction toward the outside in the left-right direction. Further, both ends of the distribution member 760 in the left-right direction are set at positions facing the through holes 731 of the winning member 730 described above.

The distribution member 760 includes a pair of inclined surfaces 761 that incline downward from the center position in the left-right direction in the front view toward both left and right sides, a seesaw member 762 arranged at the center of each of the inclined surfaces 761, and an upper part of the seesaw member 762. It is mainly provided with a throwing port 763 formed in.

The throwing port 763 is a member for forming an opening on the front side of the distribution member 760, and is formed at a position facing the first winning port 64 of the winning member 730. As a result, when the distribution member 760 is arranged in the intermediary member 750, which will be described later, a space A can be formed between the ball throwing port 763 and the intermediary member 750.

The space A is formed in a space larger than the outer diameter of the sphere (that is, a bending space through which the sphere can pass), and the first winning opening of the winning member 730 is formed through a through hole formed in the base plate 60. It is connected to 64 internal spaces (see FIG. 44). As a result, the ball to be won in the first winning opening 64 can be thrown into the space A, and the inside of the space A can be thrown.

The seesaw member 762 is formed in a ring shape, and has three protrusions 762a projecting outward at a distance of 90 degrees around the axis from the outer edge thereof, and a shaft inserted inside the ring shape. It is formed with a portion 762b.

The shaft portion 762b is a shaft support portion for rotating the seesaw member 762 around the shaft, is formed in a cylindrical shape, and is inserted into the inside of the ring of the seesaw member 762. In this state, the shaft portion 762b is sandwiched between the intermediate member 750 and the distribution member 760, so that the seesaw member 762 is rotatably arranged around the shaft portion 762b.

The protrusion 762a is a protrusion for alternately distributing the ball to the left and right inclined surfaces 761 one by one when the ball is thrown from the above-mentioned space A, and is the direction in which the tip of the protrusion 762a in the center is located and the left and right. The ball is thrown to the opposite side of the direction. That is, the ball thrown from the space A can be thrown in the left-right direction by the protrusion 762a in the central portion. The protrusions 762a projecting from both ends regulate the displacement of the seesaw member 762 and displace the direction in which the tip of the protrusion 762a in the center is located due to the weight applied when the ball passes (seesaw member 762). It is a member (to be rotated), and the rotation of the seesaw member 762 is restricted by the contact between the tip surface of the protrusion 762a and the inclined surface 761. On the other hand, when the sphere is guided by the protrusion 762a in the center of the protrusion 762a that is not in contact with the inclined surface 761, the guided sphere collides with the protrusion 762a and is pushed downward. As a result, the protrusion 762a on the opposite side is displaced upward, and the tip of the protrusion 762a displaced downward comes into contact with the inclined surface 761 to regulate the displacement.

The inclined surface 761 is a rolling surface of a path (hereinafter, referred to as “third throwing path KR3”) in which balls distributed to the left and right by the seesaw member 762 described above are rolled and thrown, and the distribution member 760. It is formed with a downward slope from the center position in the left-right direction toward the outside. As a result, the balls distributed to the left and right by the seesaw member 762 of the distribution member 760 are rolled on the inclined surface 761 and thrown (rolled) to the descending end of the inclined surface 761.

The lower end of the inclined surface 761 is formed so as to be inclined in a direction closer to the intermediate member 750 so that the side surface on the back surface side increases in thickness forward toward the end. As a result, the ball that has rolled on the inclined surface 761 and has been thrown to the end thereof can be thrown into the communication hole 751 of the intermediate member 750 arranged in front of the distribution member 760.

The interposition member 750 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in the front view, and the above-mentioned variable winning device 65 in the lower center in the left-right direction in the front view, communication holes 751 penetrating in the front-rear direction on both the left and right sides, and communication thereof. It is mainly provided with a recovery hole 752 opened on the lower side of the hole 751.

The communication hole 751 is formed on the front side of both left and right ends of the distribution member 760 and on the back side of the through hole 731 of the winning member 730. Therefore, the space at both left and right ends of the distribution member 760 and the internal space of the through hole 731 of the winning member 730 are connected via the communication hole 751. Therefore, a path (hereinafter referred to as "fourth throwing path KR4") is used to pass a ball rolling on the upper portion of the inclined surface 761 of the distribution member 760 to the through hole 731 of the winning member 730 through the communication hole 751. Can be referred to).

As described above, the recovery hole 752 is an opening formed on the back surface side of the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 730. That is, the recovery hole 752 is connected to the back surface side of the sensor SE, and a ball passing through the sensor SE is sent to the opening of the recovery hole 752. The collection hole 752 is connected to a device for circulating balls installed in a store, and the ball collected in the collection hole 752 is circulated by the circulation device and re-launched from the ball launching unit 112a as a game ball. ..

The sorting device 700 configured as described above is thrown as follows. The ball entering from the first winning opening 64 is thrown to the sorting member 760 and is thrown to the third throwing path KR3 in either the left-right direction by the seesaw member 762 of the sorting member 760. When the ball thrown through the third throwing path KR3 is thrown to the end of the third throwing path KR3, the ball is thrown into the fourth throwing path KR4 inside the communication hole 751 of the interposition member 750 arranged on the front side. The ball is thrown. The ball thrown through the fourth throwing path KR4 is thrown into the first throwing path KR1 on the back side of the bending member 740. The ball thrown through the first throwing path KR1 is guided by the lower protrusion 743 of the bending member 740 and thrown into the second throwing path KR2. The ball thrown through the second throwing path KR2 passes through the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 730, passes through the inside of the sensor SE, and then is thrown into the recovery hole 752 of the intermediate member 3750.

Here, as described above, the through holes 731 and the lower insertion holes 732 of the winning member 730 are formed on both the left and right sides of the first electric accessory 640a, and the bending members 740 are arranged in pairs on the left and right. The first electric accessory 640a is located between the lower protrusions 743 of the bent member 740.

In this case, if the angle of the downward inclination of the third throwing path KR3 is small (the inclined surface is gentle), the flow velocity of the ball becomes low, and the ball is likely to be clogged at the lower protrusion 743. On the other hand, if the angle of the downward inclination of the third throwing path KR3 is large (the downward inclination is steep), the flow speed of the ball can be increased and the ball clogging in the lower insertion hole 732 can be less likely to occur. The space in the height direction (vertical direction) required for arranging the third throwing path KR3 (distribution member 760) is increased, which makes it difficult to dispose the first electric accessory 640a.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the opening 744 is formed on the side wall of the lower protruding portion 743, it is possible to prevent ball clogging in the lower protruding portion 743, and thus the third throwing path KR3 The angle of the downward slope of is small (the downward slope is gentle). As a result, the space in the height direction required for the arrangement of the third throwing path KR3 (distribution member 760) can be suppressed, and the first electric accessory 640a can be arranged. That is, the arrangement of the bending member 740 and the first electric accessory 640a is impossible with the conventional product, and it is possible only by forming the opening 744 on the side wall of the lower protrusion 743 as described above. It is a thing.

Here, in the present embodiment, an opening is formed in the center of the game board 13 (the center frame 600 is arranged), and the third symbol display device 81 is made visible to the player through the opening. In recent years, with the demand for larger size of the third symbol display device 81, the central opening of the game board 13 (the inner peripheral edge of the frame body 610 of the center frame 600) has also become larger, so that the lower part of the central opening of the game board 13 has been increased. The space between the edge portion and the lower edge portion of the game area (lower inner edge portion of the inner rail 61) is narrowed. Therefore, in the conventional product, the members corresponding to the third throwing path KR3 and the first electric accessory 640a are arranged in the space between the lower edge of the central opening of the game board 13 and the lower edge of the game area. Was difficult.

That is, as described above, when the angle of the downward inclination of the third throwing path KR3 is small (the downward inclination is gentle), the flow velocity of the ball becomes low, and the ball is likely to be clogged at the lower protrusion 743. Become. On the other hand, if the angle of the downward inclination of the third throwing path KR3 is large (the downward inclination is steep), the flow velocity of the ball can be increased and the ball clogging in the lower protrusion 743 can be less likely to occur. The space in the height direction required for arranging the third throwing path KR3 is increased, which makes it difficult to dispose the first electric accessory 640a. Further, since the arrangement position of the lower protruding portion 743 (bending member 740) in the vertical direction is lowered (lowered), the lower protruding portion 743 (bending member 740) and the lower edge portion (inner rail 61) of the game area are lowered. It becomes difficult to secure a gap through which the ball can pass, and it is necessary to provide first out ports 71 on both sides of the lower protrusion 743 (bending member 740).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, by forming an opening in the side wall of the lower protruding portion 743, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of ball clogging in the lower protruding portion 743. 3 The angle of the downward inclination of the throwing path KR3 can be reduced (the downward inclination can be made gentle). As a result, the arrangement position of the lower protruding portion 743 (bending member 740) in the height direction (vertical direction) can be raised (raised), so that the lower protruding portion 743 (bending member 740) and the gaming area can be raised. It is possible to secure a gap through which the ball can pass between the lower edge portion of the inner rail 61 and the lower inner edge portion of the inner rail 61. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide the first out ports 71 on both sides of the lower protruding portion 743 (bending member 740).

That is, in the arrangement of the bending member 740 and the first electric accessory 640a, the arrangement in which a gap through which the ball can pass is formed between the lower protrusion 743 (bending member 740) and the lower edge portion of the game area is This arrangement is not possible with the conventional product, and as described above, it is possible for the first time by forming an opening in the side wall of the lower protrusion 743.

Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the throwing of the guide portion 742 of the bending member 740 will be described. FIG. 46 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13, and FIG. 46 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13. Note that FIG. 46 (a) corresponds to FIG. 45 (a), and FIG. 46 (b) corresponds to FIG. 45 (b).

As shown in FIG. 46, when two balls are thrown from the through hole 731 of the winning member 730 to the bending member 740 with almost no gap (that is, the two balls are connected in a row), the preceding (preceding) ball is sent. A part of the ball is thrown to the back side while entering the opening 744, and is guided to the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 730.

Here, if a passage having a cross-sectional area slightly larger than the outer diameter of the sphere is formed and the passage is bent, the two spheres are in a state where there is almost no gap in the passage (two spheres are connected in a row). ) When the ball is thrown, the ball that follows the ball that follows the ball sticks to the ball that precedes it, and the ball that follows the ball presses against the side wall, so that both cannot roll and the ball becomes clogged. It was.

On the other hand, in the present application, since the opening 744 is formed in the connecting portion between the first throwing path KR1 and the second throwing path KR2, when passing through the lower protrusion 743 in a state where a plurality of balls are connected, Even if the ball following the preceding ball catches up, it is possible to make it difficult to press the preceding ball against the side wall, and it is possible to easily continue the rolling of both. As a result, the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

Further, since the opening 744 is formed at a position where the first throwing path KR1 and the second throwing path KR2 are tolerant, it is possible to prevent the ball from being clogged at the bent portion where the ball is easily clogged. That is, in the region where the first throwing path KR1 and the second throwing path KR2 intersect, the ball flowing down (falling) on the first throwing path KR1 changes direction and rolls toward the extension direction of the second throwing path KR2. It is the position to start the movement, and it is easy for the ball that follows the ball that precedes it to catch up. Therefore, when the ball that follows the preceding ball presses against the side wall, both cannot roll, and ball clogging is likely to occur.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the opening 744 is formed at a position where the first throwing path KR1 and the second throwing path KR2 intersect, so that even if the following ball catches up with the preceding ball, it precedes. It is possible to make it difficult for the spheres to escape between the opposites of the opening 744 (a part of the preceding sphere is accommodated in the opening 744) and to be pressed against the side wall, so that the rolling of both can be easily continued. As a result, the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

Further, as described above, the height of the lower end of the opening 744 is set to the height of the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 730 at a substantially intermediate position in the vertical direction, so that the first throwing path KR1 is dropped (flowed down). When the sphere reaches the bottom wall of the second throwing path KR2 (lower protrusion 743), the sphere can be easily received in the opening. Therefore, even when the trailing ball catches up with the preceding ball, the preceding ball can be released between the opposing balls of the openings 744 to make it difficult to press against the side wall, and it is possible to easily continue the rolling of both. As a result, the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

Further, the lower protrusion 743 is formed in a substantially U shape in a side view, and the height of the lower end of the opening 744 is installed at a position separated from the bottom wall of the lower protrusion 743 by a predetermined distance. A side wall can be left (formed) between the lower end of the opening 744 and the second throw path KR2 (lower protrusion 743). Therefore, even when the opening is formed to a size that allows the ball to pass through, the ball unnecessarily flows out from the bending member 740 to the outside (the game area on the front side of the game board 13) through the opening. Can be suppressed.

In this case, when the size of the opening 744 is such that the ball cannot pass through, it is usually possible to use the opening 744 to make it difficult to press the preceding ball against the side wall, but exceptionally, the rear A form is formed in which the traveling ball presses the preceding ball against the center of the opening 744, and the preceding ball may be internally fitted (fitted) into the opening 744. In this case, the rolling of the trailing ball is hindered by the ball fitted in the opening 744, and the ball is clogged.

On the other hand, since the opening 744 is opened larger than the outer shape of the sphere (formed to a size that allows the sphere to pass through), a form is formed in which the following sphere presses the preceding sphere against the center of the opening 744. Even if this is done, the preceding ball can be discharged from the opening 744 to the outside of the bending member 740 (the game area on the front side of the game board 13), and the preceding ball is internally fitted (fitted) into the opening 744. You can avoid that. As a result, the rolling of the trailing ball can be continued, so that the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

Further, in this way, the opening 744 is formed in a size that allows the ball to pass through, and the opening 744 is arranged on the front side (that is, the game area) of the game board 13 to flow down the game area. The sphere can flow into the bending member 740 through the opening 744. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. For example, when a sensor for detecting a winning ball is arranged downstream of the lower protrusion 743, in addition to the ball flowing into the bending member 740 from the upstream of the lower protrusion 743, the bending member is bent from the opening 744. The ball that has flowed into the 740 can also be detected as a winning ball. In particular, in this case, since the opening 744 (the region where the first throwing path KR1 and the second throwing path KR2 intersect) is arranged on the front side of the game board 13, it flows into the bending member 740 from the opening 744. The ball to be played can be visually recognized by the player. Therefore, from this point as well, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

In the region where the first throwing path KR1 and the second throwing path KR2 meet, a lower portion of the guide portion 742 (that is, a portion that is curved downward toward the recovery hole 752) is arranged. As a result, when the ball flowing down (falling) on the first throwing path KR1 changes direction and starts rolling toward the extension direction of the second throwing path KR2, the ball is tilted downward by the guide portion 742. Can be quickly rolled using. This makes it easier to roll the leading ball before the trailing ball catches up, and the trailing ball causes the ball to move toward the back side (the extension direction of the second throwing path KR2). Since it can be suppressed from being pressed against the side wall (on the back side when rolling), it is possible to easily continue the rolling of both. As a result, the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

Further, since the opening 744 is formed at a position on the front side (game area side) of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2), ball clogging occurs at the bent portion of the first throwing path KR1 and the second throwing path KR2. At that time, the store operator can access the opening 744 from the front side by opening the glass 8. Therefore, it is possible to improve the workability of the work of clearing the ball clogging.

Furthermore, when dust or dirt collects at the bent portion of the first throwing path KR1 and the second throwing path KR2, the store operator opens the glass 8 to access the opening 744 from the front side. Therefore, the bent portion can be cleaned through the opening 744. Therefore, it is possible to improve the cleanability when cleaning the first throwing path KR1 and the second throwing path KR2.

Next, the light emitting decoration unit 800 will be described with reference to FIG. 47. FIG. 47 is an exploded front perspective view of the light emitting decoration unit 800.

As shown in FIG. 47, the light emitting decoration unit 800 is provided on a front-view horizontally long rectangular base body 810 arranged on the bottom wall portion 301 (see FIG. 6) of the back case 300 and on the front side of the base body 810. It mainly includes a light emitting device 820 to be arranged, and a cover member 830 which is covered on the front surface of the light emitting device 820 and is made of a light transmitting material.

On the front side of the light emitting device 820, a plurality of light emitting bodies (LED821) are dispersedly arranged over the entire surface. Therefore, the light emitted from the LED 821 is emitted from the entire surface of the cover member 830 to the front side of the game machine.

Next, the regulation unit 2490 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 to 50. The same parts as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, the overall configuration of the regulatory unit 2490 will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. FIG. 48 is an exploded front perspective view of the regulation unit 2490 according to the second embodiment. 49 (a) is a side view of the regulation unit 2490, FIG. 49 (b) is a rear view of the regulation unit 2490, and FIG. 49 (c) is the XLIXc-XLIXc line of FIG. 49 (b). It is sectional drawing of the regulation unit 2490.

As shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, in the regulation unit 2490 according to the second embodiment, the roller member 492 is pivotally supported by the rotating member 2494, and the position of the roller member 492 can be adjusted by rotating the rotating member 2494. To.

The regulation unit 2490 is formed between the case member 2491 formed in a box shape, the outer edge member 2493 arranged on the outer edge portion of the case member 2491 on the opening side, and the case member 2491 and the outer edge member 2493 facing each other. It is mainly provided with a rotating member 2494 that is sandwiched and rotatably supported, and a roller member 492 that is pivotally supported by the rotating member 2494.

The case member 2491 is formed in a box shape with an opening on the back surface side, and has a larger width dimension in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 49B) than the case member 491 in the first embodiment. Further, the case member 2491 is mainly provided with a projecting portion 491a projecting from a side surface on the front side and a notch portion 2491b notched on both side surfaces in the left-right direction in a semicircular shape.

The notch 2491b is formed by being cut out in a semicircular shape at a substantially central position in the vertical direction (FIG. 49 (b) horizontal direction) and the vertical direction (vertical direction of FIG. 49 (b)) of both side surfaces of the case member 2491. To. The notch 2491b is a notch for rotatably supporting the shaft portion 2494b of the rotating member 2494 described later, and the inner diameter thereof is set to be larger than the outer diameter of the rotating member 2494.

The outer edge member 2493 is a member formed in a vertically long rectangular frame-shaped body in front view and arranged on the back surface side (open side) of the case member 2491. The outer edge member 2493 is formed so that the inner shape thereof is substantially the same as the opening of the case member 2491. Further, on the side surface of the outer edge member 2493 on the front side (case member 491 side), an upright portion 2493a standing on the front side is formed around the inner edge portion.

The upright portion 2493a is formed with a recessed portion 2493a1 recessed on the back surface side. The recessed portion 2493a1 is formed at a position facing the notch portion 2491b of the case member 2492. Therefore, by sandwiching the rotating member 2494, which will be described later, between the notch portion 2491b of the case member 2491 and the recessed portion 2493a1 facing each other, the rotating member 2494 can be arranged on the case member 2491 in a rotatable state.

The rotating member 2494 is formed from a plate-like body having an oval shape in a side view, and the longitudinal dimension is set to be smaller than the vertical dimension of the inner portion of the case member 2491. The rotating member 2494 has a shaft portion 2494b that projects in a cylindrical shape outward in the left-right direction with respect to the case member 2491 in the central portion in the longitudinal direction, and a shaft support hole 2494a that is formed through both sides of the shaft portion 2494b. A regulating portion 2494c that bulges outward in the radial direction from a protruding tip portion of the portion 2494b is provided.

The shaft portion 2494b is projected longer than the plate thickness of the case member 2491 formed in the box shape, and a regulating portion 2494c that bulges in the radial direction is formed at the protruding tip portion. As a result, the rotating member 2494 can be rotated with respect to the case member 2491 by fitting the shaft portion 2494b into the notch portion 2491b of the case member 2491 and disposing the recessed portion 2493a1 of the outer edge member 2493 from the back surface side. The rotating member 2494 can be restricted from being displaced in the left-right direction with respect to the case member 2491 by the regulating portion 2494c.

The shaft support hole 2494a is an opening through which the shaft portion 492b of the roller member 492 is inserted, and is opened in a circular shape, and its inner diameter is formed larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 492b. As a result, the roller member 492 can be rotated by inserting the shaft portion 492b of the roller member 492 with the retaining ring E1 removed into the shaft support hole 2494a and then fitting the retaining ring E1 to the shaft portion 492b. Can be arranged on the rotating member 2494.

The regulation unit 2490 configured as described above is assembled as follows.

First, the shaft portion 492b of the roller member 492 is inserted into the shaft support hole 2494a of the rotating member 2494 arranged in pairs, and the roller member 492 is pivotally supported by the rotating member 2494. As a result, two roller members 492 can be arranged side by side between the rotating members 2494 arranged in pairs.

Next, a torsion spring (not shown) is arranged on the shaft portion 2494b of the rotating member 2494, and after being fitted in the notch portion 2491b of the case member 2491, the outer edge member 2493 is disposed from the back side to rotate. The member 2494 can be rotatably arranged around the shaft portion 2494b with respect to the case member 2491. As a result, the position of the roller member 492 arranged on the rotating member 2494 can be displaced by rotationally displacing the rotating member 2494. Further, a state in which the roller member 492 arranged on the upper side of the roller member 492 arranged vertically is urged on the front side (left side in FIG. 49C) by the torsion spring arranged on the shaft portion 2494b. Can be.

Next, with reference to FIG. 50, a contact mode between the decorative member 450 and the regulation unit 2490 when the decorative member 450 is displaced from the second position to the first position will be described. (A) to (c) of FIG. 50 are cross-sectional views of the vertical displacement unit 400. Note that FIG. 50 (a) corresponds to FIG. 24 (a), FIG. 50 corresponds to FIG. 24 (b), and FIG. 21 (c) corresponds to FIG. 18 (c).

As shown in FIG. 50A, when the decorative member 450 is located above the regulation unit 2490, the rotating member 2494 is provided by a torsion spring (not shown) arranged on the shaft portion 2494b of the rotating member 2494. Is rotated, and the roller member 492 arranged above the roller member 492 arranged below is positioned on the front side.

As a result, the decorative member 450 is displaced downward from the state shown in FIG. 21 (a), and the lower end surface of the decorative member 450 shown in FIG. 50 (b) is substantially the same as the substantially intermediate position in the vertical direction of the case member 2491. When the roller 492a of the roller member 492 arranged on the upper side comes into contact with the decorative member 450 and suppresses the decorative member 450 when displaced in the vertical position of the above, the pressure is higher than that of the regulation unit 2490 of the first embodiment. Can be made smaller. In this case, the rotating member 2494 is in contact with a protrusion (not shown) formed inside the case member 2491, and the roller member 492 arranged on the upper side is not displaced to the front side (rotating member 2494). The upper side is not rotationally displaced to the front side).

Therefore, from the state shown in FIG. 21 (b), when the decorative member 450 is further displaced downward and displaced to the first position shown in FIG. 50 (c), a driving force is applied to the decorative member 450. It is possible to suppress an increase in energy consumption of the drive motor 441.

Further, when the decorative member 450 shown in FIG. 50 (c) is displaced to the first position, the roller 492a arranged on the lower side comes into contact with the decorative member 450. As a result, the lower roller member 492 is pressed toward the back side and displaced toward the back side, and the upper roller 492a is displaced toward the front side. As a result, the pressing force on the decorative member 450 of the roller 492a arranged on the upper side can be increased. As a result, when the decorative member 450 is arranged at the first position, the decorative member 450 can be firmly held by the pressing force of the roller members 492 arranged vertically. On the other hand, when the decorative member 450 is positioned in the middle of displacement, the pressing force acting on the decorative member 450 can be reduced so that the decorative member 450 is easily displaced. That is, the pressing force applied to the decorative member 450 from the regulation unit 2490 can be changed according to the displacement of the decorative member 450.

Next, the sorting device 700 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 to 53. The same parts as those in each of the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, the overall configuration of the sorting device 3700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 to 53. FIG. 51 is an exploded front perspective view of the sorting device 3700 according to the third embodiment. FIG. 52 is a partially enlarged front view of the sorting device 3700. FIG. 53 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device 3700 on the line LIIIa-LIIIa of FIG. 52, and FIG. 53 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device 3700 on the line LIIIb-LIIIb of FIG. 52 (b). ..

As shown in FIGS. 51 to 53, in the sorting device 3700 according to the third embodiment, the opening of the second winning opening 640 is connected to the sorting device 3700.

The distribution device 3700 is arranged below the center frame 600 of the game board 13, and is arranged on the front side forming portion 3710 arranged on the front side with respect to the base plate 60 and on the back side with respect to the base plate 60. It is mainly provided with a front side forming portion 3710 to be formed.

The front side forming portion 3710 is formed mainly including a winning member 3730 attached to the base plate 60 and a bending member 3740 arranged on the front side of the winning member 3730.

The back surface side forming portion 3720 is located below the intermediate member 3750 attached to the base plate 60, the distribution member 760 arranged on the back surface side of the intermediate member 3750, and the intermediate member 760. It is mainly provided with a second throwing path 3770 arranged on the back side of the 3750.

The winning member 3730 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in the front view, and has the above-mentioned first winning opening 64 at the upper center in the left-right direction, the first electric accessory 640a under the first winning opening 64, and the first electric. A through hole 731 formed through the accessory 640a in the front-rear direction on both sides in the left-right direction, a second through hole 3733 formed through the through hole 731 in the front-rear direction, and below the second through hole 3733. It is mainly provided with a lower insertion hole 732 that is formed through in the front-rear direction.

The second through hole 3733 is an opening through which the sphere passes, and is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in front view, which opens slightly larger than the outer diameter of the sphere. Further, the second through hole 3733 is formed at a position below the second winning opening 640, and a second projecting wall 3733a is formed on the lower surface, which is visible from the back side to the front side and projects upward. ..

The second protruding wall 3733a is symmetrically arranged with two center lines in the left-right direction of the second through hole 3733 in the front view, and the protruding distance is set to be smaller from the back side to the front side. Therefore, when the ball passes through the inside of the second through hole 3733 by the interposing member 3750 and the second throwing path described later, the ball can be guided to the center position in the left-right direction of the two second projecting walls 3733a. , Can be rolled from the back side to the front side.

The bending member 3740 is a member arranged on the front side of the through hole 731, the second through hole 3733, and the lower insertion hole 732 of the above-mentioned winning member 3730, and is provided on both the left and right sides of the above-mentioned second winning opening 640. It is arranged so that the pair of outer shapes are symmetrically formed.

The bending member 3740 is formed of a plate-like body having a substantially rectangular shape in front view, and has an upper protruding portion 741 protruding from the back surface side thereof, an intermediate protruding portion 3745 protruding from below the upper protruding portion 741, and an intermediate protruding portion thereof. It is formed with a lower protrusion 743 that protrudes from below the 3745.

The intermediate projecting portion 3745 is a wall portion formed long in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 53B) in the rear view, and is formed at positions on both the left and right sides of the second through hole 3733, and the upper side surface thereof is the first. 2 The through hole 3733 is formed at substantially the same height as the intermediate position in the vertical direction. On the other hand, the lower side surface of the intermediate protrusion 3745 is formed so as to be located below the bottom surface of the second through hole 3733.

Further, a second opening 3746 having a predetermined gap is formed between the intermediate protrusion 3745 and the upper protrusion 741. On the other hand, an opening 744 having a predetermined gap is formed between the intermediate protrusion 3745 and the lower protrusion 743.

The second opening 3746 opens in a substantially U shape that opens on the back side in a side view, and its inner shape is formed larger than the outer shape of the sphere. That is, the second opening 3746 is set to a size that allows the ball to pass through. A detailed description of the second opening 3746 will be described later.

The second throwing path 3770 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in front view, and the front side is opened to form a substantially box shape having a constant thickness. The second throwing path 3770 is a throwing path for throwing a ball entering the inside of the second winning opening 640 into the second through hole 3733 of the winning member 3730, and is arranged on the back side of the intermediate member 3750. , A throwing path for throwing a ball can be formed between the inside of the second throwing path 3770 and the interposition member 3750.

Further, the second throwing path 3770 is arranged so that the left end portion is located on the back side of the second winning opening 640 of the winning member 3730 in the front view, and the right end portion is the second through hole of the winning member 3730. It is located on the back side of the 3733. That is, the second throwing path 3770 is arranged on the intermediate member 3750 so that the left end portion in the front view is located above the right end portion and is tilted downward toward the right end portion.

Further, in the second throwing path 3770, the left end portion in the front view is connected to the second winning opening 640, and the right end portion is connected to the second connecting hole 3753 of the intermediate member 3750. As a result, the ball that has entered the inside of the second winning opening 640 is thrown into the inside of the second throwing path 3770, and then rolls inside the second throwing path 3770 from the left end to the right end. The ball is thrown into the second connecting hole 3753 of the setting member 3750.

The interposition member 3750 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in the front view, and the above-mentioned variable winning device 65 at the lower center in the left-right direction and a communication hole 751 located on both the left and right sides of the variable winning device 65 and formed through in the front-rear direction. The second connecting hole 3753, which is located below the communication hole 751 and is formed through the recovery hole 752 in the front-rear direction, and is located between the communication hole 751 and the recovery hole 752 on the right side and is formed through the communication hole 751 in the front-rear direction. And are formed with.

The second connecting hole 3753 is formed through the second through hole 3753 in a substantially rectangular shape in front view, the inner shape thereof is set larger than the outer shape of the sphere, and the second connecting hole 3753 is formed at a position on the back side of the second through hole 3733 of the winning member 730. .. As a result, the ball that is rolled inside the second throwing path 3770 described above passes through the inside of the second connecting hole 3753 and is thrown into the second through hole 3733 of the intermediate member 750.

The sorting device 3700 configured as described above is thrown as follows. The balls entering from the first winning opening 64 are thrown to the sorting member 760, and are alternately thrown to the inclined surface 761 in either the left-right direction by the seesaw member 762 of the sorting member 760. When the ball rolling on the inclined surface 761 is thrown to the end of the inclined surface 761, it passes through the inside of the communication hole 751 of the intermediate member 3750 arranged on the front side and becomes the back side of the bending member 740. The ball is thrown. The ball thrown to the back side of the bending members 740 and 3740 is guided along the protruding tip surface of the guide portion 742 of the bending members 740 and 3740 and falls downward, and the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 3730 After passing through the inside and passing through the inside of the sensor SE, the ball is thrown into the recovery hole 752 of the intermediate member 3750.

The ball entering from the second winning opening 640 is thrown into the second throwing path 3770, and is thrown inside the second throwing path 3770 from the left end to the right end. The ball thrown to the right end of the second throwing path 3770 has passed through the inside of the second connecting hole 3753 of the interposition member 3750 arranged on the front side and passed through the second through hole 3733 of the winning member 3730. Later, it is guided along the protruding tip surface of the guide portion 742 of the bending member 3740 and falls downward, and after passing through the inside of the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 3730 and passing through the inside of the sensor SE, it is inserted. The ball is thrown into the recovery hole 752 of the setting member 3750.

Therefore, in the sorting device 3700, the ball entering from the second winning opening 640 can be detected by the sensor SE arranged on the right side of the front view of the winning member 3730, so that the ball is newly added to the throwing passage from the second winning opening 640. It is not necessary to dispose the sensor SE. That is, since the sensor SE that detects the ball entering from the first winning opening 64 can also serve as the sensor SE that detects the ball entering the second winning opening 640, the cost of the product can be suppressed accordingly. it can.

Next, the second opening 3746 of the bending member 3740 will be described with reference to FIG. 54. (A) and (b) of FIG. 54 are cross-sectional views of the sorting device 3700. Note that FIG. 54 (a) corresponds to FIG. 53 (a), and FIG. 54 (b) corresponds to FIG. 53 (b).

As shown in FIG. 54, a ball enters and is thrown from the first winning opening 64 and is thrown to the back side of the bending member 3740, and a ball is entered and thrown from the second winning opening 640 and is thrown into the bending member 3740. If the balls thrown to the back side are thrown to the back side of the bending member 3740 at substantially the same timing, the balls on the back side of the bending member 740 may come into contact with each other and the balls may be clogged.

That is, a ball thrown from the second winning opening 640 and thrown from the second through hole 3733 of the winning member 3730 to the bending member 3740 (hereinafter, referred to as a "lower ball") is sent from the first winning opening 64. The ball is thrown, is thrown from the through hole 731 of the winning member 3730 to the back side of the bending member 3740, collides with a ball falling from the upper side to the lower side of the bending member 3740 (hereinafter referred to as "upper ball"), and at the same time. , If it gets caught in the front end of the second through hole 3733, it may become immobile and the ball may be clogged.

On the other hand, in the third embodiment, since the second opening 3746 is formed in the bending member 3740, the upper sphere is discharged from the second opening 3746 or escaped between the opposites of the second opening 3746 to allow the lower sphere to escape. It is possible to eliminate the equilibrium state between the ball and the ball on the upper side and prevent the ball from being clogged in the throwing path of the bending member 3740.

That is, when the upper sphere rides on the lower sphere and the balanced state is formed, the second opening 3746 is formed on the side surface in the left-right direction in which the upper sphere is located, and the upper spheres are mutually formed. Since the spherical shape leans on either the left or right side, the upper sphere is sent to the inside of the second opening 3744 on either the left or right side. As a result, it is possible to eliminate the equilibrium between the lower sphere and the upper sphere. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball from being clogged in the throwing path of the bending member 3740.

Next, the sorting device 4700 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 55. The same parts as those in each of the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 55 (a) is a front view of the sorting device 4700 according to the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 55 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device 4700 in the LVb-LVb line of FIG. 55 (a). (C) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device 4700 in the LVc-LVc line of FIG. 55 (b). In addition, in FIGS. 55 (a) to 55 (c), the passage path through which the sphere passes is schematically illustrated by a broken line.

As shown in FIGS. 55 (a) to 55 (c), the sorting device 4700 according to the fourth embodiment has a winning opening in the lateral direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 55 (a)) of the opening 744 of the bending member 740. 4063 is arranged.

The winning opening 4063 is an opening through which a ball flowing down the game area can pass through, and is arranged on the front side of the game board 13. The winning opening 4063 is connected to the third connecting hole 4752a of the interposing member 4750 whose back side is described later, and the ball entering the inside of the winning opening 4063 is guided to the third communication hole 54752a.

The recovery hole 752 of the intermediate member 4750 is formed by bending downward at the tip of the second throwing path KR2, and a path through which the ball passes and is thrown downward (sixth throwing path KR6) is formed. To. That is, the sixth throwing path KR6 and the second throwing path KR2 are connected.

A third connecting hole 4752a projecting from both the left and right sides is formed in the sixth throwing path KR6, and a sensor SE for detecting the passage of a ball is arranged in a lower portion of the third connecting hole 4752a.

The third connecting hole 4752a is connected to the open portion on the back side of the winning opening 4063. As a result, the ball that has entered the winning opening 4063 is thrown into the inside of the third connecting hole 4752a and is thrown into the sixth throwing path.

Further, on the passage of the third connecting hole 4752a, a sensor SE2 different from the sensor SE arranged in the sixth throwing path KR6 is arranged. As a result, it is possible to detect a sphere that has entered the inside of the third connecting hole 4752a.

As a result, the ball discharged from the opening 744 of the bending member 740 can be made to win a prize in the winning opening 4063. That is, not only the ball guided by the bending member 740 passes through the sensor SE, but also the ball flows out from the opening 744 to the game area, and the outflowing ball enters the winning opening 4063 and presses the sensor SE2. It is possible to form a passing form and add interest to the game.

The winning opening 4063 may be arranged at a position where all the balls flowing out from the opening 744 into the game area can be received, or a part of the winning opening 4063 may be arranged depending on the state of the balls flowing out from the opening 744 into the game area. The spheres may be accepted and some spheres may be arranged in an unacceptable position.

Further, since the opening 744 is formed at the connecting portion between the first throwing passage KR1 and the second throwing passage KR2, the first throwing path KR1 is formed by ejecting a ball that is likely to cause ball clogging from the opening to the game area. It is possible to prevent the ball from being clogged in the connecting portion between the ball and the second throwing path KR2.

Further, since the bending member 740 in which the winning opening 4063 and the opening 744 are formed is arranged on the front side of the game board 13, the player can visually recognize the mode in which the ball is paid out from the opening 744 and enters the winning opening 4063. It can be done, and it can be easily given to the player as a hobby.

Since the third connecting hole 4752a is connected above the sensor SE arranged in the sixth throwing path KR6, the ball entering from the winning opening 4063 only passes through the sensor SE2 arranged in the third connecting hole 4752a. It passes through the sensor SE arranged in the sixth throwing path KR6. Therefore, since the ball entering from the winning opening 4063 can pass the sensor of 2, the player can be given a hobby.

Further, since the balls thrown to the bending member 740 are distributed to the left and right for each ball by the seesaw member 762 of the sorting member 760, the balls are continuous at the connecting portion between the first throwing path KR1 and the second throwing path KR2. It is possible to prevent the ball from being thrown. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball from being clogged in the connecting portion between the first throwing path KR1 and the second throwing path KR2.

Next, the vertical displacement unit 5400 of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 to 60. In the first embodiment, the case where the rotation of the rotating unit 5500 is regulated by the roller 481 of the rotation regulating member 480 has been described, but in the fifth embodiment, the rotation of the rotating unit 5500 is regulated by the displacement member 5430. Will be. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Further, in the first embodiment, the state in which the decorative member 450 of the vertical displacement unit 400 is arranged in the ascending position is the second position, and the state in which the decorative member 450 of the vertical displacement unit 400 is arranged in the descending position is the first. Although described as a position, in the fifth embodiment, a state in which the decorative member 5450 is further arranged from the second position to the ascending position will be described as the third position.

In the fifth embodiment, when the decorative member 5450 is arranged at the first position, the decorative member 5450 is arranged at the central opening portion of the center frame 600 in the front view as in the first embodiment, and the rotating unit The effect of rotating 5500 is performed. Further, in the state where the decorative member 5450 is arranged at the second position, the decorative member 5450 is above the central opening of the center frame 600 (in the direction of arrow U) and is on the back side of the game board 13 (see FIG. 2). Be placed. In this case, the rotation of the rotating unit 5500 is regulated by the displacement member 5430 described later. That is, the second position is the retracted position of the decorative member 5450 as in the first embodiment.

Further, in the state where the decorative member 5450 is arranged at the third position, the rotating unit 5500 arranged in the decorative member 5450 is viewed from the front through an opening portion (not shown) penetrating above the center frame 600 of the game board 13. It is configured to be visible in. As a result, the rotation unit 5500 can be rotated at the third position so that the player can visually recognize the effect.

First, the overall configuration of the vertical displacement unit 5400 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 and 58. 57 (a) and 57 (b) are front views of the vertical displacement unit 5400 according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 58 is an exploded perspective front view of the vertical displacement unit 5400. Note that FIG. 57B shows a state in which the front cover 5460 is transparently viewed.

In the following description, the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. 1 will be described with the front side of the paper surface as the front (front) side and the back side of the paper surface as the rear (rear) side. Further, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. 1, the upper side is the upper (upper) side, the lower side is the lower (lower) side, the right side is the right (right) side, and the left side is the left side (left). ) Side will be explained respectively. Further, the arrows UD, LR, and FB in the figure indicate the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, and the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the following drawings, the configuration of the vertical displacement unit is schematically illustrated.

Further, in the following description, unless otherwise specified, the state in which the decorative member 5450 of the vertical displacement unit 5400 is arranged at the third position is such that the longitudinal direction of the rotating unit 5500 is the horizontal direction (arrow LR direction). A state in which they are arranged in parallel (referred to as an initial position of the rotating unit 5500 in the following description) will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 57 and 58, the vertical displacement unit 5400 according to the fifth embodiment is superposed on the front base 5410 formed in a box shape and the front side (arrow F direction side) of the front base 5410. The front cover 5460, the drive motor 441 arranged on the back side of the front base 5410, and the front base 5410 and the front cover 5460 are axially supported and arranged, and are rotated by the driving force of the drive motor 441. The displacement member 5430, the decorative member 5450 that is connected to one side of the displacement member 5430 and displaced in the vertical direction (in the direction of arrow UD) with the rotation of the displacement member 5430, and the decorative member 5450. In addition, a guide rod P1 disposed between the front base 5410 and the front cover 5460 facing each other is mainly provided.

In the vertical displacement unit 5400 according to the fifth embodiment, all the members except the decorative member 5450 are symmetrically arranged in a pair as in the first embodiment, and the decorative member 5450 is interposed between the pair of opposing members. Will be done. Further, the detailed description of the members arranged in a pair describes only the members arranged on the left side in the front view (arrow L direction side), and the members arranged on the right side in the front view (arrow R direction side). The same reference numerals as those for the members on the left side of the front view will be given and the description thereof will be omitted.

The front base 5410 is a pair of a first piece 5410X extending in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) and a pair of the first piece 5410X arranged in the horizontal direction from a substantially intermediate position in the vertical direction of the first piece 5410X. A second piece 5410Y that bulges outward in the opposite direction of the above.

The first piece 5410X has an upper concave groove 413 recessed in an arc shape on the upper end side, a lower concave groove 414 recessed in an arc shape on the lower end side, and a far side (arrow L) from the rotating unit 5500. It mainly includes an upright portion 5412 that is erected on the front cover 5460 side (arrow F direction side) along the edge portion (direction).

The upper concave groove 413 and the lower concave groove 414 are grooves for arranging the guide rod P1 on the inner edge thereof, and are recessed in a semicircular shape having an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the guide rod P1. Further, in the upper concave groove 413 and the lower concave groove 414, the axes of the portions recessed in a semicircular arc shape are formed coaxially, and the upper end portion of the upper concave groove 413 to the lower end portion of the lower concave groove 414 are formed coaxially. The distance between the facing portions is set smaller than the axial dimension of the guide rod P1. Thereby, both ends of the guide rod P1 can be arranged at the inner edges of the upper concave groove 413 and the lower concave groove 414.

The upright portion 5412 is arranged in contact with the front cover 5460 arranged on the front side. As a result, a space can be formed between the front base 5410 and the front cover 5460 facing each other, and the space can be communicated with the external space from the side surface on the rotating unit 5500 side. As a result, the decorative member 5450 can be arranged between the front base 5410 and the front cover 5460, and the decorative member 5450 can be slid and displaced in the vertical direction.

Further, the upright portion 5412 includes a cutout portion 5412a that is partially recessed at a substantially intermediate position in the vertical direction of the first piece 5410X extending in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction), and the cutout portion 5412a is provided. A second piece 5410Y is formed along the bottom surface of the notch.

The second piece 5410Y is formed by being connected to the notch portion 5412a of the first piece 5410X as described above, and is formed so as to bulge in a semicircular shape in the front view in the direction away from the rotating unit 5500 (arrow L direction). .. Further, the second piece 5410Y mainly includes an opening 5411 that opens in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) and a shaft support portion 5416 that projects in a columnar shape on the front side. The upright portion 5412 of the first piece 5410X is erected along the front edge of the second piece 5410Y.

The opening 5411 has a rotation shaft of the drive motor 441 attached to the back side (arrow B direction side) of the front base 5410 and a transmission gear 442 fitted to the rotation shaft on the front side (arrow F direction) of the front base 5410. It is an opening for inserting into the side), and the inner diameter is set to be larger than the outer diameter of the transmission gear 442 fitted to the rotating shaft of the drive motor 441. As a result, when the drive motor 441 fails due to aged deterioration or the like, the drive motor 441 can be removed from the opening 5411 with the transmission gear 442 attached. Therefore, after the transmission gear 442 is fitted to the rotating shaft of the new drive motor 441 that has been replaced, the transmission gear 442 can be inserted through the opening 5411 to dispose the drive motor 441 in the front base 5410. As a result, the drive motor 441 can be easily arranged on the front base 5410 as compared with the case where only the drive motor 441 is removed when the drive motor 441 is replaced. Further, in this case, since the shaft hole of the transmission gear 442 can be reliably fitted to the rotating shaft of the drive motor 441, the reliability of the product when the parts are replaced can be improved.

The shaft support portion 5416 is a cylindrical rod member made of a metal material, and its end portion is fitted to the front side of the front base 5410 with its axial direction directed in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). Further, a hole into which a screw can be screwed is formed at an end portion on the front side of the shaft support portion 5416. As a result, after inserting the shaft support portion 5146 into the shaft hole of the transmission gear 443, a screw whose head is larger than the inner diameter of the shaft hole of the transmission gear 443 is screwed into the shaft support portion 5416 to make the transmission gear 443 a front base. It can be arranged in a state where it cannot be dropped from 5410.

The front cover 5460 is formed so that the outer shape in the front view is substantially the same as the front base 5410 arranged on the back side. The front cover 5460 has a shaft support portion 5464 protruding from the surface facing the front base 5410 toward the front base 5410 side, and the front base 5410 from the facing portions of the upper concave groove 413 and the lower concave groove 414 to the front base 5410 side. It includes a projecting upper groove forming member 462 and a lower groove forming member 463.

The shaft support portion 5464 is a columnar rod member made of a metal material, and its end portion is fitted to the back surface side of the front cover 5460 with its axial direction directed in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). Further, a hole into which a screw can be screwed is formed at an end portion on the back surface side of the shaft support portion 5464. As a result, after inserting the shaft support portion 5464 into the through hole 433 of the displacement member 5430, which will be described later, a screw whose head is larger than the inner diameter of the through hole 433 of the displacement member 5430 is screwed into the shaft support portion 5464 to cause the displacement member. The 5430 can be arranged on the front cover 5460 in a non-removable state.

The displacement member 5430 has a drive-side sliding groove 431 formed in a rectangular shape having a long one side in the front view and a long hole long in the longitudinal direction of the displacement member 5430 on the other side in the longitudinal direction, and one side in the longitudinal direction. Mainly includes a connecting shaft 5435 protruding toward the decorative member 5450 side, and a through hole 433 located between the connecting shaft 5435 and the driving side sliding groove 431 and penetrating in the front-rear direction.

The through hole 433 is a hole pivotally supported by the shaft support portion 5464 of the front cover 5460 as described above, and is formed in a portion of the displacement member 5430 disposed between the front base 5410 and the front cover 5460. .. Further, the distance dimension from the center of the through hole 433 to the end portion on the other side in the longitudinal direction (driving side sliding groove 431 side) is formed from the shaft support portion 5464 of the front cover 5460 to the second piece 5410Y of the front base 5410. The value is set to be smaller than the distance dimension to the side surface of the vertical portion 5412 on the shaft support portion 5464 side. As a result, when the displacement member 5430 is rotated around the shaft support portion 5464, it is possible to prevent the end portion of the displacement member 5430 from coming into contact with the upright portion 5412.

The connecting shaft 5435 is inserted into the sliding groove 5452j of the decorative member 5450 described later. As a result, the decorative member 5450 can be driven along the axial direction (arrow UD direction) of the guide rod P1 in accordance with the rotational displacement of the displacement member 5430.

The decorative member 5450 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in the front view, forms a front base 5452 in the central portion in the longitudinal direction, sliding portions 451 connected to both ends in the left-right direction of the front base 5452, and the back surface of the front base 5452. Mainly includes a back surface base 453 (not shown) for lining the surface, and a rotating unit 5500 rotatably arranged on the front side of the front base 5452.

Like the front base 452 in the first embodiment, the front base 5452 is formed from a horizontally long rectangular plate-like body in front view, and the upper and lower ends are formed in a U-shaped cross section in which both upper and lower ends are bent toward the back side. The front base 5452 includes a sliding groove 5452j formed in a long hole long in the longitudinal direction of the decorative member 5450, and a rotating unit 5500 is arranged in a rotatable state at a substantially intermediate position in the longitudinal direction of the decorative member 5450.

The sliding groove 5452j is a portion into which the connecting shaft 5435 of the displacement member 5430 is inserted as described above, and when the displacement member 5430 is rotationally displaced about the through hole 433, the connecting shaft 5435 becomes the sliding groove 5452j. The decorative member 5450 is displaced by sliding inside.

The rotating unit 5500 is arranged below the upper surface base 5510 forming the upper side surface of the rotating unit 5500, the irradiation unit 530 (see FIG. 28) arranged below the upper surface base 5510, and the irradiation unit 530. An intermediate member 5540 to be installed, a reflector 560 (see FIG. 28) arranged below the intermediate member 540, a front cover 550 (see FIG. 28) arranged in front of the reflector 560, and an upper surface. A rotation transmission unit 570 (see FIG. 28) arranged on the back surface side of the base 510 and the lower surface base 5520, and a lower surface base 5520 forming a lower side surface of the rotation unit 5500 are mainly provided. ..

Further, the rotating unit 5500 is configured in a rectangular shape having one long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and recesses 5514 rotate at both ends of the rotating unit 5500 of the upper surface base 5510, the intermediate member 5540 and the lower surface base 5520 forming the outer surface. It is recessed inward in the longitudinal direction of the unit 5500.

The rotation unit 5500 is configured as a versa writer that produces an effect based on the afterimage of the light emitted from the irradiation unit 530, as in the first embodiment, and is configured as a rotation transmission unit 570 as in the first embodiment. The back base 571 is rotationally displaced about the center of the gear 571a1. Further, in FIGS. 57 to 62, the rotation axis of the rotation unit 5500 is illustrated with the reference numeral of the rotation axis O.

Further, the center of gravity of the rotating unit 5500 is set on the rotation axis O, and is in a posture in which the longitudinal direction of the rotating unit 5500 is horizontal (the posture shown in FIGS. 57A and 57B). In this case, the rotation unit 5500 is prevented from rotating about the rotation axis O due to its own weight.

The recess 5514 can accommodate one end of the displacement member 5430 inside when the decorative member 5450 is placed in the second position. As a result, the rotation of the rotating unit 5500 is restricted. A detailed description of the regulation of rotation of the rotating unit 5500 will be described later.

Next, a displacement mode of the decorative member 5450 will be described with reference to FIG. 59. FIG. 59 (a) is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 5400 when the decorative member 5450 is arranged at the third position, and FIG. 59 (b) is a state where the decorative member 5450 is arranged at the second position. It is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 5400, and FIG. 59 (c) is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 5400 in a state where the decorative member 5450 is arranged at the first position. Further, in FIG. 59 (a) or FIG. 59 (c), the front cover 5460 is shown in a transparent state.

As shown in FIG. 59A, when the decorative member 5450 is arranged at the third position, the other end of the displacement member 5430 (driving side sliding hole 431 side) is below the through hole 433. (Arrow D direction), the end of one side (connecting shaft 5435 side) of the displacement member 5430 is arranged above the through hole 433 (arrow U direction), and the longitudinal direction of the displacement member 5430 is the horizontal direction. It is in an inclined state with respect to (arrow LR direction).

In this case, the virtual line KS1 (see FIG. 59 (a)) connecting the rotation shaft of the transmission gear 443 (the center of the shaft support portion 5416) and the shaft of the protrusion 443a of the transmission gear 443 is the shaft of the through hole 433 of the displacement member 5430. It is in a state of being substantially orthogonal to the virtual line KS2 (see FIG. 59 (a)) connecting the shaft of the protrusion 443a of the transmission gear 443. As a result, it is possible to prevent the displacement member 5430 from rotating under the load of the decorative member 5450.

That is, since the decorative member 5450 is in a state of being supported by the connecting shaft 5435 of the displacement member 5430, the load of the decorative member 5450 acts on the rotating shaft of the displacement member 5430, and the displacement member 5430 loads the decorative member 5450. By arranging the virtual line KS1 and the virtual line KS2 in a state of being substantially orthogonal to each other so as to have a dead point relationship, the transmission gear 443 is prevented from rotating by the force acting from the displacement member 5430. be able to. As a result, it is possible to prevent the displacement member 5430 from rotating under the load of the decorative member 5450.

Next, a case where the decorative member 5450 is displaced from the third position shown in FIG. 59 (a) to the second position shown in FIG. 59 (b) will be described. The displacement of the decorative member 5450 from the third position to the second position is performed by driving the drive motor 441 (see FIG. 58) described above. When the decorative member 5450 is displaced to each position (from the first position to the third position), the rotating unit 5500 is in a state of being stopped at the initial position.

The drive motor 441 is fitted to the transmission gear 442 on the rotating shaft as described above. Further, the transmission gear 442 is meshed with the transmission gear 443. Therefore, when electric power is applied to the drive motor 441 to rotate the rotating shaft, the rotational drive is transmitted to the transmission gear 443 via the transmission gear 442. When the transmission gear 443 is rotated, the protrusion 443a of the transmission gear 443 slides inside the drive-side sliding groove 431 of the displacement member 5430 to rotate the displacement member 5430. In this case, the end of the displacement member 5430 on one side in the longitudinal direction (connecting shaft 5435 side) is displaced downward in the direction of gravity (side in the direction of arrow D).

In the present embodiment, the transmission gear 442 connected to the rotation shaft of the drive motor 441 is rotated in the left direction (opposite to the drive motor 441 arranged on the front base 5410 on the right side) in the front view. The end of the displacement member 5430 on the other side (connecting shaft 5435 side) in the longitudinal direction is displaced downward in the gravity direction (arrow D direction side).

As shown in FIG. 59 (b), when the displacement member 5430 is arranged at the second position, the longitudinal direction of the displacement member 5430 is substantially parallel to the longitudinal direction of the decorative member 5450. Further, in this case, the end portion of the displacement member 5430 on one side in the longitudinal direction (connecting shaft 5435 side) is arranged inside the recess 5514 of the rotation unit 5500, and the rotation region RY2 of the rotation unit 5500 (see FIG. 60). Placed inside. As a result, it is possible to regulate the rotation of the rotating unit 5500 when the displacement member 5430 is arranged at the second position.

Here, conventionally, the base member, the first displacement member displaceable with respect to the base member, the intermediate member interposed between the base member and the first displacement member, and the first displacement member are driven. A gaming machine including a first driving means for the first displacement member and a second displacement member displaceable with respect to the first displacement member is known. According to this conventional game machine, the first displacement member arranged at the upper part of the opening of the center frame (the upper part of the game machine) is moved to the central part of the opening of the center frame (the center of the game machine) by the first driving means. The second displacement member can be displaced.

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the first displacement member is arranged above the opening of the center frame, it is necessary to arrange the member that regulates the displacement of the second displacement member in the displacement region of the second displacement member. .. Therefore, there is a problem that the number of parts increases accordingly.

On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, when the decorative member 5450 is arranged at the second position, the rotation of the rotating unit 5500 can be regulated by the displacement member 5430 that displaces the decorative member 5450. That is, the displacement member 5430 can be used for both the role of displace the decorative member 5450 in the vertical direction and the role of restricting the rotation of the rotation unit 5500. As a result, it is not necessary to newly provide a member for restricting the rotation of the rotating unit 5500, so that the number of parts can be reduced accordingly.

Further, in order to regulate the rotation of the rotating rotating unit 5500, only by arranging the displacement member 5430 in the rotating region of the rotating unit 5500, one displacement member 5430 rotates in one direction of the rotating unit 5500 (displacement member 5430 It is possible to regulate the rotation in the arranged direction), but there is a problem that the rotation in the other direction cannot be regulated.

On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, since one end of the displacement member 5430 is inserted inside the recess 5514 of the rotating unit 5500, when the rotating unit 5500 rotates, the rotating unit 5500 is rotated in both directions. It can be regulated by the displacement member 5430.

In this case, since the rotation of the rotating unit 5500 is restricted, the rotating unit 5500 is input from the outside of the pachinko machine 10 when the power of the drive motor 457 (see FIG. 26) for driving the rotating unit 5500 is turned off. It is possible to suppress rotation due to vibration or the like. As a result, in a state where the rotation of the rotating unit 5500 is regulated by the displacement member 5430, the supply of electric power to the drive motor 457 that drives the rotating unit 5500 can be cut off, so that the energy consumption can be reduced accordingly. Can be done.

Further, when the decorative member 5450 is arranged at the second position, the distance L2 between the protrusion 443a sliding inside the drive-side sliding groove 431 of the displacement member 5430 and the rotation axis of the displacement member 5430 (FIG. 59 (FIG. 59). b)) is set to be larger than the separation distance L1 (see FIG. 59 (a)) between the protrusion 443a and the rotation axis of the displacement member 5430 when the decorative member 5450 is arranged at the third position. As a result, it is possible to prevent the transmission gear 443 from rotating when an external force is applied to one side end of the displacement member 5430.

The larger the separation distance L2 is set, the easier it is to prevent the transmission gear 443 from rotating when an external force acts on one end of the displacement member 5430, and the rotation shaft of the displacement member 5430 can be easily suppressed. It is preferable that the distance between the and the connecting shaft 5435 is set to be larger than the distance L3 (see FIG. 59 (b)).

Next, a case where the decorative member 5450 is displaced from the second position shown in FIG. 59 (b) to the first position shown in FIG. 59 (c) will be described. The displacement of the decorative member 5450 from the second position to the first position is performed by rotating the rotation axis of the drive motor 441 in the same manner as the displacement of the decorative member 5450 from the third position to the second position described above. When the drive motor 441 is rotated, the protrusion 443a of the transmission gear 443 slides inside the sliding groove 5452j of the displacement member 5430 to rotate the displacement member 5430.

As shown in FIG. 59 (c), when the decorative member 5450 is arranged at the first position, the other end of the displacement member 5430 (driving side sliding hole 431 side) is above the through hole 433. (Arrow U direction), one end of the displacement member 5430 (connecting shaft 5435 side) is arranged below the through hole 433 (arrow D direction). The displacement member 5430 is rotated about 90 degrees with respect to the displacement member 5430 in the state where the decorative member 5450 is arranged at the third position, and is inclined with respect to the horizontal direction (arrow LR direction). Be in a state.

In this case, the virtual line KS1 and the virtual line KS2 described above are substantially orthogonal to each other, as in the case where the decorative member 5450 is arranged at the third position. As a result, it is possible to prevent the displacement member 5430 from rotating due to an external force acting on the decorative member 5450.

That is, in the first position, since the rotating unit 5500 arranged on the decorative member 5450 is rotationally displaced, the inertial force due to the rotational drive of the rotating unit 5500 acts on the rotating shaft of the displacement member 5430 to cause displacement. Where the member 5430 is likely to be displaced by the inertial force generated by the rotational drive of the rotating unit 5500, the transmission gear 443 is displaced by arranging the virtual line KS1 and the virtual line KS2 in a substantially orthogonal state to form a dead point relationship. It can be prevented from rotating by the force acting from the member 5430. As a result, it is possible to prevent the displacement member 5430 from rotating due to an external force acting on the decorative member 5450.

Further, in the first position and the third position, the connecting shaft 5435 of the displacement member 5430 is located at the end of the sliding groove 5452j on the far side from the rotating unit 5500 (on the left side of the vertical displacement unit 5400 in the front view (arrow L direction side)). The disposed connecting shaft 5435 is in contact with the left end of the sliding groove 5452j). As described above, since the connecting shafts 5435 are arranged at both left and right ends of the vertical displacement unit 5400, the pair of sliding grooves 5452j formed at two locations sandwiching the rotating unit 5500 between the decorative members 5450. On the other hand, the connecting shaft 5435 can be brought into contact with the end portion on the far side from the rotating unit 5500, respectively. As a result, it is possible to prevent the decorative member 5450 from swinging in the left-right direction (longitudinal direction of the sliding groove 5452j (arrow LR direction)).

Here, as described above, at the first position or the third position, the effect of rotating the rotating unit 5500 is performed. Therefore, the inertial force due to the rotational drive of the rotating unit 5500 is transmitted to the decorative member 5450, and the decorative member 5450 swings in the left-right direction, which may make it difficult for the player to see the effect of the rotating unit 5500.

On the other hand, in the first position or the third position, the displacement of the decorative member 5450 in the left-right direction is caused by the connecting shaft 5435 of the pair of displacement members 5430 arranged inside the pair of sliding grooves 5452j of the decorative member 5450. Since it is regulated, it is possible to prevent the decorative member 5450 from swinging in the left-right direction due to the rotational drive of the rotating unit 5500. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the effect of the rotation drive of the rotation unit 5500 (in the present embodiment, the afterimage display of the light by the versa writer).

When the decorative member 5450 is displaced from the first position to the third position or from the third position to the first position via the second position, the rotating unit 5500 is not necessarily arranged at the initial position as shown in FIG. 59. No need to do. The rotating unit 5500 may be placed in the initial position only when the rotation of the rotating unit 5500 is restricted. For example, in the case of rotating the rotating unit 5500 at the first position and then rotating the rotating unit 5500 at the third position, the rotating unit 5500 is rotated about 90 degrees from the initial position at the first position. By displacementing the decorative member 5450 to the third position, it is possible to prevent the rotating unit 5500 from coming into contact with the displacement member 5430. As a result, it is not necessary to consider the displacement of the rotating unit 5500 when the displacement speed of the decorative member 5450 is increased, so that the displacement speed of the decorative member 5450 can be increased, and the rotation effect position by the rotating unit 5500 can be increased. It can be changed smoothly.

In this case, the displacement member 5430 is inside the rotation region RY2 of the rotation unit 5500 while causing the rotation unit 5500 to produce a rotation to a position before the displacement member 5430 is displaced inside the rotation region RY2 of the rotation unit 5500. When one side is arranged, the rotation of the rotating unit 5500 is stopped or the rotation is slowed down to displace the decorative member 5450 to prevent the rotating unit 5500 from colliding with the displacement member 5430. Further, after one side of the displacement member 5430 is displaced to the outside of the rotation region RY2, the rotation of the rotation unit 5500 is restarted or the normal rotation is performed to produce the rotation effect of the rotation unit 5500. The player can visually recognize the mode in which the decorative member 5450 is displaced while the rotation effect is continued. As a result, the effect area due to the rotation of the rotation unit 5500 can be expanded.

Next, with reference to FIG. 60, a state in which the decorative member 5450 is arranged at the second position and the rotation unit 5500 is restricted from rotating will be described in detail. FIG. 60 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 5400 in a state where the decorative member 5450 is arranged at the second position. In FIG. 60, the locus of the end portion in the longitudinal direction when the rotation unit 5500 is rotated is illustrated by a two-dot chain line with a reference numeral of the rotation region RY2. Further, in FIG. 60, a straight line in the horizontal direction orthogonal to the rotation axis O of the rotation unit 5500 is illustrated by a two-dot chain line with a reference numeral of the virtual line KS5. Further, in FIG. 60, the sliding groove 5452j and the connecting shaft 5435 are illustrated by chain lines.

As shown in FIG. 60, the width dimension L4 in the lateral direction of the rotating unit 5500 in the front view is set to be larger than the width dimension L5 in the lateral direction of the displacement member 5430. Further, one side end of the displacement member 5430 is formed in an arc shape centered on the center of the connecting shaft 5435 formed in a columnar shape. As a result, when the decorative member 5450 is displaced to the second position, one side of the displacement member 5430 can be easily arranged inside the recess 5514. A detailed description of the arrangement of one side of the displacement member 5430 inside the recess 5514 will be described later.

When the decorative member 5450 is arranged at the second position, the end portion on one side (connecting shaft 5435 side) of the displacement member 5430 is arranged inside the recess 5514 of the rotating unit 5500 arranged at the initial position. In this case, one end of the displacement member 5430 is brought into contact with the concave bottom surface of the recess 5514. That is, the distance dimension L6 between the concave bottom surfaces formed at both ends in the longitudinal direction of the rotating unit 5500 is set to be substantially the same as the distance between the one side ends of the pair of displacement members 5430 facing each other. As a result, when the stop position of the rotating unit 5500 is set to a position deviated from the initial position, one side end of the displacement member 5430 is brought into contact with the inner surface of the recess 5514 to displace the rotating unit 5500 to the initial position. be able to.

Further, in the recess 5514, the axis of the arc in the front view is set coaxially with the rotation axis of the displacement member 5430 in a state where the decorative member 5450 is arranged at the second position and the rotation unit 5500 is arranged at the initial position. As a result, when the displacement member 5430 rotates to displace the decorative member 5450 from the first position or the third position to the second position, the end of one side (connecting shaft 5435 side) of the displacement member 5430 is placed inside the recess 5514. When the displacement member 5430 is displaced from the second position to the first position or the third position, one side of the displacement member 5430 can be easily pulled out from the recess 5514 of the rotating unit 5500. Further, when the rotating unit 5500 rotates, its displacement can be easily regulated by the displacement member 5430.

More specifically, when the rotating unit 5500 is arranged at the initial position, the displacement locus at the end of one side (connecting shaft 5435 side) of the displacement member 5430 is formed at a position that does not come into contact with the outer shape of the rotating unit 5500. can do. As a result, when the displacement member 5430 is rotated, it is possible to prevent one side of the displacement member 5430 from coming into contact with the rotating unit 5500. Further, the area of the displacement member 5430 arranged in the displacement region of the recess 5514 can be increased. Therefore, when the rotating member 500 rotates with one side of the displacement member 5430 inserted inside the recess 5514, the rotating member 500 can be easily brought into contact with the displacement member 5430, and the rotational displacement of the rotating unit 5500 is regulated. It can be done easily.

In this case, one end of the displacement member 5430 (insertion portion into the recess 5514) is formed in a curved shape smaller than the arc shape of the recess 5514, as shown in FIG. 60. This makes it easier to insert the displacement member 5430 into the inner portion of the recess 5514.

Further, the displacement members 5430 are arranged on both sides of the rotating unit 5500 in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction), and when the decorative member 5450 is arranged at the second position, the left-right sides of the rotating unit 5500. One side of the displacement member 5430 is arranged inside the recess 5514. Therefore, when a driving force for rotation is applied to the rotating unit 5500 in a state where rotation is restricted due to poor control of the pachinko machine 10, the left and right displacement members 5430 are in opposite directions as the rotating unit 5500 rotates. Is rotated to. As described above, in the displacement member 5430, since the connecting shaft 5435 on one side is connected to the sliding groove 5452j of the front base 5452, the displacement member 5430 is displaced when the pair of displacement members 5430 are rotationally displaced in opposite directions. The rotation of the 5430 can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 61, a case where one side of the displacement member 5430 is extracted from the inside of the recess 5514 of the rotating unit 5500 will be described. FIG. 61 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 5400. Note that FIG. 61 shows a state in which the decorative member 5450 is slightly displaced from the second position to the third position and one end of the displacement member 5430 is pulled out from the inside of the rotating unit 5500.

As shown in FIG. 61, when the decorative member 5450 is slightly displaced from the second position to the third position and one side of the displacement member 5430 is arranged outside the rotation region RY2 of the rotation unit 5500, the rotation unit 5500 is moved. When rotating, it can be in a state where it does not come into contact with the displacement member 5430. That is, the rotation of the rotation unit 5500 is allowed.

Here, conventionally, a base member, a first displacement member that is displaced between a retracted position and a first position with respect to the base member, and a second displacement member that is displaced with respect to the first displacement member are provided. Amusement machines are known. According to this game machine, the first displacement member arranged at the retracted position can be displaced to the first position to displace the second displacement member.

However, in the conventional game machine described above, when the displacement of the second displacement member is stopped at the retracted position, the second displacement member may be displaced due to vibration or the like input from the outside of the game machine, and the second displacement member may be displaced. Displacement of the displacement member makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize other effects. Therefore, it is conceivable to arrange the second displacement member on the back side of the center frame at the retracted position to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the displacement of the second displacement member at the retracted position. There is a problem that the effect area due to the displacement of the second displacement member is reduced as the frame is enlarged.

Further, when the second displacement member is arranged at the retracted position, it is conceivable to bring a part of the center frame into contact with the second displacement member to regulate the displacement of the second displacement member. However, when allowing the displacement of the second displacement member, it is necessary to sufficiently separate the second displacement member from the center frame, and there is a problem that the effect area due to the displacement of the second displacement member is reduced accordingly. there were.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the displacement member 5430 is separated from the displacement member 5430 by the distance L7 (see FIG. 61) between the concave bottom surface of the recess 5514 and the rotation region RY2. Since the rotation can be allowed, the effect area due to the rotation of the rotation unit 5500 can be expanded.

Next, with reference to FIG. 62, a case where the rotation stop position of the rotation unit 5500 deviates from the initial position will be described. 62 (a) and 62 (b) are front views of the vertical displacement unit 5400.

As shown in FIG. 62, when the rotating unit 5500 is stopped at a position deviated from the initial position, the rotating unit 5500 is moved to the initial position by pressing the inside of the recess 5514 with one side end of the displacement member 5430. Can be placed in. Note that FIGS. 62 (a) to 62 (c) show a state in which the rotating unit 5500 is pressed and displaced by the displacement member 5430 in order from the state in which one side of the displacement member 5430 is in contact with the rotating unit 5500.

As described above, since one end of the rotating member is formed in an arc shape centered on the center of the connecting shaft 5435, the decorative member 5450 is displaced and the connecting shaft 5435 slides in the sliding groove 5452j. In this case, the end portion on the virtual line KS5 can be positioned on the rotating unit 5500 side. As a result, when both ends in the longitudinal direction (recessed portion 5514) of the rotating unit 5500 are arranged at positions that do not exceed the virtual line KS5, both ends in the longitudinal direction of the rotating unit 5500 are set to the rotational direction of the displacement of the rotating unit 5500. It can be brought into contact with the outer surface of the displacement member 5430 located on the opposite side. Therefore, when one side of the displacement member 5430 comes into contact with both ends of the rotating unit 5500 in the longitudinal direction, the rotating unit 5500 can be pushed out to the side opposite to the rotational direction of the misalignment. As a result, when the rotating unit 5500 is arranged at a position deviated from the initial position, it can be pushed back to the initial position of the rotating unit 5500 by the displacement member 5430.

Since one end of the displacement member 5430 abuts on the recesses 5514 formed at both ends in the longitudinal direction of the rotary unit 5500, the curvature of the recess 5514 is used to move the rotary unit 5500 in the direction opposite to the rotational direction of the displacement. Can be easily rotated in the direction of. That is, the rotating unit 5500 can be brought into contact with the displacement member 5430 to be easily displaced to the initial position.

Further, as a factor that the rotating unit 5500 stops at a position deviated from the initial position, when the rotating unit 5500 stops at the initial position, it is formed on the gear 456 (see FIG. 26) described in the first embodiment. Since the protrusions are placed between the detection sensors and then stopped, the cause is that they are slightly displaced in the direction of rotation and stopped, and both ends of the rotating unit 5500 in the longitudinal direction do not exceed the virtual line KS5. When it is positioned, the protrusion of the gear 456 is set to a size that is arranged between the detection sensors. As a result, it is possible to prevent the displacement members 5430 arranged on both sides of the rotating unit 5500 in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) from engaging with each other via the rotating unit 5500 to regulate the displacement of the displacement member 5430.

Further, when the stop position of the rotating unit 5500 is shifted so that both ends of the rotating unit 5500 exceed the virtual line KS5, the protrusion of the gear 456 comes out from between the detection sensors, so that the pachinko machine It is possible to make 10 recognize that the stop position of the rotating unit 5500 is deviated (position is deviated too much). In this case, by outputting a signal to rotate the rotating unit 5500 again from the pachinko machine 10 and causing the rotating unit 5500 to stop again, both ends of the rotating unit 5500 set the virtual line KS5 at the stop position of the rotating unit 5500. It can be placed in a position that does not exceed it.

Next, the vertical displacement unit 6400 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 63 and 64. In the fifth embodiment, the case where the rotation of the rotating unit 5500 is restricted by arranging the end of the displacement member 5430 on one side (connecting shaft 5435 side) inside the recess 5514 of the rotating unit 5500 has been described. In the sixth embodiment, the displacement member 6430 regulates the rotation of the gear that rotationally displaces the rotating unit 500. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the configuration of the vertical displacement unit 6400 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 63. FIG. 63 (a) is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 6400 in the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 63 (b) is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 6400. In addition, in FIG. 63A, the vertical displacement unit 6400 in a state where the front cover 5460 is transparently viewed is shown. Further, in FIG. 63 (b), a part of the mechanism for displacing the rotating unit 500 and the decorative member 5450 is illustrated by a alternate long and short dash line.

As shown in FIG. 63, in the vertical displacement unit 6400 in the sixth embodiment, the displacement member 6430 is formed longer on one side (connecting shaft 5435 side) than the displacement member 5430 in the fifth embodiment. Further, the displacement member 6430 is arranged on the back surface side (arrow B direction side) of the decorative member 5450 and the guide rod P1.

The displacement member 6430 includes a drive-side sliding groove 431 formed in a long hole long in the longitudinal direction of the displacement member 6430 on the other side in the longitudinal direction, and a connecting shaft 5435 protruding toward the decorative member 6450 on one side in the longitudinal direction. , A through hole 433 located between the connecting shaft 5435 and the driving side sliding groove 431 and penetrating in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction), and located on one side of the connecting shaft 435 in the longitudinal direction, in front of the A regulating protrusion 6436 that protrudes to the side is provided.

The regulating protrusion 6436 is formed in a columnar shape when viewed from the front. Further, the protruding tip of the regulating protrusion 6436 has a length that can be accepted inside the concave groove 6456a formed in the pinion gear 456 that is rotated by the rotation of the rotating unit 500 arranged in the decorative member 6450 described later. Set. Therefore, by accepting the regulating protrusion 6436 inside the concave groove 6456a, the rotation of the pinion gear 456 is restricted, and the rotation of the rotating unit 500 is restricted.

The decorative member 6450 has a front base 5452 formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in the front view and constitutes a central portion in the longitudinal direction, sliding portions 451 connected to both left and right ends of the front base 5452, and the back surface of the front base 5452. It mainly includes a back base 6453 to be laid down and a rotating unit 500 rotatably arranged on the front side of the front base 5452.

The back base 6453 is a plate member formed so as to have substantially the same outer shape as the front base 5452 in the front view. Further, in the internal space of the front base 5452 and the back base 6453, gears 454,455,6456 (gears 454 and 455 are not shown) are arranged in a rotatable state.

Further, in the sixth embodiment, the sliding groove 5452j formed in the front base 5452 in the fifth embodiment is formed in the back base 6453. Further, the back surface base 6453 is formed with a curved recessed portion 6453e along the displacement locus of the regulation protrusion 6436 in the rear view when the displacement member 6430 rotates. The concave portion 6453e is formed so that the width dimension in the radial direction is larger than the diameter of the regulation protrusion 6436. As a result, when the displacement member 6430 is rotated, the regulating protrusion 6436 can be moved inside the recessed portion 6453e, and the regulating protrusion 6436 can be prevented from colliding with the back surface base 6453.

As described above, the gear 456 is formed to have the same diameter as the gear 571a1 that transmits the drive to the rotating unit 500, and is meshed with the gear 571a1. Therefore, the gear 456 is arranged at the same rotation position each time the rotation unit 500 is rotated once. Further, in the gear 6456, a protrusion for detecting the initial position (reference position) of the rotating unit 500 is projected on the side surface (axial end face), and the protrusion rotates once to move the rotating unit 500 to the initial position. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 10 detect that it is arranged in. Further, the gear 456 includes a concave groove 6456a which is recessed in a curved shape from the back surface side to the front surface side.

In the concave groove 6456a, when the decorative member 6450 is arranged at the second position and the rotating unit 500 is further arranged at the initial position, the curved axis of the concave groove 6456a is the rotating axis of the displacement member 6430 (the shaft support portion 5464). It is set coaxially with the center). Further, the width dimension of the concave groove 6456a in the radial direction is set to be larger than the diameter of the regulation protrusion 6436 described above. As a result, when the rotation unit 500 is arranged at the initial position, the regulation protrusion 6436 of the displacement member 6430 can be arranged inside the concave groove 6456a by rotationally displacing the displacement member 6430. As a result, the rotation of the rotating unit 500 can be regulated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 64, a state in which the rotation of the rotating unit 500 is restricted by the regulating projection 6436 of the displacement member 6430 will be described. FIG. 64A is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 6400 in a state where the decorative member 6450 is arranged at the second position, and FIG. 64B is a rear view of the gear 456. In FIG. 64 (a), a part of the mechanism for displacing the rotating unit 500 and the decorative member 5450 is illustrated by a alternate long and short dash line. Further, in FIG. 64 (b), the tooth surface of the gear engraved on the front side of the gear 456 is illustrated by a alternate long and short dash line.

As shown in FIG. 64, the concave groove 6456a is formed at a position avoiding the rotation axis of the gear 456. Therefore, when the regulating protrusion 6436 is arranged inside the concave groove 6456a, the inner surface of the concave groove 6456a can be brought into contact with the regulating protrusion 6436 when the gear 456 rotates. Therefore, since the rotation of the gear 456 is restricted, the rotation of the gear 571a1 meshed with the gear 456 is restricted. As described above, since the rotating unit 500 rotates by transmitting the drive from the gear 571a1, the rotation of the gear 571a1 is regulated, so that the rotation of the rotating unit 500 is regulated.

In this case, in order to regulate the rotation of the rotating unit 500, it is not necessary to bring the displacement member 6430 into contact with the outer surface of the rotating unit 500, so that the player can visually recognize the state in which the rotating unit 500 and the displacement member 6430 are in contact with each other. It can be made difficult. That is, since the rotation of the rotation unit 500 can be regulated by the gear 456, by arranging the gear 456 on the back side of the front base 6452 and arranging it at a position where it is difficult to see from the front side (player side). It is possible to make the restricted portion of the rotating unit 500 less visible to the player. As a result, the player can visually recognize the structure that regulates the rotation of the rotation unit 500, so that the player's interest can be suppressed from being impaired.

Further, when the rotation of the rotating unit 500 is regulated by the regulating protrusion 6436 (when the decorative member 6450 is arranged at the second position), the concave groove 6456a is the rotating shaft of the displacement member 6430 (the shaft support portion 5464). Of the axial end faces of the gear 456, which is roughly orthogonal to the straight line connecting the center) and the center of the gear 456 and is divided into two by the virtual line KS3 (see FIG. 64B) of the straight line passing through the rotation axis of the gear 456. , Is formed in the region RY1 (see FIG. 64B) near the rotation axis of the displacement member 6430.

Here, when the concave groove 6456a is formed in a position other than the region R1 of the gear 456, the bending direction of the concave groove 6456a and the rotation direction of the gear 456 are approximate. Therefore, when the gear 456 is rotated, the regulating projection 6436 easily slides inside the concave groove 6456a, and the range in which the rotating unit 500 can rotate becomes large before the rotation of the rotating unit 500 is restricted. There is a problem.

On the other hand, in the sixth embodiment, since the concave groove 6456a is formed in the region R1 of the gear 456, when the rotating unit 500 is rotated, the inner surface of the concave groove 6456a abuts on the regulating protrusion 6436. , The rotation distance of the rotation unit 500 can be shortened. As a result, it is possible to prevent the rotation unit 500 from becoming large in the rotatable range until the rotation of the rotation unit 500 is restricted.

Further, the groove width of the concave groove 6456a is reduced from the periphery of the gear 456 toward the inner portion. As a result, when the rotating unit 500 is arranged at a position slightly deviated from the initial position, the decorative member 6450 is displaced from the first position or the third position to the second position, and the regulating protrusion 6436 is displaced from the concave groove 6456a. It can be arranged inside, and the gear 456 can be rotated in contact with the inner surface of the concave groove 6456a to rotate the rotating unit 500 to the initial position.

Next, the vertical displacement unit 7400 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 to 68. In the fifth embodiment, the case where the rotation of the rotating unit 5500 disposed on the decorative member 5450 in a rotatable state is restricted has been described, but in the seventh embodiment, the rotation is restricted in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). A case of restricting the displacement of the displacement unit 7900 arranged in a displaceable state will be described. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the overall configuration of the vertical displacement unit 7400 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 and 66. 65 (a) and 65 (b) are perspective front views of the vertical displacement unit 7400 in the seventh embodiment, and FIGS. 66 (a) and 66 (b) are top views of the vertical displacement unit 7400. is there.

As shown in FIGS. 65 and 66, the decorative member 7450 of the vertical displacement unit 7400 in the seventh embodiment is supported by the displacement members 5430 arranged at both left and right ends as in the fifth embodiment, and the displacement thereof. By rotationally displacing the member 5430, the decorative member 7450 is displaced to the first to third positions. Since the configuration for displace the displacement member 5430 is the same as that of the fifth embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

The decorative member 7450 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in the front view, and has a front base 7452 forming a central portion in the longitudinal direction, sliding portions 451 (not shown) connected to both left and right ends of the front base 7452, and a front base. It mainly includes a back surface base 7453 that covers the back surface of the 7452, and a displacement unit 7900 that is arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the front base 7452 so as to be displaceable in the front-rear direction.

The front base 7452 is formed from a horizontally long rectangular plate-like body in front view, and is formed in a U-shaped cross section in which both upper and lower ends are bent toward the back side. The front base 7452 includes an opening 7452k that opens in the front-rear direction at a substantially intermediate position in the longitudinal direction of the decorative member 5450, and a sliding groove 5452j formed in a long hole that is long in the longitudinal direction of the decorative member 7450.

The shaft portion 7912 of the solenoid 7910 that transmits the drive to the displacement unit 7900, which will be described later, is inserted into the opening portion 7452k. As a result, the drive of the solenoid 7910 is transmitted to the displacement unit 7900 through the opening 7452k, and the displacement unit 7900 is displaced in the front-rear direction. A detailed description of driving the solenoid 7910 will be described later.

The back base 7453 is a plate member formed so as to have substantially the same outer shape as the front base 7452 in the front view. Further, the rear base 7453 is provided with an opening (not shown) that opens at a position facing the opening 7452k formed in the front base 7452, and the solenoid 7910 is provided with the shaft portion 7912 inserted through the opening. The main body 7911 is arranged on the back side of the back base 7453.

The solenoid 7910 has a main body 7911 that generates a magnetic force when electric power is applied, a shaft portion 7912 that is arranged in a state where it can appear and disappear inside the main body 7911, and the shaft portion 7912 from the main body 7911. When a coil spring (not shown) that urges in the protruding direction is provided and power is not applied to the main body 7911, the shaft portion 7912 is projected from the main body 7911 by the urging force of the coil spring, and the main body 7911 When electric power is applied to the main body portion 7911, the shaft portion 7912 is configured to be immersed in the main body portion 7911 by the magnetic force of the main body portion 7911.

A displacement unit 7900 is arranged at the tip of the shaft portion 7912 of the solenoid 7910. Therefore, the displacement unit 7900 is displaced in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) according to the displacement of the shaft portion 7912.

When the shaft portion 7912 of the solenoid 7910 is immersed in the main body portion 7911, the front end portion of the displacement unit 7900 is located on the back surface side of the pair of displacement members 5430 (see FIG. 66A). ). On the other hand, when the shaft portion 7912 of the solenoid 7910 protrudes from the inside of the main body portion 7911, the rear end portion of the displacement unit 7900 is located on the front side of the pair of displacement members 5430 (FIG. 66 (b)). reference).

That is, in the displacement unit 7900, the displacement end positions are set on both sides of the displacement member 5430 in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). This makes it possible to prevent the displacement member 5430 from colliding with the displacement unit 7900 when the displacement member 5430 is rotationally displaced with the displacement unit 7900 arranged on either the front side or the back side.

Next, a case where the displacement of the displacement unit 7900 is regulated will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68. FIG. 67 (a) is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 7400 in a state where the decorative member 7450 is arranged at the second position, and FIG. 67 (b) is a vertical displacement in the direction of arrow LXVIIb of FIG. 67 (a). It is a top view of the unit 7400. FIG. 68 (a) is a top view of the vertical displacement unit 7400 in a state where the displacement of the displacement unit 7900 is regulated, and FIG. 68 (b) is a vertical displacement unit 7400 in the line LXVIIIb-LXVIIIb of FIG. 68 (a). It is a cross-sectional view of. In FIGS. 67 (a) and 68 (a), a part of the displacement unit 7900 that overlaps with the displacement member 5430 is shown by a alternate long and short dash line. Further, in FIG. 68 (b), a part of the displacement member 5430 that overlaps with the displacement unit 7900 is illustrated by a alternate long and short dash line.

As shown in FIG. 67, when the decorative member 7450 is arranged at the second position with the displacement unit 7900 retracted to the back side (the shaft portion 7912 is embedded inside the main body portion 7911 of the solenoid 7910), The end of one side (connecting shaft 5435 side) of the displacement member 5430 is arranged in front of the displacement unit 7900.

As described above, the displacement unit 7900 can be displaced on both sides with the displacement member 5430 in between in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 68, when the displacement member 5430 is displaced to the front side of the displacement unit 7900 and the displacement unit 7900 is displaced to the front side, the end portion of the displacement unit 7900 on the front side is displaced. Is in contact with the displacement member 5430, and the displacement of the displacement unit 7900 is regulated.

In this case, the displacement unit 7900 is displaced in the rotation axis direction of the displacement member 5430 and abuts on the displacement member 5430. Therefore, when the displacement unit 7900 displaces and abuts on the displacement member 5430, the displacement member 5430 rotates. Can be suppressed.

Further, in the solenoid 7910 for driving the displacement unit 7900, the shaft portion 7912 is projected from the main body portion 7911 by the urging force of the coil spring. Therefore, the urging force of the coil spring can be continuously applied to the displacement unit 7900. As a result, the frictional resistance of the contact surfaces of the displacement unit 7900 and the displacement member 5430 can be increased, so that the displacement member 5430 can be prevented from being rotationally displaced while the displacement unit 7900 and the displacement member 5430 are in contact with each other. Therefore, when the power of the drive motor 441 that drives the displacement member 5430 is turned off, it is possible to prevent the displacement member 5430 from rotating due to vibration or the like input from the outside of the pachinko machine 10. As a result, when the displacement unit 7900 comes into contact with the displacement member 5430 and the displacement of the displacement unit 7900 is regulated, the supply of electric power to the drive motor 441 that drives the displacement member 5430 can be cut off. , Energy consumption can be reduced.

Further, in the seventh embodiment, a recessed portion 7437 is formed in a portion where the displacement member 5430 is in contact with the displacement unit 7900. The recessed portion 7437 is recessed in a shape along the outer shape of the opposing displacement unit 7900 when the decorative member 7450 is arranged at the second position. As a result, when the displacement member 5430 is placed on the front side of the displacement unit 7900 and the displacement unit 7900 is displaced to the front side, the portion of the displacement unit 7900 facing the displacement member 5430 becomes a recessed portion. Accepted by 7437. As a result, when the displacement unit 7900 and the displacement member 5430 come into contact with each other and the displacement of the displacement unit 7900 is regulated, the rotation of the displacement member 5430 can be restricted by the inner surface of the recessed portion 7437. it can.

Therefore, when the power of the drive motor 441 that drives the displacement member 5430 is turned off, it is possible to prevent the displacement member 5430 from rotating due to vibration or the like input from the outside of the pachinko machine 10. As a result, when the displacement unit 7900 comes into contact with the displacement member 5430 and the displacement of the displacement unit 7900 is regulated, the supply of electric power to the drive motor 441 that drives the displacement member 5430 can be cut off. , Energy consumption can be reduced.

Next, the vertical displacement unit 8400 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 75. In the fifth embodiment, the case where the displacement member 5430 regulates the rotating unit 5500 from rotating has been described, but in the eighth embodiment, the displacement member 5430 regulates the distance at which the displacement unit 8900 is displaced. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the overall configuration of the vertical displacement unit 8400 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. FIG. 69A is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 8400 in the eighth embodiment, and FIG. 69B is a perspective front view of the vertical displacement unit 8400. 70 (a) is a front view of the base unit 8950, and FIG. 70 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the base unit 8950 in the line LXXb-LXXb of FIG. 70 (a). FIG. 71 is an exploded perspective front view of the base unit 8950.

As shown in FIGS. 69 to 71, the decorative member 8450 of the vertical displacement unit 8400 in the eighth embodiment is supported by the displacement members 5430 arranged at both left and right ends as in the fifth embodiment, and the displacement thereof. By rotationally displacing the member 5430, the decorative member 8450 is displaced to the first to third positions. Since the configuration for displace the displacement member 5430 is the same as that of the fifth embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted. Further, the displacement member 5430 of the eighth embodiment is formed longer on one side (connecting shaft 5435 side) than the displacement member 5430 of the fifth embodiment, whereby the displacement of the displacement unit 8900 described later can be regulated. ..

The decorative member 8450 is connected to a base unit 8950 in which a displacement unit 8900 described later is arranged, a pair of front bases 8452 connected to both ends of the base unit 8950, and left and right outer ends of the front base 8452. A sliding portion 451 (not shown) is mainly provided.

The front base 8452 is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, is divided at substantially intermediate positions in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction), and is arranged in pairs on the left and right sides of the decorative member. Further, the front base 8452 is recessed for fastening and fixing a sliding groove 5452j formed in a long hole long in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) and a base unit 8950 described later on the back surface on the center side in the left-right direction. A portion (not shown) is recessed.

The base unit 8950 is a member for forming a space for sliding the displacement unit 8900 arranged inside, and is a box arranged above (in the direction of arrow U) and open downward (in the direction of arrow D). The upper base member 8960 formed in a shape and the lower base member 8970 arranged below the upper base member 8960 and formed in a box shape open upward are combined in the vertical direction.

The upper base member 8960 is formed in a horizontally long rectangle when viewed from above, and its longitudinal dimension is set to be substantially the same as the distance dimension between the pair of front bases 8452 facing each other. Further, the upper base member 8960 is a portion facing the wall portion 8961 protruding in the longitudinal direction from the back side (arrow B direction side) ends at both ends in the longitudinal direction and the lower base member 8970 on the front side (arrow F direction side). Mainly includes a recessed portion 8962 recessed in the upper base member 8960 and a drive motor 8963 arranged on the back surface side of the upper base member 8960.

The wall portion 8961 is provided with a screw hole 8961a that opens in the front-rear direction. The wall portion 8961 can fasten and fix the upper base member 8960 to the front base 8452 by screwing the screw into the front base 8452 through the screw hole 8961a.

The recessed portion 8962 is a notch for forming an opening for projecting a part of the displacement unit 8900 inserted inside the base unit 8950 to the front side (arrow F side) of the base unit 8950. Further, the recessed portion 8962 is recessed larger in the left-right direction than the portion through which the displacement unit 8900 is communicated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the displacement unit 8900, which is arranged inside the base unit 8950 and is displaced in the left-right direction, from coming into contact with the inner edge of the recessed portion 8962.

The drive motor 8963 is arranged on the back surface side of the upper base member 8960, and its rotation shaft is inserted inside the upper base member 8960 through an opening formed on the back surface side of the upper base member 8960. Further, on the rotating shaft of the drive motor 8963, a transmission gear 8964 that transmits the drive to the slide unit 8930 of the displacement unit 8900 described later is arranged.

The lower base member 8970 is formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the above-mentioned upper base member 8960 in terms of top view. The lower base member 8970 faces the wall portion 8961 protruding in the longitudinal direction of the lower base member 8970 from the back side ends of both ends in the longitudinal direction of the lower base member 8970 and the recessed portion 8962 formed in the upper base member 8960. It mainly includes a recessed portion 8962 that is recessed at a position to be recessed, and a recessed groove 8973 that is recessed along the longitudinal direction of the lower base member 8970 on the inner bottom surface formed in a box shape.

The concave groove 8973 has a portion that guides the slide displacement of the slide unit 8930 of the displacement unit 8900 described later, and the slide displacement of the displacement unit 8900 is caused by inserting the roller member 8933 of the displacement unit 8900 described later into the concave groove 8973. The direction is defined.

Therefore, in the displacement unit 8900 described later, a part of the displacement unit 8900 is outside the base unit 8950 through the space formed by the recessed portion 8962 formed in each of the upper base member 8960 and the lower base member 8970. It is said that it is arranged in.

The displacement unit 8900 includes a slide unit 8930 that is arranged inside the base unit 8950 and slides and displaces in the left-right direction, and a rotating unit 8940 that is arranged on the slide unit 8930 and is rotatable with respect to the slide unit 8930. , Is mainly provided.

The slide unit 8930 is arranged on a pair of main body members 8931 formed by being divided into upper and lower parts, and on the rotating shaft of the drive motor 8963 which is arranged on the main body member 893 and also arranged on the base unit 8950. A rack 8932 that meshes with the transmission gear 8964, and a roller member 8933 that is rotatably arranged on the main body member 8931 and is arranged so that a part of the outer peripheral surface thereof protrudes outward of the main body portion. A holding member 8934 disposed on the opposite side of the main body member 893 with the roller member 8933 sandwiched between them is mainly provided.

The pair of main body members 8931 are arranged vertically symmetrically, and have a recess 8931a recessed from the facing surface on the front side, a shaft hole 8931b bored in the recess 8931a, and slide to the back surface on the outer side in the facing direction. It mainly includes a disposed portion 8931c that is recessed along the sliding direction of the unit 8930.

The recess 893a is a recess for forming a space for arranging the rotation unit 8940, which will be described later, when the pair of main body members 893 are combined, and has an inner edge shape along the maximum rotation range of the rotation unit 8940. To.

The shaft hole 8931b is a circular hole into which a shaft portion 8945 that pivotally supports the rotating unit 8940 is inserted, and is bored in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction). As a result, with the shaft portion 8945 inserted through the rotating unit 8940, both ends of the shaft portion 8945 are inserted into the respective shaft holes 8931b of the pair of main body members 8931 to rotate the rotating unit 8940 into the main body member 8931. It can be arranged in a possible state.

The disposed portion 8931c is a portion for arranging the rack 8932 or the holding member 8934, and the rack 8932 is arranged on the upper main body member 893 of the main body member 8931 formed in a pair and formed in a pair. A holding member 8934 is arranged on the lower main body member 893 of the main body member 8931.

As described above, the rack 8932 is a portion that is displaced by the drive transmitted from the drive motor 8963, has a tooth surface of the gear on the upper surface side, and the teeth are meshed with the transmission gear 8964. As a result, the rack 8932 can be displaced by the drive transmitted from the drive motor 8963. Further, the rack 8932 is fastened to the main body member 8931, and the entire slide unit can be slid and displaced by displacement of the rack 8932.

The holding member 8934 is arranged on the main body member 893 in a state where the ring-shaped roller member 8933 is pivotally supported between the holding member 8934 and the main body member 893. Further, the roller member 8933 is arranged in a state in which a part of its outer peripheral surface protrudes from the lower side (arrow D direction side) of the main body member 893 in the front view. The maximum radial protrusion distance of the roller member 8933 from the main body member 8931 is set to be larger than the downward recessed dimension of the recessed groove 8973 of the lower base member 8970. As a result, when the roller member 8933 is inserted into the concave groove 8973, the concave bottom surface of the concave groove 8973 can be brought into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the roller member 8933. As a result, by rotating the roller member 8933 when the slide unit 8930 is slid and displaced, the resistance when the slide unit 8930 is slid and displaced can be reduced.

The rotating unit 8940 includes a display portion 8941 formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, a shafted support portion 8942 when protruding from the back side of the display surface, and a columnar shaft member 8943 inserted into the shafted support portion 8942. Mainly prepare.

The display unit 8941 has a pattern or a character picture drawn on one surface on the front side (arrow F direction side), and the pattern or character can be visually recognized by the player.

The shafted support portion 8942 is a portion supported by the slide unit 8930 described above, and a protruding tip is arranged in a space formed by a pair of recesses 893a of the slide unit 8930. Further, the shaft-mounted support portion 8942 is provided with a through hole 8942a penetrating in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) at the protruding tip portion. The shaft member 8943 is inserted into the through hole 8942a, and the shaft member 8943 protruding from the through hole 8942a is inserted into the shaft hole 8931b formed in the recess 8931a. As a result, the rotating unit 8940 is in a rotatable state with respect to the slide unit 8930.

Further, a torsion spring (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the shaft-mounted support portion 8942 and the recessed portion 8931a. Due to the urging force of the torsion spring, the rotating unit 8940 is in a state of maintaining the posture in which the pattern or character drawn on the display unit 8941 is directed to the front side when no external force is applied.

Next, the displacements of the slide unit 8930 and the rotary unit 8940 will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 to 75. 72 (a) is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 8400, and FIG. 72 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 8400 in the line LXXIIb-LXXIIb of FIG. 72 (a). 73 (a) and 73 (b) are cross-sectional views of the vertical displacement unit 8400. 74 (a) is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 8400, and FIG. 74 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 8400 in the line LXXIVb-LXXIVb of FIG. 74 (a). 75 (a) and 75 (b) are cross-sectional views of the vertical displacement unit 8400.

In addition, in FIG. 72 and FIG. 73, the state where the decorative member 8450 is arranged at the first position is shown, and in FIGS. 74 and 75, the state where the decorative member 8450 is arranged at the second position is shown. Further, in FIG. 73 (a), a state in which the slide unit 8930 shown in FIG. 72 (b) is slid to the left side is shown, and in FIG. 73 (b), the slide unit 8930 shown in FIG. 72 (b) is moved to the right side. The state of sliding movement is shown. Further, in FIG. 75 (a), a state in which the slide unit 8930 shown in FIG. 74 (b) is slid to the left side is shown, and in FIG. 75 (b), the slide unit 8930 shown in FIG. 74 (b) is moved to the right side. The state of sliding movement is shown.

First, a case where the slide unit 8930 is displaced with the decorative member 8450 arranged at the first position will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73. When the decorative member 8450 is arranged at the third position, it is the same as the state where it is arranged at the first position, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 72 and 73, when the decorative member 8450 is arranged in the first position, one end of the displacement member 5430 is arranged above the rotating unit 8940. .. Further, as shown in FIG. 72B, when the slide unit 8930 is arranged at a substantially intermediate position in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) of the internal space of the base unit 8950, both the left-right directions of the slide unit 8930 A space is formed in the space, and the slide unit 8930 can be displaced in the left-right direction by the amount of the space.

The width dimension L2 in the left-right direction of the opening formed by the pair of recessed portions 8962 of the base unit 8950 (see FIG. 74B) is the maximum distance dimension L3 (see FIG. 74B) that allows the slide unit 8930 to slide in the left-right direction. It is set to be approximately twice that of FIG. 74 (b)). As a result, when the slide unit 8930 is displaced in the left-right direction, the shaft-mounted support portion 8942 of the rotating unit 8940 can be brought into contact with the inner edge of the recessed portion 8962. As a result, after the slide displacement of the slide unit 8930 is stopped, it is possible to prevent the display unit 8941 of the rotating unit 8940 from being rotated in the sliding direction of the slide unit 8930 due to the completed force due to the stop, and the display surface of the display unit 8941. Can be set to the player's side.

Next, a case where the slide unit 8930 is displaced while the decorative member 8450 is arranged at the second position will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 and 75.

As shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, when the decorative member 8450 is placed in the second position, one end of the displacement member 5430 is above and below the shafted support portion 8942 of the rotating unit 8940. It is placed at the same position as the directional height. Further, the distance dimension L1 (see FIG. 74 (b)) between the ends on one side of the pair of displacement members 5430 is the width dimension in the left-right direction of the opening formed by the pair of recessed portions 8962 of the base unit 8950. It is made smaller than L2 (see FIG. 74 (b)). Further, one end of the pair of displacement members 5430 is arranged inside the left and right ends of the opening formed by the pair of recesses 8962.

Further, the maximum distance dimension L3 that allows the slide unit 8930 to slide in the left-right direction (see FIG. 74B) is set to be larger than the distance-to-opposite dimension L4 of the pair of displacement members 5430 and the rotating unit 8940 in the left-right direction. .. As a result, when the slide unit 8930 is displaced in the left-right direction, the rotating unit 8940 can be brought into contact with one end of the displacement member 5430.

As shown in FIGS. 75 (a) and 75 (b), when the slide unit 8930 is displaced in both the left and right directions, the shaft-mounted support portion 8942 of the rotating unit 8940 is attached to one end of the displacement member 5430. Upon contact, the rotary unit 8940 is rotationally displaced about the through hole 8942a. In this case, in the rotating unit 8940, the display unit 8941 is rotationally displaced in the direction opposite to the sliding direction of the slide unit 8930.

In this case, the distance dimension L1 between the one side ends of the displacement member 5430 is reduced as the decorative member 8450 is displaced to the second position. Therefore, the rotation angle of the rotation unit 8940 due to the slide displacement of the slide unit 8930 can be changed by the arrangement of the decorative member 8450.

Therefore, in a store where the pachinko machine 10 is arranged, when a player who plays the pachinko machine arranged next to the pachinko machine 10 visually recognizes the pachinko machine 10 from diagonally forward of the pachinko machine 10, the player is displayed. It is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the patterns and characters displayed in the part 8941. As a result, it is possible to prevent the interest of the player who plays the pachinko machine 10 from being hindered. In this case, it is preferable that the display unit 8941 is provided with a liquid crystal device capable of changing the displayed pattern or character. According to this, by switching between the display when the slide unit 8930 is slid and displaced and the display when the displacement of the slide unit 8930 is returned, it is displayed on the display unit 8941 to the player who plays the adjacent pachinko machine. It is possible to prevent the pattern or character to be visually recognized when the displacement of the slide unit 8930 is returned. As a result, it is possible to prevent the interest of the player who plays the pachinko machine 10 from being hindered.

Further, the rotation angle of the rotation unit 8940 can be changed by the displacement member 5430 that displaces the decorative member 8450. Therefore, since the displacement member 5430 can have both the role of displacing the decorative member 8450 and the role of restricting the rotation of the rotating unit 8940, the number of parts can be reduced.

The display unit 8941 may be provided with a lenticular or the like that can change the display mode by changing the viewing angle instead of the liquid crystal device. In this case, when the pachinko machine 10 is slid and displaced, the display that the player visually recognizes and the display that the player who plays the pachinko machine next to the pachinko machine 10 visually recognizes the display unit 8941 are different modes. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for anyone other than the player playing the pachinko machine 10 to visually recognize the normal display of the pachinko machine 10. As a result, it is possible to prevent the interest of the player who plays the pachinko machine 10 from being hindered. Further, not only the lenticular, but also a liquid crystal device whose display mode can be changed by changing the viewing angle like the lenticular may be arranged in the display unit 8941. In this case, since the image displayed on the display unit 8941 can be changed, it is possible to make it difficult for the player playing the adjacent pachinko machine to visually recognize the pattern or character displayed on the display unit 8941.

Further, when the decorative member 8450 is arranged at the second position, the direction connecting one end of the displacement member 5430 and the rotation axis of the displacement member 5430 is the slide direction (arrow LR) of the slide unit 8930. Be parallel. As a result, when the slide unit 8930 slides and displaces and the main body member 893 comes into contact with one side end of the displacement member 5430, it is possible to prevent the displacement member 5430 from being rotationally displaced.

Here, in the rotating unit 8940, the end portion of the display unit 8941 that is displaced to the back surface side is at the same position as the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) of the displacement member 5430 (position that overlaps the left-right direction (arrow LR direction)). ) Is set to the rotation angle. Therefore, when the rotating unit 8940 is rotated in contact with the displacement member 5430 due to the sliding displacement of the slide unit 8930, when the slide unit 8930 is slid and displaced in the opposite direction, it is displaced to the back side of the display unit 8941. The end portion in the left-right direction comes into contact with one side end portion of the displacement member 5430 arranged on the opposite side in the left-right direction, and the displacement member 5430 and the display portion 8941 are engaged with each other, so that the displacement of the slide unit 8930 is restricted. There is a fear.

On the other hand, in the eighth embodiment, the rotation angle of the rotation unit 8940 is set at a position in the front-rear direction in which the end portion of the display portion 8941 that is displaced toward the back side includes the end portion in the front (arrow F direction) of the displacement member 5430. Will be done. As a result, when the displacement of the slide unit 8930 is repeated and the left-right end of the display unit 8941 comes into contact with one end of the displacement member 5430, the display surface of the display unit 8941 is turned to the front side. It is possible to apply a force when it is collided in a direction. As a result, it is possible to prevent the displacement member 5430 and the display unit 8941 from engaging with each other, and it is possible to prevent the displacement of the slide unit 8930 from being restricted.

Next, the vertical displacement unit 9400 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 to 81. In the fifth embodiment, the case where the rotation of the rotating unit 5500 is restricted by the displacement member 5430 that is rotationally displaced has been described, but in the ninth embodiment, the regulation of the displacement of the rotating unit 9840 is regulated by a rack that linearly displaces. The case of doing so will be described.

First, the overall configuration of the vertical displacement unit 9400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 to 79. FIG. 76 (a) is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 9400 according to the ninth embodiment, and FIG. 76 (b) is a perspective front view of the vertical displacement unit 9400. FIG. 77 is an exploded perspective front view of the vertical displacement unit 9400. FIG. 78 is an exploded perspective front view of the slide unit 9930. FIG. 79 is a side view of the vertical displacement unit 9400.

In the ninth embodiment, the state where the slide unit 9930 is arranged at the lowermost position (arrow D direction) is the first position, and the state where the slide unit 9930 is arranged at the uppermost position (arrow U direction) is the second position. It is explained as. Further, in FIG. 79, the base unit 9950 arranged on the right side (the side in the direction of the arrow R) in the front view and the main body unit 9931 arranged on the right side in the front view are shown transparently.

As shown in FIGS. 76 to 79, the vertical displacement unit 9400 according to the ninth embodiment is a base unit 9950 arranged at both ends in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) and a pair of base units 9950. It mainly includes a displacement member 9430 and a slide unit 9930 arranged between facing each other, and a rotating unit 9940 connected to the slide unit 9930.

The pair of base units 9950 are formed in a box shape with one open surface, and are arranged with the open surfaces facing each other. In the internal space thereof, a displacement member 9430, a slide unit 9930, and a rotating unit 9940, which will be described later, are arranged. Displaced. Further, the base unit 9950 has two first protrusions 9951 protruding in the opposite direction to the inner facing surfaces thereof, two second protrusions 9952 having a shorter protrusion distance than the first protrusion 9951, and a first protrusion. It mainly includes erection portions 9953 erected on both sides in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) of 9951, and insertion holes 9956 through which transmission gears 9955 connected to the rotation shaft of the drive motor 9954 are inserted.

The first protrusion 9951 is inserted into the sliding groove 9430a of the displacement member 9430, which will be described later, and can guide the displacement member 9430 when the displacement member 9430 is displaced. Further, the displacement member 9430 into which the first protrusion 9951 is inserted is arranged at both ends in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) between the standing portions 9953 of the pair of base units 9950, and is arranged in the left-right direction. It is arranged between the pair of base units 9950 facing each other in a state where the displacement of the base unit is regulated.

Since the standing portions 9953 are arranged on both sides of the first protrusion 9951 in the front-rear direction, it is possible to prevent the displacement member 9430 from tilting in the left-right direction in the front-rear direction. Further, the upright portion 9953 extends in the sliding direction (vertical direction) of the displacement member 9430, and even when the displacement member 9430 slides and displaces, the displacement of the displacement member 9430 in the left-right direction can be regulated.

The second protrusion 9952 is inserted into the sliding groove 9931c of the slide unit 9930 described later, and can guide the slide unit 9930 when the slide unit 9930 is slid and displaced.

The displacement member 9430 is formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular plate in a side view, and has a second tooth surface 9430b of the tooth surface of the gear on one surface on the front side and a first tooth surface 9430c on the tooth surface of the gear on one surface on the back surface side. It mainly includes a sliding groove 9430a having a long hole that is penetrated in the left-right direction and long in the vertical direction, and a protruding portion 9430d that protrudes upward from one upper surface.

The sliding grooves 9430a are formed at two positions separated by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction, and are arranged in a state where the above-mentioned first protrusion 9951 is inserted into each of the sliding grooves 9430a. Further, the vertical opening dimension of the sliding groove 9430a is formed to be substantially the same as or slightly larger than the displacement distance of the displacement member 9430.

The first tooth surface 9430c extends in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction). Further, the first tooth surface 9430c is a tooth surface that meshes with a transmission gear 9955 connected to the rotation shaft of the drive motor 9954, and transmits the drive of the drive motor 9954 to the first tooth surface 9430c via the transmission gear 9955. can do. As a result, the displacement member 9430 is displaced in the vertical direction by the rotation of the drive motor 9954.

The second tooth surface 9430b is meshed with the slide side transmission gear 9980 and the rotation side transmission gear 9935 of the slide unit 9930, and the displacement member 9430 is displaced by the drive motor 9954 to rotate the slide side transmission gear 9980 and rotation. Both sides of the side transmission gear 9935 are rotated. As a result, by sliding-displace the displacement member 9430, the slide unit 9930 can be slid-displaced in the vertical direction, and the rotating unit 9940 can be rotationally displaced. A detailed description of the displacement of the slide unit 9930 and the rotating unit 9940 will be described later.

The protruding portion 9430d is a protrusion inserted into the inserted portion 9941a recessed in the rotating unit 9940, and is arranged in a state of being inserted into the inserted portion 9941a when the slide unit 9930 is arranged at the first position. Will be done.

The slide unit 9930 includes a pair of main body portions 9931, a rotating side transmission gear 9935 arranged between the main body portions facing each other, an intermediate gear 9936 that meshes with the rotating side transmission gear 9935, and the intermediate gear 9936. It mainly includes a sliding gear 9937 that meshes with the 9936 and a rack 9938 that meshes with the slide-side transmission gear 9980.

A pair of main body units 9931 are arranged in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction), and the pair is connected in a state where a predetermined space is provided between the facing portions. Further, a plurality of protrusions are formed on the inner side of the pair of main body portions 9931 in the opposite direction, and the rotation side transmission gear 9935 intermediate gear 9936, the intermediate gear 993, and the sliding gear 9937 are formed on the plurality of protrusions. Axial support. Further, the main body 9931 is provided with a sliding groove 9931c having a long hole that opens in the left-right direction and is long in the up-down direction. The slide unit 9930 is guided through the sliding groove 9931c by inserting the second protrusion 9952 of the base unit 9950 as described above.

The gear trains 9935 to 9937 are gear trains that transmit drive to the rotating unit 9940 when the above-mentioned displacement member 9430 is displaced, and the rotating side transmission gear 9935 is meshed with the second tooth surface 9430b of the displacement member 9430. At the same time, the sliding gear 9937 is meshed with the rotating unit 9940.

Further, the sliding gear 9937 has a small-diameter tooth portion 9937a having a tooth surface partially formed with a small diameter and a sliding surface 9937b having a partially formed tooth surface adjacent to the small-diameter tooth portion 9937a in the circumferential direction. Be prepared. A detailed description of the small diameter tooth portion 9937a and the sliding gear 9937 will be described later.

The rack 9938 is provided with a tooth surface 9938a that meshes with the slide side transmission gear 9980 on one surface on the back surface side, and is fastened and fixed to the main body portion 9931. Further, the tooth surface 9938a is arranged at a position protruding from the facing space of the main body 9931. As a result, when the displacement member 9430 is displaced, it is possible to prevent the main body 9931 from coming into contact with the displacement member 9430.

The rotating unit 9940 has a display unit 9941 formed in a curved side view and whose inner peripheral surface is arranged toward the base unit 9950, and a shafted support portion protruding from the inner peripheral surface of the display unit 9941 toward the base unit 9950. Mainly equipped with 9942.

A pattern or character is drawn on the outer peripheral side of the display unit 9941, and an inserted portion 9941a into which the protruding portion 9430d of the displacement member 9430 is inserted is recessed on the inner peripheral side. As described above, when the slide unit 9930 is arranged at the first position, the rotation of the rotating unit 9940 is restricted by inserting the protruding portion 9430d into the inserted portion 9941a.

The shafted support portion 9942 includes a through hole 9942a penetrating in the left-right direction on the protruding tip side, and a curved tooth surface 9942b on the tooth surface of the curved gear centered on the center of the through hole 9942a at the protruding tip portion.

The through hole 9942a is arranged in the slide unit 9930 with protrusions protruding in the opposite direction of the pair of main body portions 9931 inserted. By pivotally supporting the through hole 9942a to the protrusion of the main body 9931, the rotating unit 9940 is connected to the slide unit 9930 in a state of being rotatable with respect to the slide unit 9930.

The curved tooth surface 9942b is a portion that is meshed with the sliding gear 9937, and the rotating unit 9940 is rotated with respect to the sliding unit 9930 by rotating the sliding gear 9937. Further, the curved tooth surface 9942b includes a large-diameter tooth portion 9942b1 of the tooth surface formed in a part having a large diameter.

The tip of the large-diameter tooth portion 9942b1 is located at the end of the sliding surface 9937b on the side opposite to the connecting side in the circumferential direction when the slide unit 9930 is arranged at the first position. As a result, at the initial stage of rotation of the sliding gear 9937, the curved tooth surface 9942b and the sliding gear 9937 can be brought into a non-engaged state, and the start timing of the slide unit 9930 and the start timing of the rotary unit 9940 can be set. It can be shifted.

Next, the displacement of the vertical displacement unit 9400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 to 81. 80 and 81 are side views of the vertical displacement unit 9400. Note that FIGS. 79 to 81 show transition states in which the slide unit 9930 is displaced from the first position to the second position in order. In FIG. 79, the slide unit 9930 is arranged in the first position, in FIG. 81, the slide unit 9930 is arranged in the second position, and in FIG. 80, the slide unit 9930 is arranged in the first position. Are slightly displaced, respectively. Further, in FIGS. 80 and 81, the base unit 9950 arranged on the right side (in the direction of the arrow R) in the front view and the main body 9931 arranged on the right side in the front view are shown transparently.

As shown in FIG. 79, when the slide unit 9930 is arranged at the first position, the protruding portion 9430d of the displacement member 9430 is in a state of being inserted into the inserted portion 9941a, and the displacement member 9430 is moved downward (arrow D). By displacing in the direction), the restriction between the displacement member 9430 and the rotating unit 9940 is released.

Here, as described above, in the ninth embodiment, the drive of the drive motor 9954 causes the slide side transmission gear 9980 and the rotation unit 9940 to be rotationally displaced by the drive of the drive motor 9954 via the displacement member 9430. It is transmitted to the sliding gear 9937. Therefore, if the slide displacement of the displacement member 9430 and the rotational displacement of the rotating unit 9940 are performed at the same timing, the rotating unit 9940 rotates from the inserted portion 9941a before the protruding portion 9430d is ejected from the inserted portion 9941a. There was a problem that the protruding portion 9430d could not be pulled out.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the curved tooth surface 9942b includes a large-diameter tooth portion 9942b1 of the tooth surface partially formed with a large diameter, and the tip of the curved tooth surface 9942b slides when it is arranged at the first position. Since it is located at the end of the surface 9937b opposite to the connecting side with the small diameter tooth portion 9937a in the circumferential direction, as shown in FIG. 80, at the initial stage of displacement of the displacement member 9430, the rotating unit is placed on the sliding surface of the sliding gear 9937. By sliding the large-diameter tooth portion 9942b1 of 9940, the meshing with the rotating unit 9940 and the sliding gear 9937 can be released. Therefore, when the displacement member 9430 is displaced, the displacement member 9430 can be displaced before the rotating unit 9940. As a result, it is possible to prevent the protruding portion 9430d from coming off from the inserted portion 9941a.

Further, since the small diameter tooth portion 9937a is formed on the sliding gear 9937 and the large diameter tooth portion 9942b1 is formed on the curved tooth surface 9942b, the sliding gear 9937 and the sliding gear 9937 are formed after sliding the sliding surface 9937b. It is possible to prevent the curved tooth surface 9942b from engaging with the tooth surface and becoming stuck or the position of the tooth engagement being displaced.

As shown in FIG. 81, when the slide unit 9930 is arranged at the second position, the display unit 9941 of the rotating unit 9940 is fronted with the displacement of the displacement member 9430 that displaces the slide unit 9930 to the second position. Can be rotated to the side.

In the ninth embodiment, the vertical displacement unit 9400 is arranged on the back side of the game board 13 and below the opening of the center frame 600, and the slide unit 9930 is arranged in the first position. By visually recognizing the display unit 9941 from diagonally above the front of the center frame 600, the player can visually recognize the entire display unit 9941. On the other hand, when the slide unit 9930 is displaced to the second position, the display unit 9941 is displaced inside the center frame 600 and the display surface of the display unit 9941 is inverted. As a result, the display unit 9941 arranged inside the center frame 600 can be easily made visible to the player. That is, in the ninth embodiment, by synchronizing the slide unit 9930 and the rotation unit 9940, the display unit 9941 can be arranged at a position that is easily visible to the player.

Next, the vertical displacement unit 10400 according to the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 to 83. In the fifth embodiment, the case where one end of the displacement member 5430 is inserted inside the recess 5514 recessed in the rotating unit 5500 has been described, but in the tenth embodiment, the decorative member 10450 is displaced. The rotating protrusion 10459a is arranged in contact with the side wall 10515 of the rotating unit 10500. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the overall configuration of the vertical displacement unit 10400 according to the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 82. 82 (a) is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 10400 in the tenth embodiment, and FIG. 82 (b) is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 10400. Note that, in FIG. 82 (a), the front cover 5460 is shown transparently, and in FIG. 82 (b), the back base 5453 of the decorative member 10450 is not shown.

As shown in FIG. 82, the vertical displacement unit 10400 according to the tenth embodiment has a front base 10410 formed in a box shape and a front cover 5460 superposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the front base 5410. A displacement member that is axially supported between the drive motor 441 arranged on the back side of the front base 10410 and the front base 10410 and the front cover 5460 and rotated by the driving force of the drive motor 441. The 10430 and the decorative member 10450 which is connected to one side of the displacement member 10430 and is displaced in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) with the rotation of the displacement member 10430, and is inserted into the decorative member 10450 and is inserted into the decorative member 10450. It mainly includes a guide rod P1 arranged between the front base 10410 and the front cover 5460 facing each other.

The front base 10410 is a pair of a first piece 10410X extending in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) and a pair of the first piece 10410X arranged in the horizontal direction from a substantially intermediate position in the vertical direction of the first piece 10410X. A second piece 5410Y that bulges outward in the opposite direction of the above.

The first piece 10410X has an upper concave groove 413 recessed on the cross-sectional arc on the upper end side, a lower concave groove 414 whose lower end is recessed on the cross-sectional arc, and a far side (arrow) from the rotating unit 10500. Rack member 10444 arranged on the opposite surface side of the standing portion 5412 erected on the front cover 5460 side (arrow F direction side) along the edge portion in the L direction and the pair of first pieces 10410X facing each other. And.

The rack member 10444 is formed in a rectangular shape that is long in the extending direction of the first piece 10410X when viewed from the front, and the tooth surface 1044a of the gear is engraved on the facing surface on the side where the pair of first pieces 10410X face each other. The tooth surface 10444a is arranged on the first piece 10410X (front base 10410) in a state of protruding from the opposite side surfaces of the pair of first pieces 10410X.

The decorative member 10450 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in the front view, forms a front base 10452 in the central portion in the longitudinal direction, sliding portions 451 connected to both ends in the left-right direction of the front base 10452, and the back surface of the front base 10452. A rear base 453 (not shown) that covers the above, a rotating unit 10500 that is rotatably arranged on the front side of the front base 10452, and a plurality of gears (three in this embodiment) at both ends in the longitudinal direction. 10454 to 10456.

The rotating unit 10500 is arranged below the upper surface base 10510 forming the upper side surface of the rotating unit 10500, the irradiation unit 530 (see FIG. 28) arranged below the upper surface base 10510, and the irradiation unit 530. An intermediate member 10540 to be installed, a reflector 560 (see FIG. 28) arranged below the intermediate member 540, a front cover 550 (see FIG. 28) arranged in front of the reflector 560, and an upper surface. A rotation transmission unit 570 (see FIG. 28) arranged on the back surface side of the base 510 and the lower surface base 5520, and a lower surface base 10520 forming a lower side surface of the rotation unit 10500 are mainly provided. ..

Further, the rotating unit 10500 is configured in a rectangular shape having one long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the rotating unit 10500 is provided at both ends of the rotating unit 10500 of the upper surface base 10510, the intermediate member 10540, and the lower surface base 10520 forming the outer surface in the longitudinal direction. A side wall 10515 of a surface perpendicular to the longitudinal direction is formed.

The rotation unit 10500 is configured as a versa writer that produces an effect based on the afterimage of the light emitted from the irradiation unit 530, as in the first embodiment, and is configured as a rotation transmission unit 570 as in the first embodiment. The back base 571 is rotationally displaced about the center of the gear 571a1.

Further, the center of gravity of the rotating unit 10500 is set on the rotating shaft O, and when the longitudinal direction of the rotating unit 10500 is horizontal, the rotating unit 10500 rotates about the rotating shaft O by its own weight. Is suppressed.

Similar to the front base 452 in the first embodiment, the front base 10452 is formed from a plate-like body having a horizontally rectangular shape in front view, and is formed in a U-shaped cross section in which both upper and lower ends are bent toward the back side. The front base 10542 has a sliding groove 5452j formed in a long hole long in the longitudinal direction of the decorative member 5450 and a second sliding opening in an arc shape centered on a straight line extending in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). It mainly has a groove of 10452 m.

A protrusion 10459a of a regulation member 10459 arranged on a gear 10456, which will be described later, is inserted into the second sliding groove 10452m. Further, in the second sliding groove 10452m, the axis of the arc in the front view is set coaxially with the rotation axis of the gear 10456 described later. As a result, when the gear 10456 is rotated, the protrusion 10459a slides inside the second sliding groove 10452m. Further, the second sliding groove 10452m is formed at a position where a part of the inner edge on the outer side in the radial direction is in contact with the side wall 10515 of the rotating unit 10500 arranged at the initial position in the front view. As a result, the protrusion 10459a that slides inside the second sliding groove 10452m can be arranged in contact with the side wall 10515. The width dimension of the second sliding groove 10452m in the vertical direction is set to be larger than the width dimension in the vertical direction of the side wall 10515, and the protrusion 10459a is arranged in contact with the side wall 10515, and the side wall 10515 is above and below. It is possible to switch between states by moving it outward in the direction. As a result, when the decorative member 10450 is displaced in the vertical direction, the protrusion 10459a can be switched between the state of being in contact with the side wall 10515 and the state of being located outside the side wall 10515 in the vertical direction, and the rotation unit 10500 can be rotated. Can be switched between regulated and unregulated states.

Next, with reference to FIG. 83, the protrusion 10459a in a state where the decorative member 10450 is arranged at the first to third positions will be described. FIG. 83 (a) is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 10400 in a state where the decorative member 10450 is arranged in the third position, and FIG. 83 (b) is a state in which the decorative member 10450 is arranged in the third position. It is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 10400. FIG. 83 (c) is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 10400 when the decorative member 10450 is arranged at the second position, and FIG. 83 (d) is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 10400 when the decorative member 10450 is arranged at the second position. It is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 10400. FIG. 83 (e) is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 10400 in a state where the decorative member 10450 is arranged in the first position, and FIG. 83 (f) is a state in which the decorative member 10450 is arranged in the first position. It is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 10400.

As shown in FIGS. 83 (a) and 83 (b), when the decorative member 10450 is arranged at the third position, the protrusion 10459 a of the regulating member 10459 is above the rotating unit 10500 arranged at the initial position. It is arranged in the (arrow U direction). In this case, the protrusion 10459a is arranged outside the rotation region RY2 (see FIG. 83B) of the rotation unit 10500. As a result, the rotation unit 10500 is allowed to rotate in the state where the decorative member 10450 is arranged at the third position. Therefore, when the decorative member 10450 is arranged at the third position, the player can visually recognize the effect by rotating the rotating unit 10500.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 83 (c) and 83 (d), in the state where the decorative member 10450 is arranged at the second position, the rotating unit 10500 in which the protrusion 10459a of the regulating member 10459 is arranged at the initial position. It is arranged in contact with the side wall 10515. In this case, the protrusion 10459a is arranged inside the rotation region RY2 of the rotation unit 10500. As a result, the rotation of the rotating unit 10500 is restricted in a state where the decorative member 10450 is arranged at the second position.

In this case, while the protrusion 10459a is rotationally displaced, the side wall 10515 is formed in a flat surface, so that the more the protrusion 10459a is rotated, the more a gap is formed between the side wall and the 10515. Thereby, when the rotating unit 10500 is stopped at a position slightly deviated from the initial position, it is possible to prevent the side wall 10515 from being arranged on the displacement locus of the protrusion 10459a. As a result, it is possible to prevent the protrusion 10459a from colliding with the rotating unit 10500 and being restricted from being displaced while the protrusion 10459a is being displaced.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 83 (e) and 83 (f), when the decorative member 10450 is arranged at the first position, the protrusion 10459a of the regulation member 10459 is arranged at the initial position of the rotating unit 10500. It is arranged below (in the direction of arrow D). In this case, the protrusion 10459a is arranged outside the rotation region RY2 (see FIG. 83B) of the rotation unit 10500. As a result, the rotation unit 10500 is allowed to rotate in the state where the decorative member 10450 is arranged at the first position. Therefore, when the decorative member 10450 is arranged at the first position, the player can visually recognize the effect by rotating the rotating unit 10500.

Next, the vertical displacement unit 11400 according to the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 to 86. In the tenth embodiment, the case where the protrusion 10459a is interlocked with the displacement of the decorative member 10450 has been described, but in the tenth embodiment, the case where the protrusion 10459a is not interlocked with the displacement is formed. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the configuration of the vertical displacement unit 11400 according to the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 84. FIG. 84 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 11400 according to the eleventh embodiment. In FIG. 84, the back base 453 is not shown. The back base 453 is shown transparently.

As shown in FIG. 84, the vertical displacement unit 11400 in the eleventh embodiment has a front base 10410 formed in a box shape and a front cover 5460 superposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the front base 5410. A displacement member that is axially supported between the drive motor 441 arranged on the back side of the front base 10410 and the front base 10410 and the front cover 5460 and rotated by the driving force of the drive motor 441. The 10430 and the decorative member 11450 which is connected to one side of the displacement member 10430 and is displaced in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) with the rotation of the displacement member 10430, and is inserted into the decorative member 11450. It mainly includes a guide rod P1 disposed between the front base 10410 and the front cover 5460 facing each other.

The decorative member 11450 has a front base 11452 formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in the front view and constitutes a central portion in the longitudinal direction, sliding portions 451 connected to both left and right ends of the front base 11452, and the back surface of the front base 11452. A rear base 453 (not shown) to be laid down, a rotating unit 10500 rotatably arranged on the front side of the front base 11452, and a plurality of rotating units 10500 at both ends in the longitudinal direction (three on the left side in the rear view in the present embodiment). , 4) gears 10454, 10455, 11455, 11456 on the right side when viewed from the rear.

Like the front base 452 in the first embodiment, the front base 11452 is formed from a plate-like body having a horizontally rectangular shape in front view, and is formed in a U-shaped cross section in which both upper and lower ends are bent toward the back side. Further, the front base 11542 is opened in an arc shape centered on a sliding groove 5452j formed in a long hole long in the longitudinal direction of the decorative member 11450 and a straight line extending in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). It mainly includes a sliding groove 10452m and a recessed portion 11452n that is recessed in an arc shape that connects to the second sliding groove 10452m.

The recessed portion 11452n is formed in an arc shape coaxial with the second sliding groove 10452m in the rear view, and both ends in the circumferential direction are connected to the second sliding groove 10452m. Further, the recessing distance of the recessed portion 11452n to the front side is set to be larger than the protruding length of the protrusion 10459a inserted into the second sliding groove 10452m. As a result, the protrusion 10459a can be rotated to a position beyond the circumferential end of the second sliding groove 10452m.

The gear 11455 is arranged only in the gear row arranged on the right side when viewed from the rear, and is in a state of being meshed with the gear 10455 and the gear 11456. As a result, the rotation direction of the gear 11456 on the right side of the rear view, which will be described later, can be set to be clockwise in the rear view.

The gear 11456 incorporates a one-way clutch 11456a (commercially available one-way clutch) that transmits only the power of rotation in one direction, and is arranged outside the inner ring 11456b arranged inside the one-way clutch 11456a and outside the one-way clutch 11456a. The outer ring 11456c is provided with a gear tooth surface engraved on the outer peripheral surface. As a result, the gear 11456 can transmit power to the inner ring 11456b when the gear 10455 is rotated in one direction, and the power is not transmitted to the inner ring 11456b when the gear 11455 is rotated in the other direction. It is said that. A detailed description of the rotation of the gear 11457 will be described later.

A regulation member 10459 is disposed on the inner ring 11456b. As a result, the protrusion 10459a of the regulation member 11459 is displaced only when power is transmitted to the inner ring 11456b by the one-way clutch 11456a. That is, the protrusion 10459a is rotated in only one direction. As a result, the protrusion 10459a can be stopped at an arbitrary position by repeatedly displacing the decorative member 11450 in the vertical direction (arrow LR direction).

In the present embodiment, the one-way clutch 11456a incorporated in the gears 11456 arranged at two positions on the left and right of the decorative member 11450 is only one of the two gears 11456 when the decorative member 11450 is displaced in one direction. Is capable of transmitting power to the inner ring 11456b (for example, when the decorative member 11450 is displaced from the third position to the first position, the inner ring of the gear 11456 on the right side (arrow L direction side) of the rear view is rotated) and is decorated. When the member 11450 is displaced in the other direction, only the other of the two gears 11456 can transmit power to the inner ring 11456b (for example, when the decorative member 11450 is displaced from the first position to the third position). The inner ring of the gear 11456 on the left side of the rear view (the side in the direction of arrow R) is rotated).

Further, in the present embodiment, the rotation direction of the inner ring 11456b (projection 10459a) of the gear 11456 arranged on the left side in the rear view (arrow R direction side) is set counterclockwise in the rear view, and the right side in the rear view (arrow L). The rotation direction of the inner ring 11456b (projection 10459a) of the gear 11456 arranged on the (direction side) is set clockwise in the rear view. As a result, when the gear 11456 is rotated and the protrusion 10459a is arranged inside the second sliding groove 10452m, the load of the regulation member 10459 can be applied in the direction of transmitting the power of the one-way clutch 11456a. As a result, when the protrusion 10459a is arranged inside the second sliding groove 11452m, it is possible to prevent the one-way clutch 11456a from idling and shifting the position of the protrusion 10459a.

When the protrusion 10459a slides inside the recessed portion 11452n located on the opposite side of the second sliding groove 10452m and the curved shaft, the load of the regulating member 10459 causes the one-way clutch 11456a to idle. However, when the protrusion 10459a slides on the recessed portion 11452n, another member (for example, the rotating unit 10500) collides with the second sliding groove 10452m as compared with the case where the protrusion 10459a slides. Since the possibility of this is reduced, it is possible to prevent the one-way clutch from idling and shifting the position of the protrusion 10459a.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the decorative member 11450 is displaced from the third position to the first position or from the first position to the third position, the gear 10454, so that the outer ring 11456c of the gear 11456 rotates approximately 180 degrees. Gear ratios of 10455, 10456, and 11456 are set. This makes it easier to adjust the rotation angles of the gears 11456 arranged at the two locations.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86, when the decorative member 11450 is arranged from the third position to the first position and the decorative member 11450 arranged at the first position is displaced from the first position to the third position. The protrusion 10459a of the above will be described. In the following description, when the decorative member 11450 is arranged at the third position and is set to the initial position before displacement, the protrusion 11459a is on the lower side (arrow D direction side) of the second sliding groove 11452m. The state of being arranged at the end will be described first.

FIG. 85 (a) is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 11400 in a state where the decorative member 11450 is arranged in the third position, and FIG. 85 (b) is a state in which the decorative member 11450 is arranged in the second position. It is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 11400, and FIG. 85 (c) is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 11400 in a state where the decorative member 11450 is arranged at the first position. FIG. 86 (a) is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 11400 in a state where the decorative member 11450 is arranged in the first position, and FIG. 86 (b) is a state in which the decorative member 11450 is arranged in the second position. It is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 11400, and FIG. 86 (c) is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 11400 in a state where the decorative member 11450 is arranged at the third position.

As shown in FIGS. 85 (a) and 85 (b), when the decorative member 11450 is displaced from the third position to the second position, only the inner ring 11456b of the gear 11456 arranged on the right side in the rear view Power is transmitted to rotate the regulating member 10459 (projection 10459a) in the direction of arrow X1 (see FIG. 85 (b)).

In this case, the protrusion 10459a is arranged in contact with the side wall 10515 of the rotating unit 10500. As a result, the protrusion 10459a is arranged in the rotation region R1 of the rotation unit 10500, so that the rotation of the rotation unit 10500 is restricted.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 85 (b) and 85 (c), when the decorative member 11450 is displaced from the second position to the first position, the back surface is the same as the displacement from the third position to the second position. Power is transmitted only to the inner ring 11456b of the gear 11456 arranged on the right side of the view, and the regulating member 10459 (projection 10459a) is rotated in the direction of arrow X2 (see FIG. 85 (c)). As a result, the protrusion 10459a is arranged outside the side wall 10515 of the rotating unit 10500 in the vertical direction and outside the rotating region R1 of the rotating unit 10500. As a result, rotation of the rotating unit 10500 is allowed.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 86 (a) and 86 (b), when the decorative member 11450 is displaced from the first position to the second position, the inner ring 11456b of the gear 11456 arranged on the left side in the rear view Power is transmitted only to, and the regulating member 10459 (protrusion 10459a) is rotated in the direction of arrow Y1 (see FIG. 86B).

In this case, the protrusion 10459a is arranged in contact with the side wall 10515 of the rotating unit 10500. As a result, the protrusion 10459a is arranged in the rotation region R1 of the rotation unit 10500, so that the rotation of the rotation unit 10500 is restricted.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 86 (b) and 86 (c), when the decorative member 11450 is displaced from the second position to the third position, the back surface is the same as the displacement from the first position to the second position. Power is transmitted only to the inner ring 11456b of the gear 11456 arranged on the left side of the view, and the regulating member 10459 (projection 10459a) is rotated in the direction of arrow Y2 (see FIG. 86 (c)). As a result, the protrusion 10459a is arranged outside the side wall 10515 of the rotating unit 10500 in the vertical direction and outside the rotating region R1 of the rotating unit 10500. As a result, rotation of the rotating unit 10500 is allowed.

In the eleventh embodiment, the displacement of the decorative member 11450 is not limited to the order described above, but is, for example, from the state where the decorative member 11450 is arranged at the third position shown in FIG. By displacing the decorative member 11450 in the order of the second position, the protrusion 10459a of the gear 11456 arranged on the left side in the rear view is arranged in contact with the side wall 10515 of the rotating unit 10500 arranged at the initial position. Further, if the decorative member 11450 is further displaced in the order of the third position and the second position from this state, the rotation of the rotation unit 10500 can be allowed in the second position. As a result, it is possible to increase the area in which the rotation unit 10500 is rotated to produce an effect.

Next, the vertical displacement unit 12400 according to the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 87. In the tenth embodiment, the case where the displacement loci of the protrusions 10459a of the regulation member 10459 arranged at the left and right two places are symmetrical on the left and right has been described, but in the twelfth embodiment, the left and right two places are provided. The displacement of the protrusion 10459a of the regulating member 10459 to be arranged is set to a different position on the left and right. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 87 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 12400 according to the twelfth embodiment. In FIG. 87, the gear 10456 in which the regulation member 10459 is arranged is shown by a chain line. Further, a straight line in the vertical direction passing through the center of rotation of the gear 10456 is illustrated by a two-dot chain line with a reference numeral of the virtual line KS4. Further, in FIG. 87, a state in which the decorative member 12450 is arranged at the third position is shown.

As shown in FIG. 87, the second sliding groove 12452m opened in the front base 12452 of the vertical displacement unit 12400 in the twelfth embodiment is formed at different heights on the left and right. More specifically, in the second sliding groove 12452m on the left side in the front view, the angle θ1 (see FIG. 87) at which the straight line connecting the upper end and the rotation center of the gear 10456 intersects with the virtual line KS4 is on the right side in the front view. The angle is set smaller than the angle θ2 at which the straight line connecting the upper end of the second sliding groove 12452m and the rotation center of the gear 10456 and the virtual line KS4 intersect.

Further, in the state where the decorative member 12450 is arranged at the third position, the protrusion 10459a of the regulating member 10459 is arranged inside the upper end portion of the second sliding groove 12452m, respectively. Therefore, when the decorative member 12450 is displaced from the third position to the second position and the gear 10456 is rotated, the protrusion 10459a of the regulation member 10459 on the right side of the front view is arranged at the initial position before the protrusion 10459a on the left side. It is arranged inside the side wall 10515 of the rotating unit 10500 to be made.

Here, when the rotating unit 10500 stops at the initial position after rotating, the rotating unit 10500 performs a stop operation after the protrusions formed on the gear 456 (see FIG. 26) described above are arranged between the detection sensors. There was a tendency to shift in the direction of rotation and stop. Therefore, after rotating the rotating unit 10500, when the rotating unit 10500 is displaced and stopped at a position where it overlaps with the second sliding groove 12452m in the front view, the protrusion 10459a is moved to the left and right as described in the tenth embodiment. If they are displaced at the same time, one of the protrusions 10459a may collide with the outer surface of the rotating unit 10500, and the operation of the protrusion 10459a may be restricted.

On the other hand, in the twelfth embodiment, since one protrusion 10459a precedes, the protrusion 10459a precedes when the rotation direction of the rotation unit 10500 at the first position and the third position is displaced to the second position. By setting the rotation direction in the opposite direction to the side (in the present embodiment, the rotation is counterclockwise when viewed from the front in the third position and the rotation is clockwise when viewed from the front in the first position), the stop position of the rotating unit 10500 is displaced. In this case, the protrusion 10459a on the preceding side can be brought into contact with the side wall 10515 of the rotating unit 10500 to return the position of the rotating unit 10500 to the initial position. As a result, it is possible to prevent the protrusion 10459a on the trailing side from colliding with the outer surface of the rotating unit 10500.

Next, the vertical displacement unit 13400 according to the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 90. In the fifth embodiment, the case where the rotation of the rotating unit 5500 is regulated by the displacement member 5430 has been described, but in the thirteenth embodiment, the rotation of the rotating unit 13500 is regulated by the projecting member 13495 protruding from the front base 13452. Will be done. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the configuration of the vertical displacement unit 13400 according to the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 and 89. 88 (a) and 88 (b) are front views of the vertical displacement unit 13400 according to the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 89 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 13400 in the line LXXXIXa-LXXXIXa of FIG. 88 (b), and FIG. It is a sectional view.

As shown in FIGS. 88 and 89, the vertical displacement unit 13400 according to the thirteenth embodiment has a front base 5410 formed in a box shape and a front surface (the side in the F direction of the arrow) overlapped with the front base 5410. The cover 5460 and the drive motor 441 arranged on the back side of the front base 5410 are axially supported between the front base 5410 and the front cover 5460 facing each other, and are rotated by the driving force of the drive motor 441. The decorative member 13430, which is connected to one side of the displacement member 13430 and the displacement member 13430 and is displaced in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) as the displacement member 13430 rotates, is inserted through the decorative member 13450. In addition, a guide rod P1 disposed between the front base 5410 and the front cover 5460 facing each other is mainly provided.

The decorative member 13450 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in the front view, forms a front base 13452 in the central portion in the longitudinal direction, sliding portions 451 connected to both ends in the left-right direction of the front base 13452, and the back surface of the front base 13452. The rear base 13453 that covers the above, the projecting member 13495 arranged between the front base 13452 and the rear base 13453, the columnar shaft member 13494 that pivotally supports the projecting member 13495, and the front base 13452. It mainly includes a rotating unit 13500, which is arranged on the front side in a rotatable state.

Like the front base 452 in the first embodiment, the front base 13452 is formed from a horizontally long rectangular plate-like body in front view, and the upper and lower ends are formed in a U-shaped cross section in which both upper and lower ends are bent toward the back side. The front base 13452 includes a second opening 13452p that opens in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and a rotating unit 13500 is arranged in a rotatable state at a substantially intermediate position in the longitudinal direction of the decorative member 13450.

The second opening 13452p is an opening through which the projecting member 13495, which will be described later, is inserted, and is substantially twice as large as the front view shape of the projecting member 13495 in the axial support direction (arrow LR direction) of the projecting member 13495. Is formed to the size of. Further, in the second opening 13452p, a wall portion 13452p1 projecting from the back surface base 13453 side is formed at an end portion in the left-right direction, and a first magnet 13452p2 having magnetism is arranged at both ends in the vertical direction.

A shaft member 13496 that pivotally supports the projecting member 13495, which will be described later, is inserted into the wall portion 13452p1. As a result, the projecting member 13495 is inserted into the second opening 13452p and is rotatable in the vertical direction with respect to the front base 13452.

The projecting member 13495 is a member that regulates the rotation of the rotating unit 13500 by inserting one end into a recess 13514 recessed on the back side of the rotating unit 13500, which will be described later, and is one end. Projects from the second opening 13452p to the front side (rotating unit 13500 side). Further, the projecting member 13495 has a shaft hole 13495a that opens in the longitudinal direction of the decorative member 13450, a bulging portion 13495b that bulges on both sides in the vertical direction at the other end, and inside the bulging portion 13495b. It mainly includes a second magnet 13495c to be arranged.

The shaft hole 13495a is a hole through which a shaft member 13496 that pivotally supports the projecting member 13495 is inserted, is formed to have an inner diameter larger than that of the shaft member 13496, and is inserted through the shaft member 13496. The shaft member 13494 is inserted into the shaft hole 13495a, and the coil spring SP1 is arranged on the outer peripheral surface on the central side in the left-right direction. The coil spring SP1 is arranged between the wall portion 13452p1 and the projecting member 13495 in a slightly compressed state. As a result, the projecting member 13495 is arranged outside in the left-right direction with respect to the second opening 13452p. Further, the coil spring SP1 urges the projecting member 13495 in a posture in which the longitudinal direction of the projecting member 13495 is parallel to the front-rear direction. As a result, the projecting member 13495 is in a state in which the longitudinal direction is orthogonal to the front side surface of the front base 13452.

The second magnet 13495c is a member having magnetism that attracts the first magnet 13452p2 described above, and when the projecting member 13495 is displaced by the rotation of the rotating unit 13500 described later, the second magnet 13495c is moved to the first magnet 13452p2. It is possible to maintain the projecting member in a displaced state by adsorbing it to the magnet. The first magnet 13452p2 is arranged only on the outer portion in the left-right direction of the second opening 13452p. As a result, the projecting member 13495 in a state where the second magnet 13495c is attracted to the first magnet 13452p2 is displaced to the inner portion in the left-right direction of the second opening 13452p, so that the second magnet 13495c and the first magnet 13452p2 are displaced. Adsorption is released.

The displacement member 13430 includes a drive-side sliding groove 431 formed in a long hole long in the longitudinal direction of the displacement member 13430 on the other side in the longitudinal direction, and a connecting shaft 5435 protruding toward the decorative member 13450 on one side in the longitudinal direction. A release protrusion 13439 that is pivotally supported at the protruding tip of the connecting shaft 5435 in a state of being rotatable in one direction. The connecting shaft 5435 is arranged in a sliding groove 5452j that opens in the back surface base 13453, and when the displacement member 13430 is displaced, the connecting shaft 5435 slides inside the sliding groove 5452j.

The release protrusion 13439 is formed in a columnar shape, and is axially supported by the tip of the connecting shaft 5435 and is moved back and forth in the axial direction by a torsion spring (not shown) arranged between the connecting shaft 5435 and the release protrusion 13439. Arranged in a directional orientation. Further, in the release protrusion 13439, the tip (arrow F direction side) of the release protrusion 13439 rotates inward in the longitudinal direction of the decorative member 13450 with respect to the connecting shaft 5435 in a state where the decorative member 13450 is arranged at the second position. It is possible. Further, the tip of the release protrusion 13439 is set to a length that does not overlap the protrusion member 13495 in the front-rear direction when one side of the protrusion member 13495 is arranged inside the recess 13514 of the rotating unit 13500. In a state where one side of the projecting member 13495 is arranged outside the recess 13514 of the rotating unit 13500 and the second magnet 13495c is attracted to the first magnet 13452p2, the length is set so as to overlap the projecting member 13495 in the front-rear direction. ..

As a result, when one side of the projecting member 13495 is arranged inside the recess 13514 of the rotating unit 13500, when the connecting shaft 5435 of the displacement member 13430 slides inside the sliding groove 5452j, the release protrusion 13439 Can be displaced without colliding with the projecting member 13495. Further, in a state where one side of the projecting member 13495 is arranged outside the recess 13514 of the rotating unit 13500 and the second magnet 13495c is attracted to the first magnet 13452p2, the connecting shaft 5435 of the displacement member 13430 has a sliding groove 5452j. When sliding inside, the release protrusion 13439 can collide with the projecting member 13495. As a result, the suction of the second magnet 13495c of the projecting member 13495 to the first magnet 13452p2 can be released.

The rotating unit 13500 is arranged below the upper surface base 13510 forming the upper side surface of the rotating unit 13500, the irradiation unit 530 (see FIG. 28) arranged below the upper surface base 5510, and the irradiation unit 530. An intermediate member 13540 to be installed, a reflector 560 (see FIG. 28) arranged below the intermediate member 540, a front cover 550 (see FIG. 28) arranged in front of the reflector 560, and an upper surface. A rotation transmission unit 570 (see FIG. 28) arranged on the back surface side of the base 510 and the lower surface base 5520, and a lower surface base 13520 forming a lower side surface of the rotation unit 5500 are mainly provided. ..

Further, the rotating unit 13500 is configured in a rectangular shape having one long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the front side of the rotating unit 13500 of the upper surface base 13510, the intermediate member 13540 and the lower surface base 13520 forming the outer surface is on the back side on both sides in the longitudinal direction. The recess 13514 is recessed toward.

The rotation unit 13500 is configured as a versa writer that produces an effect based on the afterimage of the light emitted from the irradiation unit 530, as in the first embodiment, and is configured as a rotation transmission unit 570 as in the first embodiment. The back base 571 is rotationally displaced about the center of the gear 571a1.

Further, the center of gravity of the rotating unit 13500 is set on the rotation axis O, and the rotation unit 13500 is in a horizontal orientation (the posture shown in FIGS. 57A and 57B). In this case, the rotation unit 13500 is suppressed from rotating about the rotation axis O due to its own weight.

Next, with reference to FIG. 90, the displacement mode of the projecting member 13495 will be described. 90 (a) and 90 (b) are cross-sectional views of the vertical displacement unit 13400. 90 (a) corresponds to the cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 13400 in FIG. 89 (a), and FIG. 90 (b) corresponds to the cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 13400 in FIG. 89 (b). Note that FIG. 90 (a) shows a state in which the rotating unit 13500 is rotated from the initial position, and FIG. 90 (b) shows a state in which the decorative member 13450 is arranged at the second position.

As shown in FIG. 90 (a), when the rotary unit 13500 is rotationally displaced from the state where one end of the projecting member 13495 is arranged inside the recess 13514 of the rotary unit 13500, the outer surface of the rotary unit 13500 is exposed. One side end of the projecting member 13495 is pressed in the vertical direction. As a result, the projecting member 13495 is rotationally displaced about the shaft member 13496. In this case, the bulging portion 13495b formed on the other side of the projecting member 13495 is brought close to the first magnet 13452p2 of the front base 13452. As a result, the second magnet 13495c arranged inside the bulging portion 13495b is attracted to the first magnet 13452p2. As a result, the projecting member 13495 is maintained in a state of being tilted in the direction of rotation about the shaft member 13494.

In this case, the amount of rotation of the projecting member 13495 that is pushed out and rotated by the rotating unit 13500 is such that the bulging portion 13495b forms a slight gap with the first magnet 13452p2, and the first magnet 13452p2. By the attraction with the second magnet 13495c, the gap between the bulging portion 13495b and the first magnet 13452p2 is rotated. As a result, when the projecting member 13495 is maintained in an inclined state, a predetermined gap can be formed between one side end of the projecting member 13495 and the back surface side of the rotating unit 13500. As a result, when the rotation of the rotating unit 13500 is continued, it is possible to prevent one side end of the projecting member 13495 from coming into contact with the rotating unit 13500.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90B, when the adsorption between the first magnet 13452p2 and the second magnet 13495c is released, the decorative member 13450 is displaced to the second position. When the decorative member 13450 is displaced to the second position, the tip of the release protrusion 13439 arranged on the displacement member 13430 is brought into contact with the other end (bulging portion 13495b) of the projecting member 13495. .. As a result, the projecting member 13495 is displaced inward in the left-right direction of the second opening 13452p with the displacement of the release protrusion 13439. As a result, the first magnet 13452p2 and the second magnet 13495c are displaced in the left-right direction, so that the attraction between the first magnet 13452p2 and the second magnet 13495c is released. As a result, the longitudinal direction of the projecting member 13495 is displaced to a posture parallel to the front-rear direction.

When the longitudinal direction of the projecting member 13495 is displaced to a posture parallel to the front-rear direction, the projecting member 13495 is in a state of not contacting the tip of the release protrusion 13439, as described above. As a result, the projecting member 13495 is pushed outward in the longitudinal direction of the decorative member 13450 by the urging force of the coil spring SP1 and is displaced to the position shown in FIG. 89 (b).

Further, in this case, the projecting member 13495 is arranged outside the decorative member 13450 in the left-right direction with respect to the release protrusion 13439. Therefore, when the decorative member 13450 is arranged at the second position, when the rotating unit 13500 is rotated and the projecting member 13495 is tilted so that the first magnet 13452p2 and the second magnet 13495c are attracted to each other. By displace the decorative member 13450 to the first or third position, the release protrusion 13439 is rotated with respect to the connecting shaft 5435, and the release protrusion 13439 is placed on the decorative member 13450 rather than the projecting member 13495. It can be arranged on the outside in the left-right direction.

Therefore, in the thirteenth embodiment, the restriction on the rotation of the rotating unit 13500 by the projecting member 13495 can be released by rotating the rotating unit 13500 regardless of the position of the decorative member 13450. The production area by rotation can be expanded.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-described embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is easy to make various modifications and improvements within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, a game machine may be configured by replacing or combining a part or all of one embodiment with a part or all of another one or a plurality of other embodiments.

In the first embodiment, the case where the sensor 630 of 1 is arranged in the center frame 600 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, two sensors 630 may be arranged symmetrically with respect to the center line in the left-right direction of the center frame 600. Three or more sensors 630 may be arranged.

In the first embodiment, the case where the sensor 630 is arranged on the frame body 610 of the center frame 600 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the sensor 630 may be arranged on the front cover 460 of the vertical displacement unit 400. In this case, since the irradiation range of the sensor 630 can be widened, the detection area of the sensor 630 can be expanded.

In the first embodiment, the case where the cover member 621 of the center cover 620 is formed as a curved surface whose front side is convex is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be bent in a substantially V-shaped cross section at the central portion on the front side. Further, it may be formed as a curved surface convex on the back surface side. Alternatively, a curved surface may be partially formed. At least, it is sufficient that the light emitted from the sensor 630 is reflected by the cover member 630 and the object in front of the game board 13 can be detected.

In the first embodiment, the cover member 621 of the center cover 620 has a role of making the player visually recognize the third symbol display device 81 arranged on the back side, and a case where the light emitted from the sensor 630 is used in combination. Although described, the region is not necessarily limited to this, and the region of the cover member 621 is a region of a region where the player can visually recognize the third symbol display device 81 and a region of reflecting the light emitted from the sensor 630. The area may be divided into. This modification will be described with reference to FIG. 56. FIG. 56 is a cross-sectional view of the center frame 600 as a modified example. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. Further, FIG. 56 corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 40 (b), and only the cross-sectional view of the center cover 620 is schematically shown. Further, in FIG. 56, the outer shape of the third symbol display device 81 arranged on the back side of the center frame 600 is illustrated by a two-dot chain line.

As shown in FIG. 56, the cover member 621 of the center frame 600 has a second region R2 at both ends in the left-right direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 56) and a center side (third symbol display device) of the second region R2 at both ends. A first region R1 is provided on the front side of the 81).

The first region R1 is a region that makes the third symbol display device 81 arranged on the back surface side of the cover member 621 visible to the player, and is formed from a relatively highly transparent light-transmitting material amount. The second region R2 is a region in which the light emitted from the sensor 630 is reflected on the front side (player side) of the game machine 13. The boundary position between the first region R1 and the second region R2 may be visible to the player located on the front side of the game machine 13, and is therefore abbreviated as the outer shape of the third symbol display device 81 in the front view. The same position is preferred. Further, in this modified example, the sensors 630 will be described in a manner of being arranged at both the left and right ends in order to facilitate understanding.

In this case, for example, the back side or the front side of the second region R2 may be coated with a member having high reflectance such as silver count. Alternatively, a silver sticker may be attached to the back side or the front side of the second region R2. In this case, since the light emitted from the sensor 630 can be easily reflected, the object on the front side of the game board 13 can be detected more reliably.

Alternatively, the portion of the second region R2 may have a curved shape that is convex toward the back surface side, or the portion of the second region R2 may be a flat surface. In this case, since the light emitted from the sensor 630 is reflected by the second region R2 and the range emitted to the front side can be widened, the detection range of the sensor 630 can be expanded.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the sensor 630 is arranged in front of the cover member 621 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the sensor 630 is arranged behind the cover member 621. It may be installed. In this case, the light emitted from the sensor 630 is transmitted through the cover member 621, so that an object on the front side of the game board 13 can be detected. Further, in this case, since the cover member 620 has a curved shape convex to the front side, the irradiation angle can be changed when the light emitted from the sensor 630 is incident on the cover member 630. That is, by transmitting the convex curved cover member 630 to the front side, the irradiation range of the sensor 630 emitted to the front side of the game board 13 can be widened.

In each of the above-described mobile phones, the case where the 2 inclined surfaces 761 (third throwing path KR3) of the distribution member 760 are formed with the same length has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the 2 inclined surfaces The length of 761 (third throwing path KR3) may be different from each other. In this case, since the time until each ball distributed to the left and right by the seesaw member 762 of the distribution member 720 is detected by the sensor SE can be made different in the left and right paths, the player can be given a hobby.

In the first and second embodiments, the case where the roller 492a is formed of an elastic body has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the roller 492a may be formed of a material having a lower elastic modulus than rubber or urethane, and an elastic member such as rubber or urethane may be externally fitted on the outer peripheral surface of the roller 492a. In this case, since the volume of the elastic body can be reduced, the manufacturing cost of the roller member 492 can be suppressed.

In the first embodiment, the case where the thickness of the cover member 621 of the center frame 600 is formed to be constant has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the thickness of the cover member 621 may be changed. For example, the cross-sectional shape of the cover member 621 may be formed into a substantially D shape. In this case, since the cover member 621 is a convex lens, the third symbol display device 81 and the decorative member 450 arranged on the back side of the cover member 621 can be displayed in a large size.

In the first embodiment, the case where the roller 492a is sandwiched between the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 and the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491 by utilizing the elastic deformation of the roller 492a has been described. The present invention is not limited to this, and the displacement of the roller 492a may be used. For example, even if the shaft portion 492b of the roller 492a is formed so as to be displaceable, the roller 492a is displaced, and the roller 492a is sandwiched between the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 and the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491. Good.

In this case, since the roller 492a can be sandwiched between the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 and the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491 without utilizing the elastic deformation of the roller 492a, the roller 492a can be made of rubber or urethane. It is not necessary to use a material having a high elastic modulus, and for example, it can be formed from a resin having a lower elastic modulus than rubber or urethane, so that the manufacturing cost can be suppressed accordingly.

In the third embodiment, the case where the roller 492a arranged at the upper part comes into contact with the decorative member 450 before the roller 492a arranged at the lower part has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the roller 492a is arranged at the upper part. The roller 492a to be formed may come into contact with the decorative member 450 after the roller 492a arranged below.

For example, the roller 492a arranged at the upper part of the regulation unit 490 at the initial position (the position where the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 and the roller 492a are separated from each other) is in the front-rear direction with the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 (FIG. 50). It may be configured to have a predetermined gap in (a) left-right direction). In this case, when the decorative member 450 is displaced to the first position, the time until it comes into contact with the roller 492a is delayed as compared with the first and third embodiments, so that the drive motor 441 that drives the decorative member 450 The time during which the load (resistance) increases can be shortened.

In the first embodiment, the case where the irradiation control unit 544 and the LED 532 are arranged in contact with each other has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a predetermined case is defined between the irradiation control unit 544 and the LED facing each other. Gap may be formed. In this case, since both ends of the irradiation hole 543 can be opened, it is possible to prevent air from staying (retaining) inside the irradiation hole 543. That is, since an air flow can be created inside the irradiation hole 543, the heat generated by the operation of the LED 532 can be efficiently cooled.

In the first embodiment, the case where the rough surface processing is formed into an uneven shape has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the rough surface processing may be a surface consisting of only protrusions (projections). , It may be a surface consisting only of recesses. Further, the rough surface processing may be extended as a strip or a groove. Further, the concave and convex cross-sectional shapes may be circular, keystroke, polygonal diameter, or a combination thereof. That is, the shape of the unevenness is arbitrary as long as a portion higher than the reference position and a portion lower than the reference position are formed, a plurality of portions (surfaces) capable of reflecting light are formed, and diffuse reflection is possible.

In each of the above embodiments, a smoke generator (smoke generating means) for generating smoke is provided on the back side of the game board 13 (base plate 60), and the smoke generated from the smoke generator is displaced in the displacement region of the rotating unit 500. It may be introduced in (rotation area). That is, an atmosphere filled with smoke may be formed in the space between the third symbol display device 81 and the center frame 600 (center cover 620). As a result, the light emitted from the LED 532 can be visually recognized by the player while passing through the smoke, and the blinking of the LED 532 can be highlighted. Further, while hiding the rotating unit 500 or the member on the back side thereof by smoke (making it difficult for the player to see), only the blinking of the LED 532 can be visually recognized. Therefore, the effect of the LED 532 (light) can be enhanced.

In the conventional product, it is difficult to fill the above-mentioned space with smoke because the smoke is pushed out to the outer peripheral side as the rotating unit rotates. Therefore, it was difficult to obtain the effect of smoke. On the other hand, according to the rotating unit 500 in each of the above-described embodiments, the blower holes 512 and 522 are opened in the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520, and the back surface of the structure in which the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 are assembled. Since the side is opened, the outside air taken in from the ventilation holes 512 and 522 can be exhausted from the back side and circulated. Therefore, the above-mentioned space can be filled with smoke (remaining around the rotating unit 500). As a result, the LED 532 can be made to blink in an atmosphere filled with smoke, and the above-mentioned effect can be obtained.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the decorative members 450, 5450, 7450, 8450, 9450 of the vertical displacement units 400, 5400, 6400, 7400, 8400, 9400 are displaced in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) has been described. , Not necessarily limited to this. For example, the vertical displacement units 400, 5400, 6400, 7400, 8400, 9400 are arranged in a state of being rotated by approximately 90 degrees in the front view, and the decorative members 450, 5450, 7450, 8450, 9450 are arranged in the left-right direction (arrow L). It may be in a state of being displaced in the −R direction).

In the fifth embodiment, the case where the inner surface of the recess 5514 or one side end of the displacement member 5430 is formed of the same member has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, either the inner surface of the recess 5514 or one end surface of the displacement member 5430 may be formed of a rubber-like member that is more easily elastically deformed than a metal material or a hard resin material.

As a result, when the inner surface of the recess 5514 and the end surface on one side of the displacement member 5430 are displaced while being in contact with each other, it is possible to prevent the contact surface from being scratched. Further, in this case, by bringing the rubber-like member into contact with the elastically displaced state, the frictional resistance when the inner surface of the recess 5514 and the end surface on one side of the displacement member 5430 are brought into contact with each other is increased. It is possible to prevent the displacement member 5430 or the rotating unit 500 from swinging due to vibration or the like input to the pachinko machine 10.

In the fifth embodiment, the case where one side end of the displacement member 5430 is inserted inside the recess 5514 recessed in the rotary unit 500 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the rotary unit 500 is not necessarily limited to this. The rotation of the rotation unit 500 may be restricted by inserting the protrusions projecting into the recessed portion at one side end of the displacement member 5430.

In this case, it is preferable that the rotation shaft of the rotation unit 500 is arranged on a straight line connecting the rotation shaft and the protrusion of the displacement member 5430. According to this, when the displacement member 5430 is rotationally displaced, one side end of the displacement member 5430 can be prevented from being displaced in a direction orthogonal to the insertion direction of the displacement member 5430 into the recess. As a result, the displacement member 5430 can be easily inserted into the recess.

In the fifth embodiment, the case where the connecting shaft 5435 is arranged on the displacement member 5430 and the sliding groove 5452j is formed on the front base 5452 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the connecting shaft 5435 may be arranged on the front base 5452, and a sliding groove 5452j may be formed in the displacement member 5430 to connect the two.

In the fifth embodiment, the case where the drive of the drive motor 441 that drives the decorative member 5450 is transmitted to the decorative member 5450 via the displacement member 5430 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the drive of the drive motor 441 that drives the decorative member 5450 may be transmitted to the decorative member 5450 by the rack and pinion. In this case, it is not necessary to form the drive side sliding groove 431 formed on the other side of the displacement member 5430.

In the sixth embodiment, the case where the concave groove 6456a is formed in the gear 456 for detecting the position of rotation has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the concave groove 6456a may be formed in the gear 571a1 formed in the rotating unit 500, or the concave groove 6456a may be formed in another gear for transmitting the drive for rotating the rotating unit 500. .. Further, the concave groove 6456a may be formed in a linearly moving gear such as a rack instead of the gear that rotates and transmits the drive.

In the sixth embodiment, the case where the concave groove 6456a is formed in the gear 456 having the same gear ratio (outer diameter) as the gear 571a1 arranged in the rotating unit 500 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. .. For example, the gear ratio of the gear 456 may be set to a value twice that of the gear 571a1 (the outer circumference is doubled). In this case, when the stop position of the rotating unit 500 deviates from the normal position and is stopped, the amount of the misalignment of the stop position of the gear 456 can be increased. Therefore, the regulation protrusion 6436 can be brought into contact with the inner surface of the concave groove 6456a of the gear 456 to facilitate the rotation of the gear 456, and the rotation unit 500 can be easily arranged at a normal position.

In the sixth embodiment, the case where the concave groove 6456a is formed only in the region R1 of the gear 456 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a second concave groove 6456a may be formed in the region opposite to the region R1 with the virtual line KS3 as the target.

In this case, by inserting the regulating protrusion 6436 into the second concave groove 6456a, the rotation of the rotating unit 500 can be regulated at a position 180 degrees out of phase with the initial position. That is, a plurality of positions for restricting rotation can be formed.

In the sixth embodiment, the rotation of the rotating unit 500 is restricted by arranging the regulating protrusion 6436 of the displacement member 6430 arranged on the back surface side of the decorative member 6450 inside the concave groove 6456a of the gear 456. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by projecting the regulating protrusion 6436 of the displacement member 6430 to the front of the front base 6453 and arranging the regulating protrusion 6436 inside the recess 5514 of the rotating unit 5500 in the fifth embodiment, the rotation of the rotating unit 5500 can be rotated. It may be regulated. In this case, the rotation unit 5500 may not be regulated by the regulating protrusion 6436, and may be regulated by, for example, the connecting shaft 5435.

In this case, in the fifth embodiment, the displacement member 5430 for displace the decorative member 5450 in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) is arranged on the player side to make it easier for the player to see. Since the displacement member 6430 can be arranged on the back side of the decorative member 6450, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the displacement member 6430. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

In the seventh embodiment, when the displacement unit 7900 is projected to the front side, the case where the displacement unit 7900 is brought into contact with the displacement member 5430 to regulate the displacement of the displacement unit 7900 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. Not limited to this, when the displacement unit 7900 retracts to the back surface side, the back surface side of the displacement unit 7900 may be brought into contact with the displacement member 5430 to regulate the displacement of the displacement unit 7900.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the shafted support portion 8942 of the rotating unit 8940 is projected on the slide unit 8930 side with a rectangular cross section of a certain size has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the cross section projecting toward the through hole 8942 side may be formed to be small. This modification will be described with reference to FIG. 91.

FIG. 91 (a) is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 8400 as a modification, and FIG. 91 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 8400 in the XCIb-XCIb line of FIG. 91 (a). In FIG. 91A, the outer shape of the shaft-mounted branch 8942 is shown by a chain line.

As shown in FIG. 91, the shafted support portion 8942 is a portion supported by the slide unit 8930 described above, and a protruding tip is arranged in a space formed by a pair of recesses 893a of the slide unit 8930. Further, the shafted support portion 8942 mainly includes a through hole 8942a penetrating the protruding tip portion in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) and an insertion portion 8942c bulging on both sides in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction). Prepare for.

The insertion portion 8942c is formed in a substantially triangular cross section and bulges toward one side of the displacement member 5430. Further, in the insertion portion 8942c, the bulging tip portion has a bulging distance in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) toward the projecting direction of the shafted branch portion 8942, and the bulging tip portion has a bulging tip portion. It is formed along the radial outward direction from the center of the through hole 8942. As a result, when the slide unit 8930 is slid and comes into contact with one side end of the displacement member 5430, one of the displacement members 5430 is regulated by the contact with the one side end of the displacement member 5430. The contact area with the side end can be increased. Therefore, when the slide unit 8930 is displaced to the maximum extent, the contact area between the shafted support portion 8942 and the displacement member 5430 can be maximized, so that the force acting on the contact surface can be dispersed. It is possible to prevent the displacement member 5430 and the rotating unit 8942 from being damaged.

Further, a receiving portion 5438 is formed at one end of the displacement member 5430 so as to be recessed in a substantially triangular cross section. The inner edge of the receiving portion 5438 is formed in a shape corresponding to the outer edge of the insertion portion 8942c described above. Further, the receiving portion 5438 is set at the same height as the inserting portion 8942c in a state where the decorative member 8950 is arranged at the second position. As a result, when the slide unit 8930 is displaced in the left-right direction, the insertion portion 8942c can be inserted into the receiving portion 5438 and brought into contact with each other. In this case, since the insertion portion 8942c and the receiving portion 5438 are formed in a triangular shape having substantially the same cross-sectional shape, the insertion portion 5430 is inserted when the stop position of the displacement member 5430 is slightly deviated from the normal position. The displacement member 5430 can be rotated to a normal position by utilizing the mutual inclination of the portion 8942c and the receiving portion 5438.

In the ninth embodiment, the case where the protruding portion 9430d of the displacement member 9430 is inserted into the recessed portion (inserted portion 9941a) of the rotating unit 9940 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, for example. The protruding portion 9430d may be arranged at a position where it collides with the end portion of the rotating unit 9940 in the displacement direction.

In the ninth embodiment, when the displacement member 9430 is displaced, both the slide unit 9930 and the rotating unit 9940 are displaced, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the displacement members 9430 are connected to different drive sources. It may be possible to displace each independently.

In the tenth to twelfth embodiments described above, the case where the side wall 10515 of the rotating unit 10500 is formed as a flat surface has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be formed as a recess recessed on the rotation shaft side as in the fifth embodiment.

In the fifth embodiment, the case where the rotation of the rotating unit 500 is restricted by arranging one side end of the displacement member 5430 inside the recess 5514 of the rotating unit 500 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not something that can be done. For example, one side end of the displacement member 5430 may be arranged above the rotation unit 500 in the rotation region of the rotation unit 500 to regulate the rotation of the rotation unit 500. This modification will be described with reference to FIG. 92 (a). FIG. 92A is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 5400 as a modification. In FIG. 92, the sliding groove 14452j and the connecting shaft 5435 are shown by chain lines. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 92A, in the decorative member 5450 of the vertical displacement unit 5400 as a modification, a sliding groove 14452j formed in the front base 5452 is formed above the rotation axis O of the rotation unit 500. Will be done. Further, one of the sliding grooves 14452j is formed in a long elongated hole, and the longitudinal direction thereof is formed toward the rotation axis O.

As a result, when the decorative member 5450 is displaced from the first position or the third position to the second position, the sliding groove 14452j is placed on one side end of the displacement member 5430 from above the outside in the longitudinal direction of the rotating unit 500. Can be displaced along the longitudinal direction of and placed above the rotating unit 500. Further, when the decorative member 5450 is displaced from the second position to the first position or the third position, it is possible to easily form a gap between the one side end portion of the displacement member 5430 and the upper surface of the rotating unit 500. As a result, the displacement member 5430, which is rotationally displaced when the decorative member 5450 is displaced from the second position to the first or third position (particularly when it is displaced to the third position), hits the outer surface of the rotating unit 500. It is possible to suppress contact.

In the fifth embodiment, when the decorative member 5450 is arranged at the first position or the third position, the virtual line KS1 and the virtual line KS2 are arranged in a substantially orthogonal state to form a dead center relationship. Although described above, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the virtual line KS1 and the virtual line KS2 may be arranged at a second position in a state of being substantially orthogonal to each other.

This modification will be described with reference to FIG. 92 (b). FIG. 92B is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 5400 as a modification. Note that FIG. 92 (b) corresponds to the front view of FIG. 59 (b). The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 92B, in the vertical displacement unit 5400 as a modification, the transmission gear 443 and the transmission gear 15442 meshed with the transmission gear 442 are arranged between the transmission gear 443 and the transmission gear 442. .. As a result, the rotation shaft of the transmission gear 443 can be arranged below the displacement member 5430 in the regulated state with the rotation unit 5500.

Further, in the vertical displacement unit 5400 as a modification, when one side of the displacement member 5430 is arranged inside the recess 5514 of the rotary unit 5500, the rotation shaft of the transmission gear 443 and the shaft of the protrusion 443a of the transmission gear 443 are connected. The virtual line KS1 to be connected is set to be substantially orthogonal to the virtual line KS2 connecting the axis of the through hole 433 of the displacement member 5430 and the protrusion 443a of the transmission gear 443.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the displacement member 5430 from rotating when a driving force for rotation is applied to the rotating unit 5500 in a state where rotation is restricted by the displacement member 5430 due to poor control of the pachinko machine 10. That is, when the rotation of the rotating unit 5500 is restricted by the displacement member 5430, the displacement member 5430 and the transmission gear 443 have a dead center relationship, so that the external force input to one side of the displacement member 5430 transmits. It is possible to suppress the rotation of the gear 443. As a result, even when the rotating unit 5500 is given a driving force for rotation due to poor control or the like, the rotation of the rotating unit 5500 can be regulated.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item, a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple times (for example, two or three times) a big hit state occurs. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as an ale-pachi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine.

In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted to determine the symbol effective line, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device for displaying the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever) is caused. The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. It becomes a "slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value, provided that the combination of time identification information is specific". In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variably displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and for example, due to the operation of the stop button or a predetermined amount. As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated that gives the player a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the locations where game machines are installed can be solved.

The concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown below.

<Concept of the invention using the center cover 620 as an example>
A game board having an opening in the center, a liquid crystal display device visibly arranged through the opening of the game board, and the liquid crystal display device by emitting light and receiving reflected light from the object of light. In a gaming machine provided with a sensor device for detecting the presence of the object on the front side of the liquid crystal display device, the liquid crystal display device is provided on the front side, and at least the front surface is formed as a convex curved surface and a light transmitting material. A game machine A1 characterized by including a front member made of.

Here, a game board having an opening in the center, a liquid crystal display device visibly arranged through the opening of the game board, and an object of the light (for example, a player's hand) that emits light. A gaming machine equipped with a sensor device (motion sensor) that detects the presence of an object on the front side of a liquid crystal display device by receiving reflected light is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-208139). In this case, if the sensor device is visibly exposed to the player, the player's interest is impaired. Therefore, the sensor device is arranged on the back side of the decorative member, making it difficult for the player to see. The sensor device emits light through the open portion on the side of the decorative member and receives the reflected light from the object of the light to detect the presence of the object. The sensor device opens the side of the decorative member. The farther away it is from the part (backward to the back side), the harder it is for the player to see it, but the range in which the object can be detected becomes narrower, and the sensor device is an open part on the side of the decorative member. The closer it is to the object, the wider the range in which the object can be detected can be widened, but it becomes easier for the player to see it. That is, there is a problem that it is difficult to secure a range in which an object can be detected while making it difficult for the player to visually recognize the sensor device.

On the other hand, according to the game machine A1, it is arranged on the front side of the liquid crystal display device, and at least the front surface is formed as a convex curved surface and includes a front member made of a light transmitting material, so that light is emitted from the sensor device. The emitted light can be reflected by the front member to reach the object, and the reflected light by the object can be reflected by the front member to reach the sensor device. Therefore, the sensor device can be arranged so as to be separated from the open portion on the side of the decorative member (retracted to the back side), so that the sensor device is hard to be seen by the player and the object is placed. A detectable range can be secured. Since the front member is made of a light-transmitting material, the visibility of the design displayed on the liquid crystal display device can be ensured.

Further, since the front surface is a convex curved surface, when the light emitted from the sensor device is reflected by the front surface of the front member, the reflection angle (reflection angle) is set to an acute angle at a position close to the sensor device. On the other hand, at a position far from the sensor device, the angle of reflection (each reflection) can be made an acute angle, and the range in which the object can be detected can be easily expanded accordingly. The same applies to the case where the light reflected by the object is reflected in front of the front member.

In the game machine A1, the front member is characterized in that at least the thickness dimension of the portion formed as the curved surface is set to a substantially constant value.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effect of the game machine A1, at least the thickness dimension of the portion formed as the curved surface of the front member is set to a substantially constant value, so that the front member acts as a convex lens. It is possible to ensure the visibility of the design displayed on the liquid crystal display device. Further, since a space can be formed on the back side of the front member, a space for displacement of other members (displaceable members) can be secured accordingly.

The game machine A2 includes a displacement member formed so as to be displaceable between the liquid crystal display device and the front member, and the front member has a first portion of the peripheral edge of the front member on the front side of the second portion. A game machine A3 characterized in that it is arranged at a position.

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effect of the game machine A2, the front member is arranged at a position where the first portion of the peripheral edge of the front member is on the front side of the second part. The first portion can be used as a passage when the displacement member is displaced between the back side of the board and the back side of the front member. On the other hand, since the second portion of the peripheral edge of the front member is located on the back side of the first portion, the curvature of the front member can be increased by that amount within the limited space.

The first portion of the front member is arranged at a position substantially identical to the back surface of the game board or at a position on the front side of the back surface of the game board, and the second part of the front surface member is closer to the back surface of the game board. A game machine A4 characterized in that it is arranged at a position on the back side.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effect of the game machine A3, the first part of the front member is arranged at a position substantially the same as the back surface of the game board or on the front side of the back side of the game board. It is possible to more reliably suppress the displacement member from interfering with the first portion, and the displacement member can be increased in size accordingly. Further, since the second part of the front member is arranged at a position on the back side of the game board, the curvature of the front member can be made larger, and the front of the front member is illuminated by that amount. It can be easily used as a reflective surface. That is, it is possible to secure a range in which an object can be detected while making the sensor device difficult for the player to see.

In the game machine A3 or A4, a center frame is provided on the inner edge of the opening of the game board, and the displacement member is formed so as to be displaceable between the back side of the game board and the back side of the front member. A game machine A5 comprising a main body member to be formed and a rotating member rotatably arranged on the main body member, wherein a second portion of the front member is connected to the center frame.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effect of the game machine A3 or A4, since the second part is connected to the center frame, the displacement member (main body member) is displaced to the back side of the front member and the rotating member is rotated. The wind generated by this can be blocked by the second portion (front member). As a result, it is possible to prevent the flow of the sphere from being affected by the action of the wind. Further, even if wind is generated by the rotation of the rotating member and dust or dust is blown off by the wind, it can be blocked by the second part (front member), so that the blown dust or dust emits light from the sensor device. -It is possible to prevent the detection accuracy from being lowered due to flying up on the light path of the received light.

In the game machine A5, the center frame includes a stage in which a ball is rotatably formed, and a second portion of the front member is connected to a range including at least the stage of the center frame. Game machine A6.

Here, it has been conventionally known that a back wall is erected on a stage of a center frame so that a ball rolling on the stage does not fall to the back side. However, in such a conventional product, the wind generated by the rotation of the rotating member wraps around from the standing tip of the back wall erected from the stage to the front side, or is folded back by the glass plate on the front side of the game board. It affects the ball that rolls on the stage. On the other hand, in order to prevent the influence of the wind on the sphere that rolls on the stage, the back wall is curved to the front side so as to cover the circumference of the sphere of the stage (that is, a closed passage is formed). , Since it becomes difficult for the player to see the ball rolling on the stage, the interest of the game is impaired.

On the other hand, according to the game machine A6, in addition to the effect of the game machine A5, the second part of the front member is connected to a range including at least the stage in the center frame, so that the rotating member is rotated. The wind generated by this can be blocked by the second part (front member). As a result, since it is not necessary to cover the periphery of the stage, it is possible to make it easier for the player to see the ball rolling on the stage, and to prevent the flow of the ball from being affected by the action of the wind.

In the game machine A5 or A6, the first portion of the front member is arranged at a predetermined distance from the inner edge or the center frame at the opening of the game board.

According to the game machine A7, in either the game machine A5 or A6, the first portion of the front member is arranged at a predetermined distance from the inner edge or the center frame at the opening of the game board. , The back side and the front side of the game board and the front member can be communicated with each other through such a predetermined interval. As a result, it is possible to prevent the heat generated from the displacement member (main body member or rotating member) from being trapped on the back side of the game board and the front member.

In the game machine A7, the first portion of the front member is formed in a region on the upper side in the vertical direction of the peripheral edge of the front member.

According to the game machine A8, in addition to the effect of the game machine A7, the first portion of the front member is formed in the upper region in the vertical direction of the peripheral edge of the front member, so that the rotating member is rotated. The wind generated in the above can be flowed toward the upper area of the game area (the area above the opening of the game board), and the action of the wind can suppress the influence of the flow of the ball. That is, the sphere that flows down the upper region of the game region is an initial sphere that is launched from the launcher and flows into the game region, and since its speed is relatively high, for example, it rolls on the stage of the center frame. Compared to a moving sphere, it is less susceptible to wind. In other words, the wind can flow toward an area where the sphere is less susceptible to the effects of the wind. Therefore, the rotation speed of the rotating member can be increased by that amount, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

Here, when heat is generated from the displacement member (main body member or rotating member), the air warmed by the heat is raised, and the first portion of the front member is on the upper side of the peripheral edge of the front member in the vertical direction. A gap (predetermined interval) formed in the region, that is, a gap (predetermined interval) for communicating the back side and the front side of the game board and the front member can be formed on the upper side. As a result, the heat generated from the displacement member (main body member or rotating member) is easily flowed to the front side of the game board and the front member through the gap, and the heat is trapped on the back side of the game board and the front member. Can be suppressed.

In any of the game machines A1 to A8, the front surface of the front member is formed as a curved surface whose normal direction is directed downward at least in the horizontal direction.

Here, since the front member is arranged on the front side of the liquid crystal display device, it faces the player's face substantially (faces directly in front). Therefore, when the front surface of the front member is formed as a convex curved surface, the light from the fluorescent lamp or other game machine installed on the ceiling in the store is reflected toward the player, and the player feels dazzling. There is a risk that the visibility of the liquid crystal display device will deteriorate (the light from a fluorescent lamp or other game machine will be reflected on the front member, making it difficult to see the liquid crystal display device).

On the other hand, according to the game machine A9, in addition to the effects of the game machines A1 to A8, the front surface of the front member is formed as a curved surface whose normal direction is at least downward from the horizontal direction. The light incident on the front surface of the front member can be reflected downward. That is, when the light from the fluorescent lamp or other game machine installed on the ceiling in the store is incident on the front of the front member, it is possible to suppress the light from being reflected toward the player, and as a result, It is possible to prevent the player from feeling dazzling and deteriorating the visibility of the liquid crystal display device.

In the game machine A9, the first portion of the front member is formed in a region on the upper side in the vertical direction of the peripheral edge of the front member, and the front member has at least a thickness dimension of a portion formed as the curved surface. The gaming machine A10 is characterized in that it is set to a constant value and the horizontal component becomes larger toward the front surface located above in the vertical direction.

According to the game machine A10, in addition to the effect of the game machine A9, the first portion of the front member is formed in the upper region of the peripheral edge of the front member in the vertical direction, and the front member is formed at least as a curved surface. The thickness dimension of the part is set to a substantially constant value, and the horizontal component becomes larger toward the front located above the vertical direction, so that the air warmed by the heat generated from the displacement member (main body member or rotating member) Can be raised along the back surface of the front member, and the raised air (heat) is communicated with the first portion of the front member (the game board and the back side and the front side of the front member (predetermined). It can be easily flowed from the interval)) to the front side of the game board and the front member. As a result, it is possible to prevent heat from being trapped on the back side of the game board and the front member.

<Concept of the invention using the sorting device 700 as an example>
In a gaming machine comprising a passage member forming a passage through which a ball can pass and having a bent portion formed in a part of the passage member, the passage member includes an opening formed in a side wall of the bent portion. A game machine B1 characterized by.

Here, a game machine including a passage member that forms a passage through which a ball can pass is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-97764). In this case, a bent portion is also formed in a part of the passage member. By forming the bent portion, the throwing direction of the ball (the position where the ball flows out from the passage to the game area) can be changed, so that the degree of freedom in layout can be increased. However, when a bent portion is formed in a part of the passage member as in the conventional game machine described above, the flow of the ball in the bent portion tends to be stagnant. Therefore, when passing through the bent portion in a state where a plurality of balls are connected, the following ball catches up with the preceding ball, and the following ball presses against the side wall, so that both cannot roll. , There was a problem that ball clogging may occur.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B1, since the passage member includes an opening formed in the side wall of the bent portion, when passing through the bent portion in a state where a plurality of balls are connected, the passage member is rearward to the preceding ball. Even if the moving ball catches up, it is difficult to press the preceding ball against the side wall, and it is possible to easily continue the rolling of both. As a result, the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

The bent portion is formed by connecting the first portion of the passage member and the downstream side of the first portion and forming the first portion and the second portion in which the passing direction of the sphere is different. Means the range to be done. In this case, the first portion and the second portion may be passages extending linearly, curved passages, or these. It may be a passage having a combined shape of.

In the game machine B1, the bent portion of the passage member includes a vertical passage extending in a substantially vertical direction and an extending passage extending downward from the vertical passage, and the opening is the vertical passage. The gaming machine B2, characterized in that it is formed in a region where the passage and the extended passage intersect.

According to the game machine B2, in addition to the effect of the game machine B1, the bent portion of the passage member is a vertical passage extending in a substantially vertical direction and an extended passage extending downwardly and inclined from the vertical passage. Since the opening is formed in the region where the vertical passage and the extended passage intersect with each other, the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

That is, the region where the vertical passage and the extended passage intersect is a position where the ball flowing down (falling) through the vertical passage changes direction and starts rolling in the extended direction of the extended passage, and precedes the vertical passage. It is easy for the ball that follows the ball to catch up. Therefore, when the ball that follows the preceding ball presses against the side wall, both cannot roll, and ball clogging is likely to occur. On the other hand, according to the game machine B2, since an opening is formed in the region where the vertical passage and the extended passage intersect, even if the following ball catches up with the preceding ball, the preceding ball is used as the side wall. It can be difficult to press, and it is easy to continue the rolling of both. As a result, the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

In the game machine B2, the opening is a region where the vertical passage and the extended passage intersect, and is formed on the left and right side walls when the ball rolls along the extending direction of the extended passage. A game machine B3 characterized by the fact that.

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effect of the game machine B2, the opening is an area where the vertical passage and the extension passage intersect, and when the ball rolls along the extension direction of the extension passage. Since it is formed on the left and right side walls of the above, even if the following ball catches up with the preceding ball, it is difficult to press the preceding ball against the left and right side walls, and it is possible to easily continue the rolling of both. As a result, the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

In the game machine B3, the area where the vertical passage and the extended passage intersect, and the back side when the ball rolls along the bottom wall serving as the rolling surface and the extending direction of the extended passage. The gaming machine B4 is characterized in that an inclined surface is formed on the side wall of the extending passage so as to be inclined downward at an angle larger than the downward inclination of the extended passage.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effect of the game machine B3, the area where the vertical passage and the extension passage intersect, along the bottom wall serving as the rolling surface and the extension direction of the extension passage. On the side wall on the back side when the ball rolls, an inclined surface that is inclined downward at an angle larger than the downward inclination of the extended passage is formed, so that the ball flowing down (falling) in the vertical passage changes direction. When starting rolling in the extending direction of the extension passage, the ball can be quickly rolled by utilizing the downward inclination of the inclined surface. This makes it easier to roll the leading ball before the trailing ball catches up, and the trailing ball rolls the ball on the back side (along the extension direction of the extension passage). Since it is possible to prevent the ball from being pressed against the side wall on the back side), it is possible to easily continue the rolling of both. As a result, the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

The slope of the inclined surface may be a linear slope, a curved slope, or a combination of these slopes. Further, the angle of the downward inclination of the inclined surface does not have to be larger than the angle of the downward inclination of the extension passage in the entire area of the inclined surface, and the angle of the downward inclination at least in a part of the inclined surface is extended. It is sufficient if the angle is larger than the angle of the downward inclination of the passage.

In any of the game machines B2 to B4, a game board in which a game area is formed on the front side is provided, and at least the area where the vertical passage and the extended passage intersect in the bent portion of the passage member is the game. A game machine B5 characterized in that it is arranged on the front side of the board.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines B2 to B4, at least the region where the vertical passage and the extended passage intersect (that is, the portion where the opening is formed) in the bent portion of the passage member. ) Is arranged on the front side of the game board. Therefore, when a ball is clogged at the bent portion of the passage member, the glass plate is opened to open the ball, which is clogged at the bent portion on the front side of the game board. Can be accessed from the opening. Therefore, it is possible to improve the workability of the work of clearing the ball clogging.

In any of the game machines B2 to B5, the opening is a side wall in a region where the vertical passage and the extended passage intersect, and is a height position corresponding to the radius of the sphere from the bottom wall serving as a rolling surface. A game machine B6 characterized in that it is formed in a range including.

According to the game machine B6, in any of the game machines B2 to B5, the opening is a side wall in the region where the vertical passage and the extended passage intersect, and corresponds to the radius of the sphere from the bottom wall serving as the rolling surface. Since it is formed in a range including the height position where the ball flows down (falls) in the vertical passage, when the ball reaches the bottom wall of the extended passage, the ball can be easily received in the opening. Therefore, even when the following ball catches up with the preceding ball, it is possible to make it difficult to press the preceding ball against the side wall, and it is possible to easily continue the rolling of both. As a result, the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

In any of the game machines B2 to B6, a game board in which a game area is formed on the front side is provided, and at least the area where the vertical passage and the extended passage intersect in the bent portion of the passage member is the game. The game machine B7 is arranged on the front side of the board, and the opening is formed in a size through which a ball can pass.

According to the game machine B7, in any of the game machines B2 to B6, at least the region where the vertical passage and the extended passage intersect (that is, the portion where the opening is formed) in the bent portion of the passage member is the game. Since it is arranged on the front side of the board and the opening is formed in a size that allows the ball to pass through, it is possible to easily suppress the occurrence of ball clogging.

That is, when the size of the opening is such that the ball cannot pass through, it is usually possible to use the opening to make it difficult to push the preceding ball against the side wall, except for the trailing ball. A form is formed in which the preceding sphere is pressed against the center of the opening, and the preceding sphere may be internally fitted (fitted) into the opening. In this case, the rolling of the trailing ball is hindered by the ball fitted in the opening, and the ball is clogged.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B7, even when a form is formed in which the following ball pushes the preceding ball against the center of the opening, the preceding ball is pushed from the opening to the outside of the passage member (on the front side of the game board). It can be discharged to the game area), and it is possible to prevent the preceding ball from being internally fitted (fitted) into the opening. As a result, the rolling of the trailing ball can be continued, so that the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

Further, in this way, an opening is formed in a size that allows the ball to pass through, and the opening is arranged on the front side (that is, the game area) of the game board, so that the ball flowing down the game area can be prevented. It can flow from the opening into the passage member. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. For example, when a sensor for detecting a winning ball is arranged downstream of the bent portion, in addition to the ball flowing into the passage member from the upstream of the bent portion, the ball flowing into the passage member from the opening is also used as the winning opening. It can be detected. In particular, in this case, since the opening (the area where the vertical passage and the extended passage intersect) is arranged on the front side of the game board, the player can visually recognize the ball flowing into the passage member from the opening. be able to.

The game machine B8 is characterized in that the lower end of the inner edge of the opening is set at a position separated from the bottom wall of the extension passage by a predetermined distance in the game machine 7.

According to the game machine B8, in addition to the effect of the game machine B7, the lower end of the inner edge of the opening is set at a position separated by a predetermined distance from the bottom wall of the extension passage, so that the lower end of the inner edge of the opening and the extension passage are set. A side wall can be left (formed) between the bottom wall and the wall. Therefore, even when the opening is formed to a size that allows the ball to pass through, it is possible to prevent the ball from unnecessarily flowing out from the passage member to the outside (game area) through the opening.

In the game machines B1 to B8, the passage member is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the bent portion, is connected to the upstream side of the bent portion, and extends substantially linearly along the width direction of the game region. A pair of the passage members are arranged in a posture in which the upstream side of the inclined passage is located at the center in the width direction of the game area and the bent portion is located outside in the width direction of the game area. The gaming machine B9, wherein the winning device is positioned between the bent portions of the passage member of the above.

According to the game machine B9, the passage member is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the bent portion, is connected to the upstream side of the bent portion, and is an inclined passage extending substantially linearly along the width direction of the game area. A pair of passage members are arranged in a posture in which the upstream side of the inclined passage is positioned at the center in the width direction of the game area and the bent portion is located outside in the width direction of the game area, and the bent portion in the pair of passage members. The winning device is located between.

In this case, if the angle of the downward inclination of the inclined passage is small (the downward inclination is gentle), the flow velocity of the ball becomes low, and the ball is likely to be clogged at the bent portion. On the other hand, if the angle of the downward inclination of the inclined passage is large (the downward inclination is steep), the flow speed of the ball can be increased and the ball clogging at the bent portion can be less likely to occur. The space in the required height direction becomes large, and it becomes difficult to arrange the winning device.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B9, since an opening is formed in the side wall of the bent portion, it is possible to prevent ball clogging at the bent portion, so that the angle of downward inclination of the inclined passage is reduced accordingly ( The downward slope can be made gentle). As a result, the space in the height direction required for arranging the inclined passage can be suppressed, and the winning device can be arranged. That is, the arrangement of the passage member and the winning device described in the game machine B9 is not possible with the conventional product, and is made possible only by forming an opening in the side wall of the bent portion as described above. ..

In the game machine B9, a game board in which a game area is formed on the front side is provided, and at least a region where at least the vertical passage and the extended passage intersect in the bent portion of the passage member is on the front side of the game board. At least a gap through which a ball can pass is formed between a portion of the bent portion of the passage member arranged on the front side of the game board and the lower edge portion of the game area. A game machine B10 characterized by.

Here, an opening is formed in the center of the game board, and the liquid crystal display device is made visible to the player through the opening. In recent years, with the demand for larger liquid crystal display devices, the opening in the center of the game board has also become larger, so that the space between the lower edge of the opening in the center of the game board and the lower edge of the game area is narrowed. Therefore, in the conventional product, it is difficult to arrange the passage member and the member corresponding to the winning device described in the game machine 9 in the space between the lower edge of the opening in the center of the game board and the lower edge of the game area. there were. That is, as described above, when the angle of the downward inclination of the inclined passage is small (the downward inclination is gentle), the flow velocity of the ball becomes low, and the ball is likely to be clogged at the bent portion. On the other hand, if the angle of the downward inclination of the inclined passage is large (the downward inclination is steep), the flow speed of the ball can be increased and the ball clogging at the bent portion can be less likely to occur. The space in the required height direction becomes large, and it becomes difficult to arrange the winning device. Further, since the arrangement position of the bent portion in the vertical direction is lowered (lowered), it becomes difficult to secure a gap through which the ball can pass between the bent portion and the lower edge portion of the game area, and the bent portion It is necessary to provide out ports on both sides.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B10, in addition to the effect of the game machine B9, an opening is formed in the side wall of the bent portion, so that ball clogging at the bent portion can be less likely to occur. The angle of the downward slope of the passage can be reduced (the downward slope can be made gentle). As a result, the arrangement position of the bent portion in the vertical direction can be raised (raised), so that a gap through which the ball can pass can be secured between the bent portion and the lower edge portion of the game area. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide out openings on both sides of the bent portion. That is, in the arrangement of the passage member and the winning device described in the game machine B9, the arrangement described in the game machine B10 (arrangement in which a gap through which a ball can pass is formed between the bent portion and the lower edge portion of the game area). Is an arrangement that is not possible with conventional products, and as described above, it is possible for the first time by forming an opening in the side wall of the bent portion.

<Concept of the invention using the rotating unit 500 as an example>
In a gaming machine having a plurality of light emitting means and having a rotation display device that displays an afterimage by an afterimage effect by blinking the light emitting means according to a rotation position, the rotation display device is the plurality of light emitting means. The main body member includes a substrate in which the main body members are arranged in a row, a main body member that accommodates the main body member, and a base member that rotatably supports the main body member. The gaming machine C1 is provided with a plurality of through holes formed through the side wall facing the rotation direction.

Here, a gaming machine having a plurality of light emitting means (LEDs) and having a rotation display device that displays an afterimage by an afterimage effect by blinking the light emitting means according to a rotation position is known (for example, JP-A-2015-100255, JP-A-2015-053968, etc.).

In this case, in the technique of JP-A-2015-100255, the light emitting means is exposed, so that the appearance is impaired. On the other hand, in the technique of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-053968, the light of the light emitting means is visually recognized through a member (push button) having translucency. Therefore, the light emitting means is not exposed. However, in this case, even if the member (reel) on which the light emitting means is arranged is rotated, the rotation is not visually recognized, so that there is no point in displaying an afterimage by the afterimage effect. That is, the same display can be performed by arranging a plurality of light emitting means vertically and horizontally in a matrix and controlling the blinking of each of the light emitting means.

Therefore, the applicant of the present application has devised a rotation display device in which a substrate in which a plurality of light emitting means are arranged is housed in a main body member and the main body member is rotatably supported by a base member (not yet applied at the time of filing the present application). Known). According to this, since the light emitting means is housed in the main body member, the light emitting means is hard to be visually recognized and the appearance is not impaired. In addition, since the afterimage display due to the blinking of the light emitting means is visually recognized while the rotation of the main body member is visible, the interest can be enhanced. However, in this case, since the light emitting means is housed in the main body member, a new problem has been found that it is difficult to cool the light emitting means. The light emitting means (LED) and the IC / capacitor that controls it are soldered to the board. If the heat generated when these light emitting means and the IC / capacitor operate cannot be sufficiently cooled, the solder melts. , May lead to poor contact.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C1, the main body member includes a plurality of through holes formed through the side wall facing in the rotation direction. Therefore, when the main body member is rotated, the main body member is formed through the plurality of through holes. The outside air can be taken into the inside of the. Therefore, it is possible to cool the heat generated when the light emitting means operates.

In the game machine C1, the main body member is formed in a container-like shape with an open back side.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effect of the game machine C1, the main body member is formed in a container-like shape with the back side open, so that the outside air taken in from the through hole of the side wall is efficiently taken from the back side. Can be exhausted. Therefore, it is possible to cool the heat generated when the light emitting means operates. Further, by exhausting from the back side of the main body member in this way, it is possible to prevent such exhaust from affecting the ball flowing down (or rolling on the stage) in the game area.

In the game machine C2, the main body member is formed in a rectangular shape in a front view having a long shape along the diameter direction in the rotation plane of the main body member, and the front wall forming the front side is rearward toward the end side in the longitudinal direction. A game machine C3 characterized in that it is formed in a curved shape that recedes to the side.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effect of the game machine C2, the main body member is formed in a front view (that is, a rotation axis direction view) rectangular shape having a long shape along the diameter direction in the rotation plane of the main body member. Therefore, by utilizing the centrifugal force accompanying the rotation of the main body member, the air inside the main body member can be flowed to the end side in the longitudinal direction (outward in the radial direction at the time of rotation) and exhausted from the back surface side. Therefore, with the flow of the air, the outside air can be taken into the main body member from the back surface side in the rotation shaft and its vicinity. That is, since the rotation speed is low in the rotation axis and its vicinity, the efficiency of taking in outside air from the through hole of the side wall is poor (or cannot be taken in), but the air circulation using centrifugal force (the back surface in the rotation axis and its vicinity). The outside air is taken in from the side, and the taken-in outside air is flowed to the end side in the longitudinal direction (outward in the radial direction during rotation) by centrifugal force to form the flow of air exhausted from the back side on the outer side in the radial direction. be able to. As a result, the heat generated when the light emitting means operates can be cooled. In particular, it is possible to achieve cooling of the light emitting means disposed on the rotating shaft and its vicinity.

In this case, if the front wall forming the front side of the main body member has a shape parallel to the rotation plane of the main body member (that is, if the main body member has a rectangular parallelepiped shape), the longitudinal end portion (during rotation) is subjected to centrifugal force. Since the angle of the portion where the air flowing outward in the radial direction changes direction toward the back side is substantially a right angle, a vortex is likely to be formed in such a portion. Therefore, the flow of air is obstructed, and smooth exhaust from the back side becomes difficult.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C3, since the front wall forming the front side is formed in a curved shape that recedes toward the back side toward the end side in the longitudinal direction, centrifugal force causes the end side in the longitudinal direction (during rotation). The air that flows outward in the radial direction can be gradually flowed to the back side, and the angle of the portion where the air that has flowed to the longitudinal end (outward in the radial direction) changes direction toward the back side. Can be made larger than a substantially right angle, so that the formation of a vortex at such a portion can be suppressed and the air flow can be smoothed. Therefore, exhaust from the back side can be performed more smoothly. As a result, cooling of the light emitting means disposed on the rotating shaft and its vicinity can be more reliably achieved.

In the game machine C2 or C3, the main body member is characterized in that the open area on the back side in the rotation axis and the vicinity of the rotation axis is larger than the open area on the back side in the longitudinal end side. Machine C4.

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effect of the game machine C2 or C3, the opening area of the main body member on the back side in the rotation axis and the vicinity of the rotation axis is larger than the opening area on the back side in the longitudinal end side. Is also increased, so the centrifugal force that accompanies rotation is used to allow the air inside the main body member to flow toward the end side in the longitudinal direction (outward in the radial direction during rotation), and from the back side on the outer side in the radial direction. By exhausting, when the outside air is taken in from the back side in the rotating shaft and its vicinity, the taking in can be performed efficiently.

In the game machine C4, the main body member is characterized in that the rotation shaft and the open portion on the back surface side in the vicinity of the rotation shaft are formed in a circular shape concentric with the rotation shaft.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effect of the game machine C4, the main body member has a rotating shaft and an open portion on the back side in the vicinity of the rotating shaft is formed in a circular shape concentric with the rotating shaft. It is possible to prevent the outside air on the back surface side of the rotation axis and its vicinity from being disturbed (flow in the rotation direction is formed) due to the rotation of the rotation axis. As a result, the outside air can be efficiently taken in from the back surface side in the rotation axis and its vicinity.

In any of the game machines C2 to C5, the base member is provided with a shaft member that rotatably supports the main body member, and the shaft member is reduced in diameter from the back side to the back side of the main body member. A game machine C6 characterized by.

According to the game machine C6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines C2 to C5, the shaft member that rotatably supports the main body member on the base member has a reduced diameter from the back side to the back side of the main body member. Therefore, when the outside air is taken in from the back surface side in the rotation shaft and its vicinity as the main body member rotates, the flow of the outside air along the outer peripheral surface of the shaft member can be smoothed and the flow resistance can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to efficiently take in the outside air from the back surface side in the rotating shaft and its vicinity, so that cooling of the light emitting means arranged in the rotating shaft and its vicinity can be more reliably achieved.

In any of the game machines C1 to C6, the substrate is housed in the main body member in a posture in which the surface on which the light emitting means is mounted or the surface opposite to the surface is facing the side wall of the main body member. Characteristic gaming machine C7.

According to the game machine C7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines C1 to C6, the substrate is in a posture in which the surface on which the light emitting means is mounted or the surface opposite to the surface is facing the side wall of the main body member. Since it is housed in the member, the outside air introduced from the through hole formed through the side wall can be efficiently blown to the light emitting means or the IC / capacitor to enhance the heat dissipation effect. As a result, the heat generated when the light emitting means or the IC / capacitor operates can be effectively cooled. Further, the posture in which the substrate is housed in the main body member is a posture in which the front surface or the back surface of the substrate faces the side wall of the main body member, so that the width dimension of the main body member in front view (dimension in the direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction). ) Can be reduced. As a result, when the main body member (rotation display device) is stopped, the visibility of the member or device arranged on the back side thereof can be ensured.

A game machine C8, wherein any one of the game machines C1 to C7 is provided with a smoke generating means for generating smoke in a displacement region of a main body member of the rotation display device.

According to the game machine C8, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines C1 to C7, a smoke generating means for generating smoke is provided in the displacement region of the main body member of the rotation display device, so that the blinking of the light emitting means is highlighted. Can be done. Further, while hiding the rotation display device by smoke, only the blinking of the light emitting means can be visually recognized, and the effect of light can be enhanced.

In the conventional rotation display device, it is difficult to obtain the effect of smoke because smoke is pushed out to the outer peripheral side as the main body member rotates. However, according to the present invention, a through hole is formed in the main body member. Is formed and the outside air can be circulated, so that smoke can be retained around the main body member. As a result, the light emitting means can be made to blink in an atmosphere filled with smoke, and the above-mentioned effect can be obtained.

As a smoke generator, for example, a type that heats and vaporizes water-based or oil-based oil (liquid) to generate smoke (smoke), and liquid (water-based / oil-based) is pressurized and diffused by a compressor and put into the air. Examples include a type that stays as fine particles and a type that ejects carbon dioxide gas.

In the game machine C8, a game board having an opening in the center, a liquid crystal display device visibly arranged through the opening of the game board, and a liquid crystal display device arranged on the front side of the liquid crystal display device and convex to the front side. A game characterized in that a front member formed of a curved surface and made of a light transmissive material is provided, and at least a main body member of the rotation display member is located between the liquid crystal display device and the front member. Machine C9.

According to the game machine C9, in addition to the effect of the game machine C8, a game board having an opening in the center, a liquid crystal display device visibly arranged through the opening of the game board, and a front surface of the liquid crystal display device. It is arranged on the side, is formed to be convexly curved toward the front side, and has a front member made of a light-transmitting material, and at least the main body member of the rotation display member is positioned between the liquid crystal display device and the front member. Therefore, the smoke generated from the smoke generator can be easily retained (easily confined) in the displacement region of the main body member. Therefore, it is possible to easily blink the light emitting means in an atmosphere filled with smoke to make the blinking stand out, or to visually recognize only the blinking of the light emitting means while hiding the rotation display device by the smoke. As a result, the effect of light can be enhanced. In particular, since the front member is curved convexly toward the front, it is possible to easily retain smoke in the space on the back side of the front member. As a result, it is possible to easily enhance the effect of producing light using the smoke described above.

<Concept of the invention using the rotating unit 500 as an example>
It includes a base member, a main body member that is displaced between the first position and the second position with respect to the base member, and a displacement member that is displaceably arranged on the main body member, and the main body member is at least said. In a game machine in which the displacement member is displaced while being arranged at the first position, a rotating member rotatably supported by one of the base member or the main body member and the main body member are arranged at the first position. In this state, the rotating member is provided with a contact member that is faced to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member so as to be abuttable and is disposed on the other side of the base member or the main body member, and the main body member is arranged at the first position. The gaming machine D1 is characterized in that the displacement direction and the rotation direction of the rotating member are set substantially parallel to each other.

Here, the main body member includes a base member, a main body member that is displaced between the first position and the second position with respect to the base member, and a displacement member that is displaceably arranged on the main body member. There is known a gaming machine in which a displacement member is formed so as to be displaceable while being arranged at the first position (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-162990).

In this case, when the main body member is arranged at the first position and the displacement member is displaced, the main body member may rattle with respect to the base member due to the displacement of the displacement member. Therefore, there is a method in which an engaging means for engaging the main body member and the base member is provided to suppress rattling. The engaging means is formed on one of the main body member or the base member and is urged by the urging means, and is formed so as to be engageable with the engaging member and on the other of the main body member or the base member. It is provided with an engaged member to be arranged, and the engaging member is retracted while resisting the urging force of the urging means by utilizing the displacement of the main body member with respect to the base member (displacement toward the first position), and the main body is provided. When the member is arranged in the first position, the engaging member is advanced by the urging force of the urging means to engage with the engaged member. As a result, the relative displacement of the main body member with respect to the base member is regulated by the engagement of the engaging means, and rattling of the main body member with respect to the base member due to the displacement of the displacement member is suppressed.

However, in such a conventional engaging means, in order to put the engaging means in the engaged state (the main body member is arranged at the first position), the engaging member is placed against the urging force of the urging means. Not only does it need to be retracted, but it also resists the urging force of the urging means when disengaging the engaging means (displaces the body member from the first position to the second position). There is a problem that the engaging member needs to be retracted, and the driving force required when the main body member is displaced with respect to the base member increases.

On the other hand, according to the game machine D1, the rotating member rotatably supported by one of the base member and the main body member and the main body member come into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member in the state of being arranged at the first position. Since the contact member is provided so as to be face-to-face and disposed on the other side of the base member or the main body member, the contact member is brought into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member so that the main body member is relative to the base member. It is possible to regulate the displacement and suppress the rattling of the main body member with respect to the base member due to the displacement of the displacement member. In this case, since the displacement direction when the main body member is arranged in the first position and the rotation direction of the rotating member are set substantially parallel, when the main body member is arranged in the first position and from the first position to the second position. When displaced to a position, the rotating member can be rotated along with the displacement, so that the driving force required to displace the main body member with respect to the base member can be suppressed.

In the game machine D1, the rotating member is formed of an elastic body whose outer peripheral surface side is elastically deformable.

According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1, the rotating member is formed of an elastic body whose outer peripheral surface side is elastically deformable, so that the contact member comes into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member. In this case, the outer peripheral surface side of the rotating member can be elastically deformed so that the abutting member can easily hold the rotating member. As a result, the rotating member can be made difficult to rotate, and the relative displacement of the main body member with respect to the base member can be regulated, so that rattling of the main body member with respect to the base member due to the displacement of the displacement member can be suppressed.

The elastic body is preferably a viscoelastic body exemplified by rubber, urethane, or the like. In this case, the vibration damping effect can perform a vibration damping function or a vibration insulation function that attenuates and insulates the vibration input from the main body member to the base member due to the displacement of the displacement member, and is arranged on the base member side. This is because it is possible to suppress wear and tear of various installed devices, loosening of fastening portions, and the like. In particular, when the displacement member is periodically displaced (for example, when it is rotated at a relatively high speed to function as a versa writer), relatively small amplitude and high frequency vibration is generated from the main body member to the base member. Since it is input to, it is particularly effective to adopt a viscoelastic body.

In the game machine D1 or D2, the rotating member is formed so as to be displaceable in the radial direction, and one of the base member or the main body member holds the rotating member in a state where the main body member is arranged at the first position. The gaming machine D3 is provided with an opposing member that is sandwiched and arranged so as to face the contact member and that faces the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member so as to be in contact with the contact member.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1 or D2, the rotating member is formed so as to be displaceable in the radial direction, and the main body member is arranged at the first position on one of the base member and the main body member. In this state, it is arranged so as to face the abutting member with the rotating member sandwiched between them, and is provided with an opposing member that faces the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member so as to be able to abut against the base member of the main body member due to the displacement of the displacement member. When the contact member comes into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member due to the flutter, the outer peripheral surface on the opposite side of the rotating member can be brought into contact with the opposing member. That is, the rotating member can be sandwiched between the abutting member and the opposing member. As a result, the rotating member can be made difficult to rotate, and the relative displacement of the main body member with respect to the base member can be regulated, so that rattling of the main body member with respect to the base member due to the displacement of the displacement member can be suppressed.

The form in which the rotating member can be displaced in the radial direction includes, for example, a form in which a shaft that rotatably supports the rotating member is formed so as to be rotatable in the radial direction, and a shaft that rotatably supports the rotating member. The outer diameter of the shaft is smaller than the inner diameter of the insertion hole of the rotating member that accepts the shaft, and the outer diameter of the shaft fixed to the rotating member is smaller than the insertion hole of one of the main body member or the base member that accepts the shaft. The form to be used is exemplified.

In the game machine D3, the rotating member is formed from an elastic body in an annular cross section having a shaft fixed to one of the base member or the main body member and having a shaft support hole through which the shaft is inserted on the inner peripheral side. The gaming machine D4 is characterized in that the radial displacement of the rotating member is formed by elastically deforming the elastic body.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effect of the game machine D3, the radial displacement of the rotating member is formed by elastically deforming the elastic body, so that the base of the main body member due to the displacement of the displacement member When a rotating member is sandwiched between the abutting member and the opposing member due to rattling with respect to the member, the rotating member (elastic body) is used to rotate the abutting member and the opposing member by using the elastic recovery force. It is possible to easily hold the member more firmly. As a result, the rotating member can be made difficult to rotate, and the relative displacement of the main body member with respect to the base member can be regulated, so that rattling of the main body member with respect to the base member due to the displacement of the displacement member can be suppressed.

Further, by configuring the rotating member to be displaced in the radial direction by utilizing the elastic deformation of the elastic body in this way, the shaft inserted into the shaft support hole of the rotating member can be moved in the radial direction. It does not need to be formed as a shaft, and can be formed as a shaft fixed to either a base member or a main body member. As a result, the structure can be simplified, the durability can be improved, and the product cost can be reduced.

In any of the game machines D1 to D4, a pair of the rotating members are arranged on one of the base member or the main body member, and the pair of rotating members is used when the main body member is arranged at the first position. A game machine D5 characterized in that it is arranged side by side with a predetermined interval in the displacement direction.

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines D1 to D4, a pair of rotating members are arranged on one of the base member and the main body member, and the main body member is the first of the pair of rotating members. Since they are arranged side by side with a predetermined interval in the displacement direction when they are arranged at one position, the main body due to the displacement of the displacement member is suppressed while suppressing the driving force required when the main body member is displaced with respect to the base member. The rattling of the member with respect to the base member can be effectively suppressed.

That is, when the contact member is brought into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member to regulate the relative displacement of the main body member with respect to the base member, only one rotating member is brought into contact with the contact member. If there is, there is a possibility that the rotating member is rotated and the contact member is tilted, and the tilt of the contact member due to the rotation of the rotating member is a factor of rattling of the main body member with respect to the base member due to the displacement of the displacement member. Become.

On the other hand, according to the game machine D5, since the pair of rotating members are arranged side by side at a predetermined interval, the contact members abut against the pair of rotating members at two locations at a predetermined interval. Therefore, the rotating member can be brought into contact without rotating, and the contacting member can be prevented from tilting. As a result, rattling of the main body member with respect to the base member due to displacement of the displacement member can be effectively suppressed.

In any of the game machines D1 to D5, the contact member is on the side that receives the rotating member when the main body member is arranged at the first position on the contact surface to which the rotating member is contacted. The gaming machine D6 is characterized in that an inclined surface that is inclined downward as it is separated from the contact surface is formed at an end portion.

According to the game machine D6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines D1 to D5, the contact member is when the main body member of the contact surface to which the rotating member is in contact is arranged at the first position. Since an inclined surface that is inclined downward as it is separated from the contact surface is formed at the end on the side that receives the rotating member, when the main body member is arranged at the first position, the inclined surface is used. The rotating member can be guided to the contact surface of the contact member. As a result, the driving force required when arranging the main body member at the first position can be suppressed.

In any of the game machines D1 to D6, the game machine D7 is characterized in that the rotating member is arranged on the base member and the contact member is arranged on the main body member.

According to the game machine D7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines D1 to D6, the rotating member is arranged on the base member and the contact member is arranged on the main body member, so that the weight is relatively heavy. Since it is not necessary to dispose of a bulky rotating member, the weight of the main body member can be reduced and the driving force required for displacement of the main body member can be suppressed. Further, when suppressing the rattling of the main body member with respect to the base member due to the displacement of the displacement member, the weight of the main body member on the vibration source side can be reduced, so that the rattling can be easily suppressed.

In any of the game machines D1 to D7, the displacement member is rotatably arranged on the main body member, and the rotation plane of the displacement member is in contact with the rotating member of the contact member. The gaming machine D8, which is substantially parallel to the rotating shaft of the rotating member.

According to the game machine D8, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines D1 to D7, the displacement member is rotatably arranged on the main body member, and the rotation plane of the displacement member is on the rotating member of the contact member. Since the contact surface to be abutted and the rotation axis of the rotating member are substantially parallel to each other, the driving force required when arranging the main body member in the first position and in displacement from the first position to the second position. It is possible to effectively suppress the rattling of the main body member with respect to the base member due to the displacement (rotation) of the displacement member.

That is, since the displacement form of the displacement member is rotation, the main body member tilts the rotation plane of the displacement member due to the aging motion of the displacement member (the motion in which the rotation axis of the displacement member swings like a circle). It is vibrated in a mode to make it. Therefore, the rotation plane of the displacement member is substantially parallel to the contact surface of the contact member and the rotation axis of the rotation member, so that the contact surface of the contact member is orthogonal to the rotation axis of the rotation member. It can be pressed against the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member from the direction. As a result, when the main body member is arranged in the first position and when the main body member is displaced from the first position to the second position, the rotating member is rotated, so that the driving force required for the displacement of the main body member is suppressed. By the contact of the contact member with the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, rattling of the main body member with respect to the base member due to displacement (rotation) of the displacement member can be effectively suppressed.

In any of the game machines D1 to D8, a driving means for generating a driving force and a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force to the main body member to displace it between the first position and the second position are provided. The transmission means includes a rotating body that is rotated around the first axis by the driving force of the driving means, a crank member that has a pin portion that is eccentric from the first axis of the rotating body and protrudes from the rotating body. The pin portion of the crank member has a guide groove on which the pin portion slides, and the pin portion slides along the guide groove to rotate the main body member with the second axis as the center of rotation. In a state where the main body member is arranged at the first position with the arm member to be displaced, the straight line connecting the first axis of the crank member and the axis of the pin portion is the second axis of the arm member. The gaming machine D9 is characterized in that it is substantially orthogonal to a straight line connecting the axis of the pin portion of the crank member.

According to the game machine D9, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines D1 to D8, rattling of the main body member can be effectively suppressed.

Here, in the present invention, the displacement direction when the main body member is arranged at the first position and the rotation direction of the rotating member are set to be substantially parallel. Therefore, if the rattling direction of the main body member at the first position is from the first position to the second position or vice versa, the rotating member tends to rotate in such a direction. It becomes difficult for the rotating member to exert the effect of suppressing rattling.

On the other hand, according to the game machine D9, when the main body member is arranged at the first position, the straight line connecting the first axis of the crank member and the axis of the pin portion is the second axis of the arm member and the crank. Since it is substantially orthogonal to the straight line connecting the axis of the pin portion of the member, even if the main body member tries to rotate the arm member due to its displacement, a force component in the direction of rotating the crank member is not formed ( That is, a dead center) can be formed. That is, it is possible to suppress rattling of the main body member in the direction from the first position to the second position or vice versa. As a result, even if the rattling direction of the main body member is from the first position to the second position or vice versa (that is, the direction in which the rotating member is likely to rotate), the crank member and the arm member are dead points. By forming the above, rattling of the main body member can be effectively suppressed.

<Concept of the invention using the regulatory unit 490 as an example>
In a gaming machine having a plurality of light emitting means and having a rotation display device that displays an afterimage by an afterimage effect by blinking the light emitting means according to a rotation position, the rotation display device is the plurality of light emitting means. The substrate includes a substrate on which the light emitting means is mounted, a main body member that accommodates the substrate, and a base member that rotatably supports the main body member. The substrate has a surface on which the light emitting means is mounted. The gaming machine E1 characterized in that it is housed in the main body member in a posture substantially parallel to the rotation axis.

Here, a gaming machine having a plurality of light emitting means (LEDs) and having a rotation display device that displays an afterimage by an afterimage effect by blinking the light emitting means according to a rotation position is known (for example, JP-A-2015-100255, JP-A-2015-053968, etc.). However, in the above-mentioned conventional technique, the posture of the substrate is a posture in which the surface on which the light emitting means is mounted is orthogonal to the rotation axis (that is, a rotation plane in which the irradiation direction of the light emitting means is directed to the front side (player side). Since the posture is parallel), the outer shape in the front view (rotational axis direction view) becomes large. Therefore, there is a problem that the visibility of the back side of the rotation display device is impaired when the rotation of the rotation display device is stopped.

On the other hand, according to the game machine E1, the rotation display device includes a substrate on which a plurality of light emitting means are arranged in a row, a main body member accommodating the substrate, and a base member rotatably supporting the main body member. Since the substrate is housed in the main body member in a posture in which the surface on which the light emitting means is mounted is substantially parallel to the rotation axis of the main body member, the outer shape of the main body member in the front view (rotational axis direction view) is suppressed. be able to. As a result, the visibility of the back side of the main body member can be improved in the state where the rotation of the rotation display device (main body member) is stopped.

In the game machine E1, the rotation display device includes a facing member arranged to face the surface of the substrate on which the light emitting means is mounted.

According to the game machine E2, in addition to the effect of the game machine E1, the rotation display device includes an opposing member arranged to face the surface on which the light emitting means of the substrate is mounted, so that the light emitted from the light emitting means faces the opposite member. It can be reflected by a member and emitted to the front side (player side) of the rotation display device. Therefore, even when the posture of the substrate is such that the surface on which the light emitting means is mounted is substantially parallel to the rotation axis, the light (blinking) of the light emitting means is visually recognized by the player, and an afterimage is displayed by the afterimage effect. Can be done.

In the game machine E2, the facing member is provided with a plurality of recesses that are recessed in a surface facing the substrate and are extended in a groove shape substantially parallel to the rotation axis of the main body member, and the plurality of recesses are provided. The gaming machine E3, characterized in that the plurality of light emitting means face each other.

According to the game machine E3, in addition to the effect of the game machine E2, the facing member is recessed in the surface facing the substrate and has a plurality of recesses extending in a groove shape substantially parallel to the rotation axis of the main body member. Since a plurality of light emitting means are faced to each of the plurality of recesses, the light emitted from each of the plurality of light emitting means is passed through the plurality of recesses of the facing member, respectively, and the front side of the rotation display device (game). It can be emitted to the person side). That is, since the light emitted from each light emitting means can be emitted in a state of being partitioned by each recess, the division of light of each light emitting means can be clarified. As a result, the outer shape of the afterimage display due to the afterimage effect can be clarified.

In the game machine E3, the recess of the facing member includes an end partition wall for partitioning an end portion on the side opposite to the front side of the rotation display device.

According to the game machine E4, in addition to the effect of the game machine E3, the recess of the facing member includes an end partition wall for partitioning the end opposite to the front side of the rotation display device, so that light is emitted from the light emitting means. The light radiated to the concave portion of the facing member can be reflected by the end partition wall and emitted to the front side (player side) of the rotation display device. Therefore, it is possible to increase the light intensity of the afterimage display due to the afterimage effect.

In the game machine E4, the end partition wall of the recess is inclined in a direction away from the light emitting means toward the front side of the rotation display device, and the light emitting means is positioned so as to face the end partition wall of the recess. A game machine E5 characterized in that it is arranged.

According to the game machine E5, in addition to the effect of the game machine E4, the end partition wall of the recess is inclined in a direction away from the light emitting means toward the front side of the rotation display device, and the light emitting means is the end section of the recess. Since it is arranged at a position facing the wall, the light emitted from the light emitting means can be applied to the end partition wall, so that stronger light can be emitted to the front side (player side) of the rotation display device. it can. Therefore, it is possible to increase the light intensity of the afterimage display due to the afterimage effect.

A game machine E6 in any of the game machines E3 to E5, wherein a part of the inner surface of the concave portion of the facing member is formed as an uneven surface.

According to the game machine E6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines E3 to E5, a part of the inner surface of the concave portion of the facing member is formed as an uneven surface, so that the light emitted from the light emitting means is emitted. It can be diffusely reflected by the uneven surface and emitted to the front side (player side) of the rotation display device in a state of being evenly dispersed. That is, it is possible to prevent the light emitted from the opening of the recess from being visually recognized in a state of being biased toward a part of the opening.

The uneven surface may be a surface consisting of only convexes (projections) or a surface consisting of only concaves (dents). The convex or concave may be extended as a strip or groove. Further, the convex and concave cross-sectional shapes may be circular, elliptical, polygonal, or a combination thereof. That is, the shape of the unevenness is arbitrary as long as a portion higher than the reference position and a portion lower than the reference position are formed, a plurality of portions (surfaces) capable of reflecting light are formed, and diffuse reflection is possible.

In the game machine E6, the uneven surface is not formed in a predetermined range from the front end of the rotation display device among the inner surfaces of the recesses of the facing member, and the inner surface of the predetermined range is formed. The gaming machine E7 is characterized in that it is formed as a surface smoother than the uneven surface.

According to the game machine E7, in addition to the effect of the game machine E6, the uneven surface is not formed in a predetermined range from the front end of the rotation display device in the inner surface of the concave portion of the facing member. Since the inner surface of the predetermined range is formed as a smoother surface than the uneven surface, it is possible to easily emit light toward the front side (player side) of the rotation display device, and the afterimage display due to the afterimage effect can be achieved. The intensity of light can be increased. That is, when a concavo-convex surface is formed in a predetermined range from the end of the inner surface of the concave portion of the facing member on the front side of the rotation display device, light is diffusely reflected on the concavo-convex surface and the front side of the rotation display device ( Where the light emitted toward the player side) is reduced, the inner surface of the predetermined range is made smoother than the uneven surface, thereby suppressing diffused reflection and the front side of the rotation display device. It is possible to increase the light toward (player side).

In the game machine E7, the predetermined range in which the uneven surface is not formed is characterized in that the cross-sectional area of the inner surface thereof increases toward the front end portion of the rotation display device. E8.

According to the game machine E8, in addition to the effect of the game machine E7, the cross-sectional area of the inner surface of the predetermined range in which the uneven surface is not formed is increased toward the end on the front side of the rotation display device. (That is, the diameter is increased), so that the light emitted toward the front side (player side) of the rotation display device can be expanded. That is, the area visually recognized as the light emitting region can be expanded beyond the area of the light emitting surface (irradiation surface) of the light emitting means. Therefore, the light emitting means can be miniaturized.

In any of the game machines E6 to E8, the concave portions of the facing members are arranged in a row, and the concave-convex surface that is arranged radially outward from the rotation axis of the main body member. The gaming machine E9, characterized in that the length dimension in the direction along the rotation axis of the main body member is increased.

According to the game machine E9, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines E6 to E8, the concave portions of the facing members are arranged so as to be radially outwardly separated from the rotation axis of the main body member. Since the length dimension in the direction along the rotation axis of the member is increased, the visible brightness (brightness of light) of each of the plurality of recesses can be made uniform.

That is, in the rotation display device, the displacement speed (peripheral speed) increases as the rotation axis (rotation center) moves outward in the radial direction. Therefore, when the light emitting means arranged in a row emits light with the same brightness, the rotation is rotated. The light of the light emitting means closer to the axis looks brighter (brighter) than the light of the light emitting means farther from the rotation axis (outward in the radial direction).

On the other hand, according to the game machine E9, the uneven surface arranged radially outward from the rotation axis of the main body member has a larger length dimension in the direction along the rotation axis of the main body member. , The concave portion (light emitting means) that is radially outwardly separated from the rotation axis of the main body member is more diffusely reflected by the uneven surface (that is, the proportion of light directly visible to the player from the light emitting means is reduced). , Can be visually recognized as high-brightness light. As a result, the difference in brightness seen by the eyes at the arrangement position in the radial direction can be suppressed, and the brightness (brightness of light) can be made uniform.

In any of the game machines E3 to E9, a cover member is provided which is covered with a front end of the rotation display device in a recess of the facing member and is formed of a light transmitting material, and the cover member includes a cover member. The gaming machine E10 is characterized in that an uneven surface is formed at least in a region facing the end of the concave portion.

According to the game machine E10, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines E3 to E9, a cover formed from a light-transmitting material while being covered on the front end of the rotation display device in the recess of the facing member. A member is provided, and the cover member has an uneven surface formed at least in a region facing the end of the concave portion. Therefore, light is diffusely reflected by the uneven surface, and then the front side (player side) of the rotation display device is formed. ) Can be emitted. That is, since the emitted light can be expanded, the area visually recognized as the light emitting region can be expanded beyond the area of the light emitting surface (irradiating surface) of the light emitting means. Therefore, the light emitting means can be miniaturized.

In any of the game machines E3 to E10, a plate-shaped interposing member interposed between the substrate and the facing member is provided, and the interposing member includes the plurality of light emitting means and the plurality of recesses. The gaming machine E11 is provided with a through hole formed through the position through which the game is passed.

According to the game machine E11, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines E3 to E10, a plate-shaped intermediate member interposed between the substrate and the facing member is provided, and the intermediate member includes a plurality of the intermediate members. Since a through hole formed through the light emitting means and the plurality of recesses is provided, the light of each light emitting means is surely incident on the corresponding recess and is prevented from being incident (leaked) on the adjacent recess. it can. As a result, the light emitted from each light emitting means can be emitted only from the corresponding concave portion, and the outer shape of the afterimage display due to the afterimage effect can be clarified.

Further, according to the game machine E11, a structure for incident the light of the light emitting means into the corresponding recess through the through hole is formed from two members, an opposing member and an interposing member. The structure can be simplified as compared with the case of being composed of members. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced.

In the game machine E11, the interposition member is provided with a seat portion that comes into contact with the light emitting means, and the through hole is formed in the seat portion.

According to the game machine E12, in addition to the effect of the game machine E11, the interposition member is provided with a seat portion that abuts on the light emitting means, and the through hole is formed in the seat portion. Can be easily incident on the through hole, and leakage to the outside of the through hole can be suppressed. As a result, the light intensity of the afterimage display due to the afterimage effect can be increased. Further, since the seat portion is brought into contact with the light emitting means, it is possible to suppress the light of the adjacent light emitting means from being incident on the through hole, so that the outer shape of the afterimage display due to the afterimage effect can be clarified.

In the game machine E12, the irradiation surface of the light emitting means is formed in a circular shape in front view, and the through hole is formed in a circular cross section having an inner diameter substantially the same as the outer diameter of the irradiation surface. A game machine E13 characterized in that the are arranged concentrically.

According to the game machine E13, in addition to the effect of the game machine E12, the irradiation surface of the light emitting means is formed into a circular shape in front view, and the through hole has a circular cross section having an inner diameter substantially the same as the outer diameter of the irradiation surface. Since they are formed and the irradiation surface and the through hole are arranged concentrically, the light emitted from the light emitting means can be efficiently incident on the recess through the through hole.

In the game machine E13, the through hole has an inner diameter that is increased from the substrate side toward the facing member.

According to the game machine E14, in addition to the effect of the game machine E13, the inner diameter of the through hole is increased from the substrate side toward the facing member, so that the light emitted from the light emitting means can be passed through the through hole. It can be efficiently incident on the recess through the recess. Further, since the area in contact with the light emitting means can be secured, it is possible to suppress the light of each light emitting means from leaking to the outside of the through hole. As a result, the light intensity of the afterimage display due to the afterimage effect can be increased.

In any of the game machines E12 to E14, the game machine E15 is characterized in that the seat portion is formed so as to project from a surface of the intermediate member facing the substrate.

According to the game machine E15, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines E12 to E14, the seat portion is formed so as to project from the surface of the interposition member facing the substrate, so that the protrusion is opposed to the substrate. A space can be formed between the member and the member, and heat generated by the operation of the light emitting means can be dissipated.

In the game machine E15, the interposition member is provided with a groove-shaped groove portion that is recessed in a surface facing the substrate and extends along a base portion of the seat portion.

According to the game machine E16, in addition to the effect of the game machine E15, the facing member is provided with a groove-shaped groove portion that is recessed in the surface facing the substrate and extends along the base portion of the seat portion. The heat dissipation effect can be enhanced while ensuring the rigidity of the intermediate member. That is, by forming a groove-shaped groove extending along the base of the seat portion, the region recessed in the intermediate member is minimized, and the rigidity of the intermediate member is ensured while the light emitting means of the light emitting means. The space can be expanded to the part where the heat generated by the operation is particularly concentrated, and the heat dissipation effect can be enhanced.

In the game machine E15 or E16, the seat portion is characterized in that adjacent seat portions and their outer peripheral surfaces are connected to each other.

According to the game machine E17, in addition to the effect of the game machine E15 or E16, the seat portion is connected to the adjacent seat portion and the outer peripheral surfaces of each other, so that the rigidity of the intermediate member can be increased.

In this case, the outer peripheral surface of the seat portion may be circular so that the adjacent seat portions and the outer peripheral surfaces of each other are connected to each other. As a result, the outer shape of the group in which a plurality of seats are connected is formed to be uneven, so that the space is secured and the heat dissipation effect is enhanced, and the unevenness of the outer shape is used to increase the rigidity of the intermediate member. Can be increased.

<Concept of the invention using the sorting device 4700 as an example>
In a game machine provided with a passage member forming a passage through which a ball can pass, and a first privilege giving means which is arranged on the downstream side of the passage member and grants a predetermined privilege as the ball passes. An opening is formed in the side wall of the passage member on the upstream side of the first privilege granting means to a size that allows the ball to pass through, and a ball that has flowed out from the opening into the game area is formed so that the ball can pass through. The gaming machine F1 is provided with a second privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege upon passing through.

Here, a game machine including a passage member that forms a passage through which a ball can pass is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-97764). On the downstream side of such a passage member, a sensor device for detecting the passage of a ball of the passage member is arranged, and when the passage of the ball is detected by the sensor device, a predetermined privilege is given. However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, the passage member only has a function of guiding the ball toward the downstream side (sensor device) thereof, and while the space required for the arrangement is increased, the game is given an interest. There was a problem that it was difficult to do.

On the other hand, according to the game machine F1, when the ball guided by the passage member passes through the first privilege granting means, a predetermined privilege is granted by the first privilege granting means. In this case, an opening is formed in the side wall of the passage member on the upstream side of the first privilege granting means to a size that allows the ball to pass through, and a ball that has flowed out from the opening into the game area is formed so that the ball can pass through. Since it is provided with a second privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege as the ball passes, it is possible to form a form in which the ball flows out from the opening to the game area while being guided through the passage member, and the outflowing ball. When the player has passed the second privilege granting means, the predetermined privilege can be granted by the second privilege granting means. As a result, the ball guided to the passage member not only passes through the first privilege granting means, but also flows out from the opening to the game area, and further, the outflowing ball passes through the second privilege granting means. It is possible to form a form and add interest to the game.

The second privilege granting means may be arranged at a position where all the balls that have flowed out from the opening to the game area can be received, or depending on the state of the balls that have flowed out from the opening to the game area, one The spheres of the part may be arranged at a position where they are accepted and some spheres are not accepted.

Further, the privilege given by the first privilege giving means and the privilege given by the second privilege giving means may be the same privilege or may be different privilege.

In the game machine F1, the passage member includes a bent portion formed in a part thereof, and the opening is formed in a side wall of the bent portion.

Here, by forming a bent portion in a part of the passage member, the throwing direction of the ball can be changed, so that the degree of freedom in layout can be increased. However, when the bent portion is formed in a part of the passage member, the flow of the sphere in the bent portion tends to be stagnant. Therefore, when passing through the bent portion in a state where a plurality of balls are connected, the following ball catches up with the preceding ball, and the following ball presses against the side wall, so that both cannot roll. , There was a problem that ball clogging occurred.

On the other hand, according to the game machine F2, since the passage member includes an opening formed in the side wall of the bent portion, when passing through the bent portion in a state where a plurality of balls are connected, the passage member is rearward to the preceding ball. Even if the moving ball catches up, it is possible to make it difficult to press the preceding ball against the side wall, and it is possible to easily continue the rolling of both. As a result, the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

The bent portion is formed by connecting the first portion of the passage member and the downstream side of the first portion and forming the first portion and the second portion in which the passing direction of the sphere is different. Means the range to be done. In this case, the first portion and the second portion may be passages extending linearly, curved passages, or these. It may be a passage having a combined shape of.

The game machine F2 is provided with a game board in which a game area is formed on the front side, and at least a portion of the bent portion of the passage member on which the opening is formed is arranged on the front side of the game board. The featured game machine F3.

According to the game machine F3, in addition to the effect of the game machine F2, at least a portion of the bent portion of the passage member where an opening is formed is arranged on the front side of the game board, so that the bent portion of the passage member When a ball is clogged, the glass plate is opened so that the ball clogged in the bent portion can be accessed from the opening on the front side of the game board. Therefore, it is possible to improve the workability of the work of clearing the ball clogging. Further, when the game ball flows out from the opening of the passage member to the game area, the player can visually recognize the outflow mode, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced.

In the game machine F3, the second privilege giving means is characterized in that at least the entrance is arranged on the front side of the game board.

According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effect of the game machine F3, at least the entrance of the second privilege means is arranged on the front side of the game board, so that the game ball flows out from the opening of the passage member to the game area. At that time, the player can visually recognize the mode in which the outflowing ball enters the entrance of the second privilege granting means, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced.

In any of the game machines F1 to F4, the second privilege granting means is connected to the passage member, and the connecting passage is provided with a connecting passage for guiding the ball passing through the second privilege granting means to the passage member. The gaming machine F5, which is connected to the passage member on the upstream side of the first privilege granting means.

According to the game machine F5, in addition to the effects of the game machines F1 to F4, a connecting passage for connecting the second privilege granting means to the passage member and guiding the ball passing through the second privilege granting means to the passage member is provided. Since the connecting passage is connected to the passage member on the upstream side of the first privilege granting means, the ball flows out from the opening to the game area while the passage member is being guided, and the outflowing ball is the first. 2 When the privilege granting means is passed, the ball can be guided to the passage member through the connecting passage to pass the first privilege granting means. Therefore, in addition to the privilege being given by the second privilege giving means, the privilege can be given by the first privilege giving means, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

In any of the game machines F1 to F5, a distribution means for alternately distributing the entered ball to one and the other is provided, the passage members are arranged in pairs, and one of the pair of passage members is the distribution. A gaming machine F6 characterized in that it is connected to one of the distribution means and the other is connected to the other of the distribution means.

According to the game machine F6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines F1 to F5, a distribution means for alternately distributing the incoming ball to one and the other is provided, and a pair of passage members are arranged and a pair of passage members are provided. Since one of the passage members is connected to one of the distribution means and the other is connected to the other of the distribution means, the balls can be entered into the passage member one by one. That is, since it is possible to prevent a plurality of balls from entering the passage member in a row, it is possible to suppress clogging of the balls in the passage member.

<Concept of the invention using the sorting device 700 as an example>
In a game machine provided with a passage member through which a ball can pass, a game board having a game area formed on the front side thereof is provided, and the passage member has an entrance for the ball and is arranged on the front side of the game board. The game machine G1 is characterized in that at least a part of the downstream side of the ball entrance is arranged on the back side of the game board.

Here, a game machine including a passage member that forms a passage through which a ball can pass is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-97764). By using the passage (passage member), the ball that has entered the passage can be reliably thrown to a predetermined position. However, if the passage is arranged on the front side of the game board, there is a problem that the space on the front side of the game board is reduced accordingly. That is, the flow area of the ball in the game area is limited (reduced).

On the other hand, according to the game machine G1, the passage member has an entrance on the front side of the game board, and at least a part of the passage member on the downstream side of the entrance is on the back side of the game board. Since it is installed, it is possible to secure a space on the front side of the game board. That is, it is possible to secure a flow area of the ball in the game area.

In the game machine G1, the passage member is branched from the downstream side of the entrance, and is inclined downward toward one side in the width direction and the other side in the width direction of the game board, and is arranged on the back side of the game board. A pair of inclined passages to be provided and a pair of second passages connected to each of the downstream sides of the pair of inclined passages and at least a part of which are arranged on the front side of the game board are provided from the ball entrance. The gaming machine G2 is also below and the winning device is arranged between the pair of second passages.

According to the game machine G2, in addition to the effect of the game machine G1, the passage member is branched from the downstream side of the entrance and is inclined downward and inclined toward one side in the width direction and the other side in the width direction of the game board. It includes a pair of inclined passages arranged on the back side of the game board and a pair of second passages connected to the downstream side of the pair of inclined passages and at least a part of them arranged on the front side of the game board. Therefore, the space on the front side of the game board (the area where the ball flows down in the game area) can be secured by the amount of the inclined passage. Therefore, the winning device can be arranged between the pair of second passages below the entrance. That is, the arrangement of the passage member and the winning device described in the game machine G2 is an arrangement that is impossible with the conventional product in which the passage member is arranged on the front side of the game board, and the inclined passage is provided on the game board like the game machine G2. It was possible for the first time by arranging it on the back side of the.

In the game machine G2, the second passage is formed as a bending passage having a bent portion formed in a part thereof, and an opening is formed in a side wall of the bent portion.

Here, by forming a bent portion in a part of the passage member, the throwing direction of the ball (the position where the ball flows out from the passage to the game area) can be changed, so that the degree of freedom in layout can be increased. However, when the bent portion is formed in a part of the passage member, the flow of the sphere in the bent portion tends to be stagnant. Therefore, when passing through the bent portion in a state where a plurality of balls are connected, the following ball catches up with the preceding ball, and the following ball presses against the side wall, so that both cannot roll. , There was a problem that ball clogging may occur.

On the other hand, according to the game machine G3, in addition to the effect of the game machine G2, the passage member has an opening formed on the side wall of the bent portion, so that the passage member passes through the bent portion in a state where a plurality of balls are connected. In this case, even if the ball following the preceding ball catches up, it is difficult to press the preceding ball against the side wall, and it is possible to easily continue the rolling of both. As a result, the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

The bent portion is formed by connecting the first portion of the passage member and the downstream side of the first portion and forming the first portion and the second portion in which the passing direction of the sphere is different. Means the range to be done. In this case, the first portion and the second portion may be passages extending linearly, curved passages, or these. It may be a passage having a combined shape of.

In the game machine G3, the game machine G4 is characterized in that the opening is arranged on the front side of the game board.

According to the game machine G4, in addition to the effect of the game machine G3, the opening is arranged on the front side of the game board, so that the glass plate is opened when the ball is clogged at the bent portion of the second passage. By doing so, it is possible to access the ball stuck in the bent portion from the opening on the front side of the game board. Therefore, it is possible to improve the workability of the work of clearing the ball clogging.

In the game machine G3 or G4, at least a gap through which a ball can pass is formed between a portion of the second passage provided on the front side of the game board and a lower edge portion of the game area. A game machine G5 characterized by this.

According to the game machine G5, in addition to the effect of the game machine G3 or G4, at least a ball is formed between the portion of the second passage provided on the front side of the game board and the lower edge of the game area. Since a passable gap is formed, it is not necessary to provide out ports on both sides of the second passage. Therefore, it is possible to secure a space on the front side of the game board (a ball flow area in the game area), reduce the number of parts, and reduce the product cost.

In any of the game machines G2 to G5, one side of the game board is provided with a mounting member formed in an open cross-sectional shape and the open side is mounted so as to face the back surface of the game board. The gaming machine G6 is characterized in that the inclined passage is formed between the back surface and the inner surface of the attachment member.

According to the game machine G6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines G2 to G5, one side is formed in an open cross-sectional shape and the open side is attached so as to face the back surface of the game board. Since the attachment member is provided and an inclined passage is formed between the back surface of the game board and the inner surface of the attachment member, the back surface of the game board can also be used as a part of the inclined passage to form the inclined passage. The number of parts for this can be reduced. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

<Concept of the invention using the vertical displacement unit 5400 as an example>
A base member, a first displacement member displaceable with respect to the base member, a first driving means for driving the first displacement member, and a second displacement member displaceable with respect to the first displacement member. In a game machine equipped with
An intermediate member provided between the base member and the first displacement member is provided.
When the first displacement member is displaced by the first driving means and the first displacement member is arranged at a predetermined position, a part of the intermediate member regulates the displacement of the second displacement member. A game machine H1 characterized in that it is arranged in.

Here, conventionally, a base member, a first displacement member displaceable with respect to the base member, a first driving means for driving the first displacement member, and a second displacement member displaceable with respect to the first displacement member. A game machine including a displacement member is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-23874). According to this game machine, the first displacement member arranged at the upper part of the opening of the center frame (the upper part of the game machine) is moved to the central part of the opening of the center frame (the center of the game machine) by the first driving means. The second displacement member can be displaced.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, when the displacement of the second displacement member is stopped at the upper part of the opening of the center frame, the second displacement member may be displaced due to vibration or the like input from the outside of the game machine. , The displacement of the second displacement member makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize other effects. Therefore, when the second displacement member is arranged above the opening of the center frame, the member that regulates the displacement of the second displacement member is displaced by a driving means such as a solenoid and brought into contact with the second displacement member to displace the second displacement member. However, in this case, it is necessary to newly dispose a member and a driving means for regulating the displacement, and there is a problem that the number of parts increases accordingly.

On the other hand, the game machine H1 includes an intervening member interposed between the base member and the first displacement member, the first displacement member is displaced by the first driving means, and the first displacement member is predetermined. When arranged at the position of, a part of the interposition member is arranged at a position that regulates the displacement of the second displacement member. Therefore, when the first displacement member is displaced by the first driving means and the first displacement member is arranged at a predetermined position, a part of the intermediate member regulates the displacement of the second displacement member. The member can have both the original role and the role of regulating the displacement of the second displacement member. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide another portion for restricting the displacement of the second displacement member, and the number of parts can be reduced.

The role of the main body of the intermediate member is a role of transmitting the drive of the first driving means to the first displacement member and a role of connecting the base member and the first displacement member.

In the game machine H1, the second displacement member is pivotally supported by the first displacement member and is rotatable about the shaft support portion, and either one of the second displacement member or the intermediate member is a side surface. The second displacement member or the interposition member is inserted into the inside of the recess, so that the displacement of the second displacement member is regulated. Amusement machine H2.

Here, if the second displacement member is rotationally displaced, it is possible to regulate the rotation of the second displacement member in one direction only by arranging the intermediate member in the rotation region of the second displacement member. , There is a problem that the rotation of the second displacement member in the other direction (the direction opposite to the direction in which the rotation is restricted) cannot be regulated.

On the other hand, according to the game machine H2, in addition to the effect of the game machine H1, the second displacement member is pivotally supported by the first displacement member and is rotatable about the shaft support portion, so that the second displacement member can be rotated. Either one of the member or the interposition member is provided with a recess recessed on the side surface, and either the second displacement member or the interposition member is inserted into the inside of the recess to form a second displacement member. Since the displacement is regulated, when the second displacement member is rotationally displaced, the rotational drive of the second displacement member in both directions can be regulated by the intermediate member. As a result, the regulation portion of the second displacement member by the intermediate member can be reduced.

In the game machine H2, the interposing member is rotatably arranged with respect to the base member, the recess is recessed in the second displacement member, and the interposing member is inserted inside the recess. In the state, the recess has an arc shape whose inner edge is coaxial with the rotation axis of the recess, and the recess has a curved shape whose facing surface facing the recess is smaller than the arc shape of the recess. A gaming machine H3 characterized in that it is formed.

According to the game machine H3, in addition to the effect of the game machine H2, the interposition member is rotatably arranged with respect to the base member, the second displacement member is recessed, and the interposition member is recessed. When inserted inside, the recess is formed in an arc shape whose inner edge is coaxial with the rotation axis of the recess, and the recess has a curved shape in which the facing surface facing the recess is smaller than the arc shape of the recess. Since it is formed, when the intervention member is pulled out from the recess from the state where the intervention member is inserted inside the recess (that is, the displacement of the second displacement member is restricted by the intervention member), the intervention member is formed. The interposition member can be pulled out from the recess of the second displacement member (the restriction of the second displacement member by the interposition member is released) only by rotationally displacement the second displacement member. As a result, it is possible to easily release the restriction on the displacement of the second displacement member by the intermediate member.

The facing surface of the interposition member facing the concave portion does not need to be formed in a curved shape over the entire outer edge, and may partially project toward the concave portion. In that case, the trajectory connecting the protruding portions is curved. The shape may be smaller than the arc shape of the recess.

In the game machine H1, the second displacement member is disposed so as to be slidable with respect to the first displacement member, and either the second displacement member or the intermediate member is recessed in the side surface. When either the second displacement member or the interposition member is inserted inside the recess to regulate the displacement of the second displacement member, the recess is the second displacement member. The gaming machine H4 is characterized in that it is recessed in an end surface in a direction orthogonal to the sliding direction.

Here, when the second displacement member slides with respect to the first displacement member, the interposition member is brought into contact with the outer surface of the first displacement member in the slide direction to regulate the displacement of the second displacement member. , The displacement of the second displacement member can be regulated when the second displacement member is displaced in the direction approaching the interposition member, but the second displacement member is displaced in the direction away from the interposition member. There is a problem that the displacement of the displacement member cannot be regulated.

On the other hand, according to the game machine H4, in addition to the effect of the game machine H1, the second displacement member is arranged so as to be slidable with respect to the first displacement member, and the second displacement member or the intermediate member. When either one has a recess recessed on the side surface and either the second displacement member or the interposition member is inserted inside the recess to regulate the displacement of the second displacement member. Since the recess is recessed in the end surface in the direction orthogonal to the slide direction of the two displacement members, it is possible to regulate the slide displacement of the second displacement member in both directions when the second displacement member slides. As a result, the regulation portion of the second displacement member by the intermediate member can be reduced.

In the game machine H1, the second displacement member is provided with a transmission means for transmitting the drive, and either the intermediate member or the transmission means is provided with a blocking portion for blocking the transmission of the drive by the transmission means. When the member is displaced and the blocking portion abuts on either the interposing member or the transmitting means, the transmission of the drive from the transmitting means to the second displacement member is blocked, and the second displacement member. The gaming machine H5, characterized in that the displacement of is regulated.

According to the game machine H5, in addition to the effect of the game machine H1, a transmission means for transmitting the drive to the second displacement member is provided, and either the intermediate member or the transmission means blocks the transmission of the drive by the transmission means. The interrupting member is displaced so that the interrupting portion abuts on either the interposing member or the transmitting means, thereby blocking the transmission of the drive from the transmitting means to the second displacement member. 2 Since the displacement of the displacement member is regulated, the displacement of the transmission means can be regulated without bringing the intermediate member into contact with the transmission means. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being impaired due to the contact between the interposition member and the second displacement member.

In the game machine H1, the interposition member is rotatably arranged with respect to the base member, and the second displacement member is displaceable with respect to the first displacement member in the rotation axis direction of the interposition member. The gaming machine H6 is characterized in that the displacement of the second displacement member is regulated by the contact of the second displacement member with the end surface of the intermediate member in the rotation axis direction.

According to the game machine H6, in addition to the effect of the game machine H1, the interposition member is rotatably arranged with respect to the base member, and the second displacement member is the interposition member with respect to the first displacement member. Displaceable in the direction of the rotation axis, and the second displacement member comes into contact with the end face of the intervention member in the direction of the rotation axis, so that the displacement of the second displacement member is regulated. When the member comes into contact with the member, the second displacement member can be pressed against the intermediate member in the direction of the rotation axis of the intermediate member. Therefore, in a state where the intermediate member and the second displacement member are in contact with each other (a state in which the displacement of the second displacement member is regulated by the intermediate member), the resistance when the intermediate member rotates can be increased. As a result, it is possible to prevent the intermediate member from rotating while the intermediate member and the second displacement member are in contact with each other.

The game machine H6 includes a second driving means for driving the second displacement member, and the second driving means is housed in a main body portion that generates a magnetic force when electric power is applied and inside the main body portion. A shaft portion that is displaced to either the inside or the outside of the main body portion due to the generation of a magnetic force in the main body portion, and an urging means that urges the shaft portion to either the inside or the outside of the main body portion. The gaming machine H7 is characterized in that, when the shaft portion is displaced by the urging means, the second displacement member comes into contact with the intermediate member.

According to the game machine H7, in addition to the effect of the game machine H6, a second drive means for transmitting the drive to the second displacement member is provided, and the second drive means is a main body that generates a magnetic force when electric power is applied. A shaft portion that is housed inside the main body portion and is displaced to either the inside or the outside of the main body portion by generating a magnetic force in the main body portion, and the shaft portion is either inside or outside the main body portion. The other side is provided with an urging means for urging, and when the shaft portion is displaced by the urging means, the second displacement member comes into contact with the intermediate member, so that the urging force of the urging means causes the second displacement member. 2 The state in which the displacement member and the interposition member are in contact with each other can be maintained. As a result, it is not necessary to continuously apply the driving force for regulating the displacement of the intermediate member to the second driving means, so that the energy consumption can be reduced.

In the game machine H1, the second displacement member comes into contact with the intermediate member, so that the form of displacement of the second displacement member is changed.

According to the game machine H8, in addition to the effect of the game machine H1, the second displacement member changes the displacement form of the second displacement member by coming into contact with the intermediate member, so that the second displacement member It is not necessary to provide other changing means for changing the form of displacement. As a result, the structure of the second displacement member can be simplified when a plurality of displacement forms are provided.

In the game machine H8, the interposition member is rotatably arranged with respect to the base member, and the second displacement member is displaced so as to be slidable with respect to the first displacement member. When the member and the second displacement member are in contact with each other and the slide displacement of the second displacement member is regulated by the interposition member, the contact portion of the interposition member and the second displacement member and the interposition member The gaming machine H9 is characterized in that the direction connecting the rotation axis is set to be the same as the slide displacement direction of the second displacement member.

According to the game machine H9, in addition to the effect of the game machine H8, the interposition member is rotatably arranged with respect to the base member, and the second displacement member is slidably displaceable with respect to the first displacement member. When the interposition member and the second displacement member are in contact with each other and the slide displacement of the second displacement member is regulated by the interposition member, the interposition is provided with the abutting portion of the interposition member and the second displacement member. Since the direction connecting the rotation axis of the member is set to be the same as the slide displacement direction of the second displacement member, the intermediate member is the rotation axis of the intermediate member when the second displacement member comes into contact with the intermediate member. It is possible to suppress the rotation around the axis. As a result, the regulation of the slide displacement of the second displacement member by the intermediate member can be maintained.

In the game machine H9, a projecting portion is projected from either the second displacement member or the interposing member at the contact portion between the second displacement member and the interposing member, and the second displacement member or the interposing member is provided. The gaming machine H10 is characterized in that a receiving portion for receiving the projecting portion is recessed in either one of the installation members, and the projecting portion or the receiving portion is formed in the same triangular cross section.

According to the game machine H10, in addition to the effect of the game machine H9, a projecting portion is projected from either the second displacement member or the interposing member at the contact portion between the second displacement member and the interposing member. A receiving portion for receiving the projecting portion is recessed in either the second displacement member or the interposing member, and the projecting portion or the receiving portion is formed in the same cross-sectional triangular shape. When the displacement is regulated by the interposition member, when the arrangement of the interposition member or the second displacement member is displaced, the receiving portion accepts the insertion portion, and the insertion portion and the receiving portion are inclined to each other. The installation member or the second displacement member can be moved to an appropriate position. As a result, it is possible to prevent the intermediate member from rotating when the second displacement member is brought into contact with the intermediate member in a state where the arrangement of the intermediate member or the second displacement member is displaced.

In the game machine H10, the second displacement member is rotatably arranged with a straight line extending in a direction substantially orthogonal to the slide displacement direction of the second displacement member as a rotation axis, and the second displacement member is slide-displaced. The second displacement member is rotationally displaced about the rotation axis by abutting with the interposition member, and the projecting portion or the receiving portion formed on the second displacement member has the cross-sectional shape of the first. 2 The gaming machine H11 characterized in that it is formed larger as it is separated in the radial direction from the rotation axis of the displacement member.

According to the game machine H11, in addition to the effect of the game machine H10, the second displacement member is rotatably arranged with a straight line extending in a direction substantially orthogonal to the slide displacement direction of the second displacement member as a rotation axis. When the two displacement members slide and displace and come into contact with the intermediate member, the second displacement member is rotationally displaced about the rotation axis, and the projecting portion or the receiving portion formed on the second displacement member has a cross section thereof. Since the shape is formed larger as it is radially separated from the rotation axis of the second displacement member, when the second displacement member abuts on the intermediate member and rotates, the amount of rotation of the second displacement member is increased. , The contact area between the projecting portion and the receiving portion can be increased. Therefore, the contact area between the receiving portion and the inserting portion can be maximized at the maximum rotation position of the second displacement member. As a result, the force applied to the receiving portion and the inserting portion can be dispersed, and damage to the second displacement member and the interposing member can be suppressed.

In the game machine H1, the interposition member is a rack on which gears are engraved, and the second displacement member is displaceably arranged in a direction orthogonal to the moving direction of the rack. Characteristic gaming machine H12.

According to the game machine H12, in addition to the effect of the game machine H1, the interposition member is a rack in which gears are engraved, and the second displacement member is displaced in a direction orthogonal to the moving direction of the rack. Since it is possibly arranged, it is possible to prevent the rack from being displaced by the impact when the displacement of the second displacement member is regulated by the rack (intermediate member).

The game machine H12 is provided with a transmission means for transmitting a drive to the second displacement member, the transmission means is connected to the rack, and the second displacement member is displaced by the displacement of the rack. Game machine H13.

According to the game machine H13, in addition to the effect of the game machine H12, a transmission means for transmitting the drive to the second displacement member is provided, the transmission means is connected to the rack, and the second displacement member is displaced by the displacement of the rack. Therefore, it is not necessary to arrange the drive source of the second displacement member elsewhere, and the number of parts can be reduced.

Further, it is possible to suppress the movement of the second displacement member in a state where the displacement of the second displacement member is regulated by the rack. As a result, it is possible to prevent the rack and the second displacement member from being damaged due to the displacement of the second displacement member in a state where the displacement of the second displacement member is regulated due to a malfunction or the like.

<Concept of the invention using the vertical displacement unit 5400 as an example>
In a gaming machine including a base member, a first displacement member that is displaced between a retracted position and a first position with respect to the base member, and a second displacement member that is displaced with respect to the first displacement member.
A regulating member provided in the displacement region of the second displacement member in a state where the first displacement member is arranged in the retracted position is provided.
The gaming machine I1 is characterized in that, when the first displacement member is displaced from the retracted position to the first position, the regulating member is displaced in a direction away from the displacement region of the second displacement member.

Here, conventionally, a base member, a first displacement member that is displaced between a retracted position and a first position with respect to the base member, and a second displacement member that is displaced with respect to the first displacement member are provided. A game machine is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-23874). According to this game machine, the first displacement member arranged at the retracted position can be displaced to the first position to displace the second displacement member.

However, in the conventional game machine described above, when the displacement of the second displacement member is stopped at the retracted position, the second displacement member may be displaced due to vibration or the like input from the outside of the game machine, and the second displacement member may be displaced. Displacement of the displacement member makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize other effects. Therefore, it is conceivable to arrange the second displacement member on the back side of the center frame at the retracted position to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the displacement of the second displacement member at the retracted position. There is a problem that the effect area due to the displacement of the second displacement member is reduced as the frame is enlarged.

Further, when the second displacement member is arranged at the retracted position, it is conceivable to bring a part of the center frame into contact with the second displacement member to regulate the displacement of the second displacement member. However, when allowing the displacement of the second displacement member, it is necessary to sufficiently separate the second displacement member from the center frame, and there is a problem that the effect area due to the displacement of the second displacement member is reduced accordingly. there were.

On the other hand, according to the game machine I1, a regulating member is provided in the displacement region of the second displacement member in a state where the first displacement member is arranged in the retracted position, and the regulating member is the first displacement member. When is displaced from the retracted position to the first position, it is displaced in the direction away from the displacement region of the second displacement member, so that the regulating member is separated from the displacement region of the second displacement member by the amount of the second displacement member. The regulating member can be moved out of the displacement region of the above in a short time. As a result, the effect area due to the displacement of the second displacement member can be expanded.

The game machine I2 is characterized in that the first displacement member can be displaced from a retracted position to a second position in a direction opposite to the first position.

According to the game machine I2, in addition to the effect of the game machine I1, the first displacement member can be displaced from the retracted position to the second position in the direction opposite to the first position, so that the displacement of the second displacement member causes it. The effect area can be formed on both sides of the retracted position. As a result, the effect area due to the displacement of the second displacement member can be expanded.

In the game machine I2, the second displacement member is displaced from the regulated position by the regulating member, and the first displacement member is placed in the second position or the second position via the retracted position from either the first position or the second position. The gaming machine I3 is characterized in that the regulating member is arranged outside the movement locus of the second displacement member when it is displaced to the one position side.

According to the game machine I3, in addition to the effect of the game machine I2, the second displacement member is displaced from the position regulated by the restricting member, and the first displacement member is displaced from either the first position or the second position. When the displacement member is displaced to the second position or the first position side via the retracted position, the regulating member is arranged outside the movement locus of the second displacement member, so that the first displacement member moves from the first position side to the first position. It is possible to prevent the second displacement member from interfering with the regulating member when the second displacement member is displaced from the second position side or the second position side to the first position side via the retracted position.

That is, when the first displacement member is displaced from the first position side to the second position side or from the second position side to the first position side via the retracted position, the second displacement member is arranged at the regulated position. In the state, when the first displacement member passes the retracted position, the second displacement member and the regulating member come close to each other. Therefore, when the second displacement member is arranged at a position slightly deviated from the regulated position or when the second displacement member is displaced due to the displacement vibration of the first displacement member, the second displacement member may interfere with the regulated member. Since the second displacement member is displaced from the regulated position and the restricting member is arranged outside the displacement locus of the second displacement member, interference between the second displacement member and the restricting member can be suppressed. As a result, the displacement of the first displacement member from the first position to the second position or from the second position to the first position can be smoothly performed.

In the game machine I2, the restricting member is displaced in the direction in which the first displacement member is displaced from the retracted position to the first position or the second position, and is in a direction orthogonal to the displacement direction of the first displacement member. A game machine I4 characterized by being displaced to.

According to the game machine I4, in addition to the effect of the game machine I2 or I3, the regulating member is displaced in the direction in which the first displacement member is displaced from the retracted position to the first position or the second position, and the first displacement. Since the member is displaced in a direction orthogonal to the displacement direction of the member, the first displacement member is moved from the retracted position to the first position or the first position in a state where the second displacement member is stopped at the regulated position with respect to the first displacement member. It can be displaced to two positions. That is, the regulating member can be displaced from the displacement region of the second displacement member while being displaced in the direction in which the second displacement member moves due to the displacement of the first displacement member. As a result, the first displacement member can be displaced in both the first position and the second position from the state in which the displacement of the second displacement member is regulated by the regulating member.

In the game machine I4, the restricting member is rotatable about a straight line extending in a direction orthogonal to the displacement direction of the first displacement member, and the second displacement member is provided with a recess recessed in the outer surface. The gaming machine I5 is characterized in that the displacement of the second displacement member is regulated by arranging the radially outer end of the regulating member with respect to the rotation axis of the regulating member inside the recess.

According to the game machine I5, in addition to the effect of the game machine I4, the regulating member is made rotatable around a straight line extending in a direction orthogonal to the displacement direction of the first displacement member, and the second displacement member is on the outer surface. A concave portion to be recessed is provided, and the displacement of the second displacement member is regulated by arranging the radially outer end of the restricting member with respect to the rotation axis of the restricting member inside the concave portion. The regulating member can be separated from the displacement region of the second displacement member while being displaced in the direction in which the second displacement member moves due to the displacement of the first displacement member only by the operation of rotating. As a result, the first displacement member can be easily displaced in both the first position and the second position from the state where the displacement of the second displacement member is regulated by the regulating member.

The game machine I4 includes a second driving means for driving the second displacement member, the regulating member is disposed in contact with the outer surface of the second displacement member, and the second displacement member is the second drive. The gaming machine I6 is characterized in that when it is displaced by means, it is pressed against the outer surface of the second displacement member and is displaced in a direction away from the displacement region of the second displacement member.

According to the game machine I6, in addition to the effect of the game machine I4, a second driving means for driving the second displacement member is provided, and the regulating member is arranged in contact with the outer surface of the second displacement member. When the displacement member is displaced by the second driving means, it is pressed against the outer surface of the second displacement member and is displaced in a direction away from the displacement region of the second displacement member. The displacement restriction can be lifted by the displacement of the second displacement member by the second driving means. Therefore, the regulation of the regulating member can be released with the displacement of the second displacement member by the second driving means. Therefore, the regulation of the regulating member is regulated as compared with the case where the regulating member is displaced by the displacement of the first displacement member. It can be released in a short time. As a result, the effect area due to the displacement of the second displacement member can be increased.

In the game machine I5, the regulation member includes a transmission member to which the drive of rotation in one direction is transmitted to the regulation member, the transmission member is connected to the first displacement member, and the first displacement member is one. The gaming machine I7 is characterized in that when it is displaced in a direction, the restricting member is displaced, and when the first displacement member is displaced in another direction, the restricting member is not displaced.

According to the game machine I7, in addition to the effect of the game machine I5, the regulating member includes a transmission member to which the drive of rotation in one direction is transmitted to the regulating member, and the transmission member is connected to the first displacement member. When the first displacement member is displaced in one direction, the regulating member is displaced, and when the first displacement member is displaced in the other direction, the regulating member is not displaced. Therefore, the second displacement member by the regulating member The degree of freedom of the regulation position can be improved. As a result, the exercise area due to the displacement of the second displacement member can be expanded.

In any of the game machines A1 to A10, B1 to B10, C1 to C9, D1 to D9, E1 to E17, F1 to F6, G1 to G6, H1 to H13, and I1 to I7, the game machine is a slot machine. A game machine K1 characterized by this. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. It is a game machine provided with a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B10, C1 to C9, D1 to D9, E1 to E17, F1 to F6, G1 to G6, H1 to H13, and I1 to I7, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. A gaming machine K2 characterized by being there. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed by the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some of them are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

In any of the game machines A1 to A10, B1 to B10, C1 to C9, D1 to D9, E1 to E17, F1 to F6, G1 to G6, H1 to H13, and I1 to I7, the game machine is a pachinko machine. The gaming machine K3, which is characterized by being fused with a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "
<Others>
In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a base member, a first displacement member that is displaced between a retracted position and a first position with respect to the base member, and a second displacement member that is displaced with respect to the first displacement member. , Is known (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-23874). However, the above-mentioned gaming machine has a problem that the effect region due to the displacement of the second displacement member is reduced. The present technical idea has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of expanding the effect area due to the displacement of the second displacement member.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 has a base member, a first displacement member that is displaced between the retracted position and the first position with respect to the base member, and the first displacement member. It is provided with a second displacement member that is displaced by the surface, and is provided with a regulating member that is disposed in a displacement region of the second displacement member in a state where the first displacement member is arranged at a retracted position. Is displaced in a direction away from the displacement region of the second displacement member when the first displacement member is displaced from the retracted position to the first position.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 2 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1. The first displacement member can be displaced from the retracted position to the second position in the direction opposite to the first position.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in which the second displacement member is displaced from the regulated position by the regulating member, and the first displacement member is in the first position or the second position. When displaced from either side to the second position or the first position side via the retracted position, the regulating member is arranged outside the movement locus of the second displacement member.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1, the effect area due to the displacement of the second displacement member can be expanded.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1, effect regions due to displacement of the second displacement member can be formed on both sides of the retracted position.
According to the game machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect of the game machine described in the technical idea 2, the first displacement member can be smoothly displaced.
<Sign>
10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
13 game board
64 1st prize opening (ball entrance)
81 Third symbol display device (liquid crystal display device)
410 front base (base member)
416 axis branch (2nd axis)
417 protrusions (1st axis)
430 displacement member (arm member)
431 Drive side sliding hole (sliding groove)
441,9954 drive motor (drive means, first drive means)
443 Transmission gear (crank member)
443a protrusion (pin part)
450 decorative member (displacement member)
452 Front base (main body member)
452h contact surface (contact member)
456 gear (transmission means)
457,8963 drive motor (second drive means)
491c bulge (opposing member)
492 roller member (rotating member)
492b Shaft (axis)
500, 5500, 10500, 13500 rotation unit (rotation display device, second displacement member)
510 Top surface base (part of main body member)
512,522 Blower hole (through hole)
520 Bottom base (part of main body member)
531 Base member (base)
532 LED (light emitting means)
540 intermediate plate (intermediate member)
543 Irradiation hole (through hole)
544 Irradiation regulation part (seat part)
546 groove
550 front cover (transparent part, cover member)
560 reflector (opposing member)
563a inclined surface (opposing member)
570 rotation transmission unit (base member, shaft member)
610 frame body (center frame)
621 Cover member (front member)
621a first part
621b second part
630 sensor (sensor device)
640a 2nd prize device (winning device)
730 winning member (passage member)
740 passage member (bending member)
742 Guide (inclined surface)
743 Lower protrusion (bent)
744 opening
750 interposition member (passage member)
760 distribution member (passage member, attachment member)
5430, 9430 Displacement members (intermediate members, regulatory members)
5438 reception section
5450, 6450, 7450, 10450, 11450, 12450, 13450 Decorative member (first displacement member)
5514, 13514 recess
6436 cutoff
7910, 8963 solenoid (second driving means)
7911 body
7912 Shaft
8930, 9930 slide unit (first displacement member)
8940, 9940, rotating unit (second displacement member)
8942c insertion part (protruding part)
9936, 9937, 9938 transmission gear (transmission means)
9430 Displacement member (rack)
9950 base unit (base member)
13495 Projection member (regulatory member)
KR1 1st throwing route (vertical passage, 2nd passage)
KR2 2nd throwing route (extended passage, 2nd passage)
KR3 3rd throwing route (part of the inclined passage)
KR4 4th throwing route (part of the inclined passage)

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
100-104 board box
5 50 0 rotation unit (second means)
5410 Front base (base member)
543 0 displacement member (regulation member)
545 0 decorative member (first means)
5460 front cover (base member)
P1 guide rod (base member)
RY2 rotation area (displacement area)

Claims (2)

A base member, a first means for displacement between a predetermined position and a first position relative to the base member, second means for displacing with respect to the first means, in a gaming machine comprising,
Comprising at least disposed possible regulating member to a displacement region of said second means said first means is have you in a state of being arranged at a predetermined position,
When an event occurs in which the first means is displaced from a predetermined position to the first position, the regulating member is displaced in a direction away from the displacement region of the second means .
It said first means, a game machine, wherein Rukoto is a displaceable from a predetermined position to the second position of the first position in the opposite direction. Gaming machine of claim 1, wherein Rukoto comprising a substrate box.

Images